Pioneer Home Theater System SX LX70SW User Manual
Operating Instructions  
®
®
SX-LX70SW  
SSP-LX70ST  
SDVR-LX70D  
AS-LX70  
Audio Multi-channel Receiver Subwoofer  
Satellite Speaker  
HDD/DVD Recorder  
Accessory Box  
HDD/DVD Recorder Home Cinema System  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VENTILATION CAUTION  
If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC  
outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed  
and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and  
mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of  
this unit should be performed only by qualified  
service personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the  
cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make  
sure it is properly disposed of after removal.  
When installing this unit, make sure to leave space  
around the unit for ventilation to improve heat  
radiation (at least 10 cm at top, 10 cm at rear, and  
10 cm at each side).  
WARNING  
Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for  
ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the  
product, and to protect it from overheating. To  
prevent fire hazard, the openings should never be  
blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers,  
table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the  
The equipment should be disconnected by removing  
the mains plug from the wall socket when left  
unused for a long period of time (for example, when  
on vacation).  
D3-4-2-2-1a_A_En  
equipment on thick carpet or a bed.  
D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En  
CAUTION  
The ꢀ STANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not  
completely shut off all power from the AC outlet.  
Since the power cord serves as the main disconnect  
device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from  
the AC outlet to shut down all power. Therefore,  
make sure the unit has been installed so that the  
power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC  
outlet in case of an accident. To avoid fire hazard,  
the power cord should also be unplugged from the  
AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time  
POWER-CORD CAUTION  
Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the  
plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power  
cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a  
short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a  
piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the  
cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other  
cords. The power cords should be routed such that they  
are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord  
can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check  
the power cord once in a while. When you find it  
(for example, when on vacation).  
D3-4-2-2-2a_A_En  
damaged, ask your nearest PIONEER authorized  
service center or your dealer for a replacement. S002_En  
This product is for general household purposes. Any  
failure due to use for other than household purposes  
(such as long-term use for business purposes in a  
restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which  
requires repair will be charged for even during the  
warranty period.  
K041_En  
If you want to dispose this product, do not mix it with general household waste. There is a separate collection system for used  
electronic products in accordance with legislation that requires proper treatment, recovery and recycling.  
Private households in the member states of the EU, in Switzerland and Norway may return their used electronic products free of charge to  
designated collection facilities or to a retailer (if you purchase a similar new one).  
For countries not mentioned above, please contact your local authorities for the correct method of disposal.  
By doing so you will ensure that your disposed product undergoes the necessary treatment, recovery and recycling and thus prevent potential  
negative effects on the environment and human health.  
K058_A_En  
Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified  
service personnel.  
IMPORTANT: THE MOULDED PLUG  
This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for your safety and convenience. A 5 amp fuse is fitted in this plug. Should the  
fuse need to be replaced, please ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating of 5 amps and that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362.  
Check for the ASTA mark  
or the BSI mark  
on the body of the fuse.  
If the plug contains a removable fuse cover, you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced. If you lose the fuse cover the plug  
must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained. A replacement fuse cover can be obtained from your local dealer.  
If the fitted moulded plug is unsuitable for your socket outlet, then the fuse shall be removed and the plug cut off and disposed of  
safely. There is a danger of severe electrical shock if the cut off plug is inserted into any 13 amp socket.  
If a new plug is to be fitted, please observe the wiring code as shown below. If in any doubt, please consult a qualified electrician.  
IMPORTANT: The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code:  
Blue : Neutral Brown : Live  
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in  
your plug, proceed as follows ;  
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the  
letter N or coloured BLACK.  
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the  
letter L or coloured RED.  
How to replace the fuse: Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse.  
D3-4-2-1-2-2_B_En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section One  
Contents  
05 Getting started  
ꢀ
Section One  
Using the Auto MCACC setup for optimal  
surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
What’s in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5  
01 Speaker Setup Guide  
06 Listening to your system  
Safety precautions when setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Home theater sound setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Standard surround setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Front surround setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Preparing the speakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Using the supplied speaker bases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
When not using the supplied speaker bases . . . . . . 7  
Connect the speaker system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
Additional notes on speaker placement . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
Effective Sound (for optimum sound) . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
Auto listening mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
Listening in surround sound. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
Dolby Pro Logic II Music settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
Center image setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
Using Advanced Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
Using Front Stage Surround Advance . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
Listening in stereo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
Genre Sync Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
Using the Sound Retriever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
Listening with MCACC Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Using Midnight, Loudness and  
02 Connecting up  
Receiver subwoofer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
Side panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
Back of display unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
HDD/DVD Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Front panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Basic connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
Quiet listening modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Adjusting the bass and treble. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Adjusting sound delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
07 Listening to the radio  
Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
Improving poor FM reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
Improving poor AM sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
Changing the noise cut mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
Memorizing stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
Listening to station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
Using RDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
Displaying RDS information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
Searching for RDS programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
03 Controls and displays  
Display unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
HDD/DVD Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
Common Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
Inserting a CA module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
Remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
Operating the receiver subwoofer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
Operating the built-in FM/AM tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
LCD touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
Operating the supplied HDD/DVD Recorder . . . . . 20  
Operating Pioneer plasma televisions and TVs. . . . 22  
Operating a Pioneer Blu-ray Disc player. . . . . . . . . 24  
Operating a Pioneer DVD player. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
Putting the batteries in the remote control . . . . . . . . 26  
Using the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
08 Surround sound settings  
Using the Sound Setup menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
Channel level setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
Speaker distance setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
Dynamic Range Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
Dual mono setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
Using the Virtual Surround Back mode . . . . . . . . . 39  
LFE Attenuate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Adjusting the channel levels using the test tone. . . . 39  
09 Other connections  
04 Before you start  
Connecting auxiliary components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
Connecting for digital audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
Connecting an analog audio component . . . . . . . . 40  
Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Listening to an external audio source . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Connecting external antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
About control out connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
Connecting using HDMI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
HDMI mode setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
About HDMI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
Setting up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
Basic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Operating the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Using the LCD touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Watching a DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Listening to a CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
Watching a title recorded on the HDD . . . . . . . . . . 29  
Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
4
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section One  
Installation and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Hints on installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Surround sound formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
Dolby. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
DTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
Tuner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Displayed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
10 HDMI Control  
Making the HDMI Control connections . . . . . . . . . . 44  
Setting the HDMI options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
Setting the HDMI Control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
Setting the Auto Delay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Audio input settings from Plasma televisions  
(TV Input). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Before using synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Synchronized amp mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Synchronized amp mode operations . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Canceling synchronized amp mode. . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
11 Additional information  
ꢀ
Section Two  
Dimming the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Setting the sleep timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Setting up the remote to control your TV . . . . . . . . . 47  
TV Preset code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Resetting the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Operating instructions for HDD/DVD  
Recorder (SDVR-LX70D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54  
What’s in the box  
Please confirm that the following items are all supplied.  
Accessory box (AS-LX70):  
Receiver subwoofer (SX-LX70SW) box:  
• Remote control (page 18)  
• Cleaning cloth  
• AA/LR6 alkaline batteries x4 (page 26)  
• Power cords x2 (page 13)  
• Display unit (page 16)  
Speakers (SSP-LX70ST) box:  
• Speakers (front/center x2, surround x2) (page 6, 11)  
• Speaker cables x6 (page 11)  
• Speaker bases x4 (page 6)  
• Non-skid pads x16 (page 6, 7)  
• Screws x4 (page 7)  
• AM loop antenna (page 11)  
• FM wire antenna (page 11)  
• Microphone (for Auto MCACC setup) (page 30)  
• HDMI cables x2 (page 13, 42, 44)  
• Control cable (page 13)  
• Display cable (page 11)  
• Optical digital cable (page 13)  
• iPod cable (page 41)  
• G-LINK™ cable (page 63)  
• RF antenna cables x2 (page 13)  
• These operating instructions  
• Warranty card  
5
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Speaker Setup Guide  
01  
CShpapetera1ker Setup Guide  
Front surround setup  
This setup is ideal when rear surround speaker  
placement isn’t possible or you want to avoid running  
long speaker cables in your listening area. Use this setup  
together with the Front Stage Surround Advance modes  
in page 33.  
Safety precautions when setting up  
When assembling the speakers, lay them down flat on  
their side to avoid accidents or injury. Make sure to use a  
stable surface when assembling, setting up, and placing  
the speakers.  
Surround (L)  
Surround (R)  
Front/center (R)  
Front/center (L)  
Home theater sound setup  
Depending on the size and characteristics of your room,  
you can place your speakers in one of two ways using this  
system.  
Receiver  
subwoofer  
Standard surround setup  
This is a standard multichannel surround sound speaker  
setup for optimal 5.1 channel home theater sound.  
Listening position  
Front/center (L)  
Front/center (R)  
Preparing the speakers  
This unit comes with speaker bases that can be used to  
adjust the speakers to the design of the room in which  
they are placed.  
Receiver  
subwoofer  
Listening position  
Using the supplied speaker bases  
1
Attach the non-skid pads to the speaker bases, as  
shown below.  
Surround (L)  
Surround (R)  
Use the adhesive side of the pads to attach them to the  
base of each speaker base.  
Non-skid pads x 16  
Each speaker base  
6
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Speaker Setup Guide  
01  
2
Attach the speaker bases.  
Place the speaker atop a supplied speaker base, and fix  
the base in place by using one of the supplied screws.  
Connect the speaker system  
Refer to Connecting up to connect the speakers properly.  
After connecting everything, place the speakers as  
shown in the diagram above for optimal surround sound.  
After placing the speakers, run the Auto MCACC setup  
(page 30) to complete your surround sound setup.  
• The supplied speaker bases come in two different  
shapes. You can determine the correct base for a  
speaker by checking if the screw’s location lines up  
correctly when the speaker is placed atop the base.  
(There are specific bases for the front/center (L) and  
surround speaker (R), and for the front/center (R) and  
surround speaker (L), with two of each type included.)  
Additional notes on speaker placement  
• Install the main front left and right speakers at an  
equal distance from the TV.  
Speaker  
• When using the Standard surround setup, install the  
surround speakers slightly above ear level for  
optimum effect.  
Screw  
• When using the Front surround setup, separate the  
left and right speakers by about 1.5 m for optimum  
effect.  
Speaker base  
Precautions:  
• Do not place the speaker on an unstable surface, as  
doing so may cause the speaker to fall and cause  
damage or bodily injury.  
When not using the supplied speaker bases  
•
Attach the non-skid pads to the base of each of  
• All speakers supplied with this system are  
the front/center and surround speakers (as shown).  
Use the adhesive side of the pads to attach them to the  
base of each speaker.  
magnetically shielded. However, depending on the  
installation location, colour distortion may occur if a  
speaker is installed extremely close to the screen of a  
television set. If this happens, turn the power switch  
of the television set OFF, and turn it ON after 15 min  
to 30 min. If the problem persists, place the speaker  
system away from the television set.  
• For safety, make sure that there is no exposed bare  
speaker wire outside of the speaker terminals.  
• Do not connect the supplied speakers with any other  
amplifier. This may result in malfunction or fire.  
Non-skid pads x 16  
Front/center and surround speakers  
• Do not connect any speakers other than those  
supplied to this system.  
• The speaker system grill cannot be removed. Do not  
try to forcibly remove it since doing so may damage  
the grille.  
• When cleaning the cabinet, use the provided  
cleaning cloth.  
Do not allow alcohol, thinner, benzene, or  
insecticides to come into contact with the surface,  
since finish discoloration may occur.  
Also, when using chemically impregnated cleaning  
cloths, follow their precautions carefully.  
7
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting up  
02  
CChoaptnern2 ecting up  
Receiver subwoofer  
HDMI  
OUT  
IN  
3
IN  
2
IN  
1
SYSTEM  
Rear panel  
Side panel  
HDMI  
OUT  
IN 3  
IN 2  
IN 1  
ANTENNA  
AM LOOP  
L
R
R
L
L
R
L
OUT  
1
OUT  
2
IN  
1
IN  
2
R
AC IN  
FRONT  
CENTER  
FRONT  
SURROUND  
SUBWOOFER  
CONTROL  
OPTICAL  
DIGITAL  
FM  
(
)
SPEAKERS 8 Ω  
UNBAL 75 Ω  
ANALOG  
AUDIO IN  
SYSTEM  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
4
CONTROL OUT jacks (x2)  
Rear panel  
HDMI OUT connector  
Connect the supplied HDD/DVD recorder to the CONTROL  
OUT 1 jack with the supplied control cable. You can  
connect another component to the other Control Out jack.  
1
Connect to a television that has an HDMI terminal.  
2
HDMI IN connectors (x3)  
5
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN jacks (x2)  
Use high-quality audio/video connection with compatible  
HDMI devices. Connect the included HDD/DVD recorder  
to HDMI IN 1.  
To listen to optical digital audio, change the input to  
Digital 1 or Digital 2.  
When the digital output jacks of your TV are connected to  
these jacks, set ‘TV Input’ (see page 46).  
To select this input, choose HDMI 1 to HDMI 3.  
3
SYSTEM connector  
6
7
8
AM LOOP antenna terminal  
FM antenna socket  
Connect to the display unit.  
Side panel  
ANALOG AUDIO IN jacks  
• There is a cover over the connectors on the side  
panel.  
A. When making connections, lift the two hooks and  
remove the cover.  
B. Once connections are finished, line up the three  
positions and place the cover back in its original  
position.  
Handle sound from an external component by using  
stereo audio code. To listen to analog audio, change the  
input to Analog.  
When the analog output jacks of your TV are connected  
to these jacks, set ‘TV Input’ (see page 46).  
9
SPEAKERS terminals  
Match the colours of the speaker cords to their respective  
connectors.  
B
10 AC IN – Power inlet  
Important  
A
• You must connect the supplied HDD/DVD recorder  
with a control cable. If not, the HDD/DVD recorder  
may not operate properly.  
8
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting up  
02  
Back of display unit  
2
F.AUDIO input  
To listen to audio from an external component, connect  
with a stereo mini-plug cable. Once connected, the input  
automatically changes to Front Audio In.  
DISPLAY UNIT  
iPod  
MCACC  
SYSTEM  
F.AUDIO  
SETUP MIC  
3
iPod input terminal  
Use to connect your Apple iPod as an audio source.  
When you connect an iPod, the input automatically  
changes to iPod.  
1
2
3
4
1
SYSTEM connector  
4
MCACC SETUP MIC jack  
Connect to the receiver subwoofer.  
Use to connect the supplied microphone for the Auto  
MCACC setup (see page 30).  
HDD/DVD Recorder  
Rear panel  
Front panel  
ANTENNA  
IN  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO OUT  
AC IN  
AV (INPUT 1/DECODER)  
2
COAXIAL  
HDMI OUT  
ANTENNA(DIGITAL)  
IN  
DV IN  
USB  
G-LINK CONTROL  
IN  
OUT  
5
OUT  
V
30 mA  
AV  
1
(RGB) – TV  
10 11  
12  
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
5
6
ANTENNA (DIGITAL) IN/OUT  
Rear panel  
ANTENNA IN (RF IN)/OUT  
Connect your TV antenna to the ANTENNA IN (RF IN)  
jack. The signal is passed through to the ANTENNA OUT  
Connect your DTV antenna to the ANTENNA (DIGITAL)  
IN jack. The signal is passed through to the ANTENNA  
(DIGITAL) OUT jack for connection to your TV.  
1
7
HDMI OUT  
jack for connection to your TV.  
Connect to the HDMI IN 1 jack of the receiver subwoofer.  
2
AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector  
8
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (COAXIAL)  
Audio/video input/output SCART-type AV connector for  
connecting to a VCR, or other equipment with a SCART  
connector. The input accepts video, S-Video and RGB.  
See AV2/L1 In on page 155 for how to set this up.  
Coaxial digital audio jack for connecting to Dolby Digital/  
DTS/MPEG decoder or other equipment with a digital input.  
9
AC IN – Power inlet  
3
AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector  
Front panel  
On the front panel there is a flip-down cover that hides  
more connections.  
Audio/video output SCART-type AV connector for  
connecting to a TV or other equipment with a SCART  
connector. The video output is switchable between video,  
S-Video and RGB. See AV1 Out on page 154 for how to set  
this up.  
10 DV IN  
A DV input i.LINK connector, suitable for connecting a  
DV camcorder.  
4
G-LINK™  
Use to connect the supplied G-LINK™ cable to enable  
GUIDE Plus+ to control an external satellite receiver,  
etc.  
11 USB port (Type B)  
USB port for connecting a PictBridge-compatible printer  
or PC.  
®
5
CONTROL IN  
12 USB port (Type A)  
USB port for connecting a digital camera, keyboard or  
other USB device.  
Connect to the CONTROL OUT 1 jack of the receiver  
subwoofer.  
9
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting up  
02  
Basic connections  
Receiver subwoofer  
Display unit  
HDMI  
OUT  
IN  
3
IN  
2
IN  
1
DISPLAY UNIT  
iPod  
MCACC  
SETUP MIC  
SYSTEM  
F.AUDIO  
SYSTEM  
INPUT  
Rear panel  
Side panel  
ANTENNA  
1
L
AM LOOP  
R
R
L
L
R
L
SYSTEM  
R
FRONT  
CENTER  
FRONT  
SURROUND  
SUB  
Display cable  
FM  
(
)
SPEAKERS 8 Ω  
UNBAL 75 Ω  
ANALOG  
AUDIO IN  
4
2
3
CL  
FL  
FR  
CR  
AM loop antenna  
FM antenna  
Front/center  
speaker (R)  
Front/center  
speaker (L)  
Listening position  
Surround  
speaker (R)  
Surround  
speaker (L)  
SL  
SR  
Important  
WARNING  
• When connecting this system or changing  
connections, be sure to switch power off and  
disconnect the power cord from the wall socket.  
After completing all connections, connect the power  
cords to the wall socket.  
• Pioneer bears no responsibility for accidents  
resulting from faulty assembly or installation,  
insufficient mounting strength of walls, mounting  
fixtures (or other building fixtures), misuse or natural  
disasters.  
10  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting up  
02  
1
Connect the display unit to the receiver subwoofer.  
4
Connect each speaker.  
Plug the display cable into the connector on the rear of  
the display unit, then plug the other end of the display  
cable into SYSTEM connector on the receiver subwoofer.  
• Each speaker cable has a colour-coded connector at  
one end and two wires at the other end.  
Colour-coded wire  
(Connect to speaker)  
Caution  
Colour-coded connector  
(Connect to receiver subwoofer)  
• Do not attempt to attach the display unit to the wall.  
2
Assemble the AM loop antenna.  
• Twist and pull off the protective shields on each wire.  
a
b
c
• Connect the wires to the speaker. Each speaker in the  
illustration can be identified by means of the colour-  
coded indicator provided on the rear-surface model  
label. Match the colour-coded wire with the colour  
indicator on the model label, then insert the colour-  
coded wire into the red (+) side and the other wire  
into the black (–) side.  
a. Bend the stand in the direction indicated by the  
arrow.  
b. Clip the loop onto the stand.  
c. If you want to fix to a wall or other surface, perform  
step b after first securing the stand with screws.  
It is recommended that you determine the reception  
strength before securing the stand with the screws.  
Black (–) Red (+)  
Colour-coded wire  
1
3
Connect the AM and FM antennas .  
a. Connect one wire of the AM loop antenna to each AM  
2
antenna terminal .  
For each terminal, press down on the tab to open;  
insert the wire, then release to secure.  
2
3
1
• Connect the other end to the colour-coded speaker  
terminals on the side of the receiver subwoofer. Make  
sure to insert completely.  
Be careful when inserting the speaker plug, as it  
must be inserted in the proper direction when being  
plugged into one of the terminals. Please make sure  
to connect correctly.  
3
b. Push the FM antenna plug onto the center pin of the  
FM antenna socket.  
Note  
1 • Keep antenna cables away from other cables, the display unit, receiver subwoofer and HDD/DVD recorder.  
• If reception with the supplied antenna is poor, see Improving poor FM reception and Improving poor AM sound on page 35 or Connecting  
external antennas on page 42.  
• Do not attach any antenna other than the provided loop antenna, or an external antenna as described on page 43.  
2 • Don’t let it come into contact with metal objects and avoid placing near computers, television sets or other electrical appliances.  
• If radio reception is poor, you may be able improve it by re-inserting each antenna wire into the opposite terminal.  
• For best reception, do not untwist the AM loop antenna wires or wrap them around the loop antenna.  
3 To ensure optimum reception, make sure the FM antenna is fully extended and not coiled or hanging at the rear of the unit.  
11  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting up  
02  
Antenna wall outlet or  
indoor antenna  
Antenna wall outlet  
RF antenna cable  
RF antenna cable  
ANTENNA  
(DIGITAL) IN  
ANTENNA  
IN  
ANTENNA  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO OUT  
8
IN  
AC IN  
AV  
2
(INPUT 1/DECODER)  
COAXIAL  
HDMI OUT  
ANTENNA(DIGITAL)  
IN  
G-LINK CONTROL  
IN  
OUT  
5
OUT  
V
30 mA  
AV  
1
(RGB) – TV  
ANTENNA  
OUT  
CONTROL  
IN  
HDD/DVD Recorder  
HDMI  
OUT  
5
Receiver subwoofer  
Rear panel  
Side panel  
HDMI  
OUT  
IN 3  
IN 2  
IN 1  
ANTENNA  
L
AM LOOP  
OUT  
1
OUT  
2
IN  
1
IN 2  
R
CONTROL  
OPTICAL  
DIGITAL  
FM  
UNBAL 75 Ω  
ANALOG  
AUDIO IN  
SYSTEM  
or  
6
7
From digital audio  
output (optical)  
From Audio output  
To HDMI input  
RF antenna cable  
TV  
To Antenna in  
-
12  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting up  
02  
7
Connect an audio cable from your TV to the  
Caution  
receiver subwoofer.  
• To listen to TV audio on this unit, you must connect  
the TV’s audio output to an audio input jack on this  
unit. You can connect by either a digital (optical) or  
analog audio cable. For digital audio, connect to  
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1 on the receiver subwoofer.  
To use the HDMI Control function when you are  
connected to a supported Pioneer plasma television,  
you must connect via HDMI.  
• These speaker terminals carry HAZARDOUS LIVE  
voltage. To prevent the risk of electric shock when  
connecting or disconnecting the speaker cables,  
disconnect the power cord before touching any  
uninsulated parts.  
• Do not connect any speakers other than those  
supplied to this system.  
• Do not connect the supplied speakers to any  
amplifier other than the one supplied with this  
system. Connection to any other amplifier may result  
in malfunction or fire.  
• You must first set ‘TV Input’ to switch the audio from  
a plasma television with the HDMI Control function  
or to switch the input source of this unit to TV audio  
and operate your TV with the supplied remote control.  
For more information, see Operating Pioneer plasma  
televisions and TVs on page 22 and Audio input  
settings from Plasma televisions (TV Input) on  
page 46.  
• After connecting the plugs, pull lightly on the cables  
to make sure that the ends of the cables are securely  
connected to the terminals. Poor connections can  
create noise and interruptions in the sound.  
• If the cables’ wires happen to be pushed out of the  
terminals, allowing the wires to come into contact  
with each other, it places an excessive additional load  
on the amp. This may cause the amp to stop  
8
9
Connect a TV antenna.  
• Connect the TV antenna from your TV to the  
HDD/DVD recorder. See Connecting a TV antenna on  
page 62 to connect the antenna.  
functioning, and may even damage the amp.  
1
Connect the power cord.  
5
Connect the HDD/DVD recorder to the receiver  
• Connect each power cord to the AC inlet on the HDD/  
DVD recorder and the receiver subwoofer. Connect  
each power cord to a wall socket in the following  
order: 1. HDD/DVD recorder 2. Receiver subwoofer 3.  
TV.  
subwoofer.  
a. Plug the control cable into the CONTROL OUT 1 jack  
on the side of the receiver subwoofer.  
Plug the other end of the cable into the CONTROL IN  
jack on the rear of the HDD/DVD recorder.  
• Run the cords that are connected to the side panel of  
the receiver subwoofer over the back side of the unit,  
and replace the cover on the side panel.  
b. Plug the HDMI cable into the HDMI IN 1 jack on the  
rear of the receiver subwoofer.  
Plug the other end of the cable into the HDMI OUT  
jack on the rear of the HDD/DVD recorder.  
Note that unless the control cable is connected, you  
can’t use the remote control with the HDD/DVD recorder.  
6
Connect the receiver subwoofer to your TV.  
• Connect the HDMI OUT jack on receiver subwoofer  
to an HDMI input on your TV.  
• You can have audio from the receiver subwoofer, as  
well as audio and video from the HDD/DVD recorder,  
output to your TV by connecting with a single HDMI  
cable.  
Note  
1 • Do not use any power cord other than the one supplied with this system.  
• Do not use the supplied power cord for any purpose other than connecting to this system.  
• After connecting this unit to an AC outlet, a 15-second initialization process begins. You cannot carry out any operations during initialization.  
The HDMI indicator on the display unit blinks during initialization, and you can turn this unit on once it has stopped blinking.  
13  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
03  
CChaoptnert3rols and displays  
Display unit  
1
2
3
Top buttons  
4
5
6
7
1
ꢀ STANDBY/ON  
Press to switch the receiver subwoofer on/into standby.  
2
INPUT SELECTOR (page 40)  
Press repeatedly to select one of the external audio  
inputs (HDMI 1 to HDMI 3, Digital 1, Digital 2, Analog,  
iPod or Front Audio In).  
3
VOL +/– buttons  
Use to adjust the volume.  
4
5
POWER ON indicator (Blue)  
Front panel display  
See below for details.  
6
IR remote sensor (page 26)  
7
HDMI indicator (Red)  
Lights when this receiver subwoofer is connected to  
HDMI (HDCP) compatible component.  
Also lights during initialization, after you plug this unit  
into an AC outlet.  
14  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
Display  
03  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
DIRECT STEREO F.S.SURR.  
ADV.SURR. PRO LOGIC  
LOUDNESS MIDNIGHT DNR DIALOG HDMI THROUGH  
QUIET TONE S.RTRV MCACC  
2
DIGITAL  
2
DTS 96/24  
DSD PCM  
8
10 11  
9
1
DIRECT  
8
Digital format indicators  
Lights when Direct Sound is selected (i.e. Effective  
Sound is off) (page 31).  
2DIGITAL  
Lights during playback of a Dolby Digital source  
(page 31).  
2
Listening mode indicators  
STEREO  
DTS  
Lights when the Stereo mode is selected or when a  
stereo source is being played back in the Auto  
listening mode (page 33).  
Lights during playback of a DTS source (page 31).  
DTS 96/24  
Lights during playback of a DTS 96/24 decoding  
(page 31).  
F.S.SURR.  
Lights when one of the Front Stage Surround  
Advance listening modes is selected (page 33).  
DSD3PCM  
Lights during DSD (Direct Stream Digital) to PCM  
conversion with SACDs.  
ADV.SURR.  
Lights when one of the Advanced Surround listening  
modes is selected (page 32).  
PCM  
Lights during playback of PCM signals.  
3
2
PRO LOGIC II  
9
Character display  
Lights during Dolby Pro Logic II decoding (page 32).  
4
Sound processing indicators  
10 Tuner indicators  
Lights when any of the Loudness, Midnight, Quiet or tone  
controls feature is selected (page 34).  
Lights when a broadcast is being received.  
5
S.RTRV  
Lights when Sound Retriever is active (page 33).  
Lights when a stereo FM broadcast is being received  
in auto stereo mode.  
6
HDMI THROUGH  
Lights when HDMI Mode is set to Through Mode.  
7
MCACC  
Lights when FM mono reception is selected.  
Lights when MCACC Effect is switched on (page 34).  
Blinks during Auto MCACC Setup (page 30).  
Lights when in one of the RDS display or search  
modes.  
11  
Lights when sleep timer is active (page 47).  
15  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
03  
HDD/DVD Recorder  
HDD  
DVD  
EPG  
HDMI  
8
Top of the unit  
STANDBY/ON  
DV IN  
USB  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
PLAY  
STOP  
REC  
STOP REC  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
• The image above represents when the front door is open.  
1
ꢀ STANDBY/ON  
ì REC  
Press to switch the recorder on/into standby.  
Press to start recording. Press repeatedly to set the  
recording time in 30 minute blocks.  
2
Front panel inputs  
ꢀ STOP REC  
Press to stop recording.  
See Front panel on page 9 for more information on these.  
3
COMMON INTERFACE slot  
7
Front panel display  
See Display on page 16 for details.  
Slot for CA module and smart card used to decode  
scrambled D.TV channels. See Common Interface on  
page 17.  
8
HDD indicator  
Lights when the hard disk (HDD) is selected.  
4
Disc tray  
DVD indicator  
Lights when the DVD drive is selected.  
5
ꢁ OPEN/CLOSE  
Press to open/close the disc tray.  
EPG indicator  
Lights when the EPG data is downloading.  
6
ꢂ PLAY  
Press to start or restart playback.  
HDMI indicator  
ꢃ STOP  
Lights when this recorder is connected to HDMI  
(HDCP) compatible component.  
Press to stop playback.  
Display  
1
8
2
3
4
5
L
R
7
6
1
ꢂ
4
(page 98)  
Lights during playback; blinks when playback is paused.  
Lights when a timer recording has been set.  
(Indicator blinks if the timer has been set to DVD but  
there isn’t a recordable disc loaded, or the timer has  
been set to HDD but the HDD is not recordable.)  
2
ꢁ
Lights when copying.  
3
ì
Lights during recording; blinks when recording is paused.  
16  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
03  
NTSC  
Lights when the video output signal format is NTSC.  
Common Interface  
To receive scrambled D.TV channels you will need a CA  
module and smart card provided by your service provider.  
(page 155)  
Indicates which channels of a bilingual broadcast  
are recorded.  
Different CA modules support different encryption  
systems. This recorder is designed to work with modules  
that support the DVB standard. Contact your service  
provider to obtain the right kind of CA module.  
VPS/PDC (page 98)  
Lights when receiving a VPS/PDC broadcast during a  
VPS/PDC-enabled timer recording.  
Note that neither CA modules nor smart cards are  
supplied or sold by Pioneer.  
5
Recording quality indicators (page 95)  
XP  
Lights when the recording mode is set to XP (high  
quality).  
Inserting a CA module  
The Common Interface card slot is located on the inside  
of the cover of the recorder’s front panel.  
SP  
Lights when the recording mode is set to SP  
(standard play).  
1
Push down on the PUSH OPEN tab to access the  
Common Interface.  
LP/SLP  
Lights when the recording mode is set to LP (long  
play) or SLP (super-long play).  
EP/SEP  
Lights when the recording mode is set to EP  
(extended play) or SEP (super-extended play).  
2
Insert the CA module into the card slot as far as  
MN  
it will go.  
Lights when the recording mode is set to MN  
(manual recording level) mode.  
6
7
Character display  
R/RW  
Lights when a recordable DVD-R or DVD-RW disc is  
loaded.  
8
PL (page 118)  
Lights when a VR mode disc is loaded and the  
recorder is in Play List mode.  
V
Lights when an unfinalized Video mode disc is loaded.  
The Common Interface card slot accepts Type I and Type  
II PC Cards (PCMCIA cards).  
17  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
Remote control  
03  
1
ꢀ RECEIVER  
Switches the receiver subwoofer to On/Standby.  
2
ꢀ TV  
• For more information on using the remote control,  
see Operating the remote control on page 28.  
Switches the TV to On/Standby.  
TV CTRL  
Switches the remote control to the TV operating mode  
(no effect on the current input source of this unit).  
Operating the receiver subwoofer  
This section explains how to operate the remote control  
for the receiver subwoofer. Note that the controls change  
when you have chosen the input function for separate  
connected devices, such as an HDD/DVD recorder.  
3
ꢀ SOURCE  
Switches the power for the selected component to On/  
Standby (page 28).  
4
Input select buttons  
2
Change the input for this unit. You will also need to press  
one of these buttons when operating another connected  
component via this remote control.  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
TV  
1
4
3
ꢀ
ꢀ
CTRL  
3
ꢀ
HDMI 1 to HDMI 3  
HDMI  
2
Switch input from HDMI 1 to HDMI 3. To operate the  
HDD/DVD recorder, press the button for the  
connected input, then press the HDD/DVR button on  
the LCD touch screen.  
1
TV  
FM/AM  
LINE  
TV  
Switches to the input selected at TV Input setup  
(page 46).  
FM/AM (page 35)  
Switches between FM and AM bands.  
LINE (page 41)  
5
Press repeatedly to select one of the receiver  
subwoofer’s audio inputs (Digital 1, Digital 2,  
Analog, iPod or Front Audio In).  
5
LCD touch screen  
Displays the buttons used to control external  
components such as a receiver subwoofer, HDD/DVD  
recorder, plasma television, Blu-ray disc player and DVD  
player. The current operating mode is displayed at the top  
of the remote control’s screen.  
PAGE  
TOP MENU  
MENU  
Although the LCD touch screen disappears if you do not  
perform any operations for a while, it appears when the  
screen is touched or a button on the remote control is  
pressed.  
6
DISC  
NAVIGATOR  
7
8
HOME  
MENU  
6
Other component button  
RETURN  
SETUP  
Use to operate an HDD/DVD recorder or other connected  
component.  
9
6
7
ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢁ (cursor buttons) and ENTER  
GUIDE  
RCV  
INFO  
Use to control receiver functions.  
8
SETUP  
Use to access the menu system for surround sound  
setup, tuner settings and so on (page 35, 37 44 47).  
VOL  
MUTE  
12  
10  
11  
,
,
RECEIVER  
9
RETURN  
Use to cancel settings.  
18  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
03  
10 RCV  
20 SLEEP  
Use to switch to the receiver subwoofer operating mode  
when this unit is in the other operating modes. Press  
again to return to the previous operating mode.  
Press to set the sleep timer (page 47).  
21 EXIT  
Cancel settings and exit the RECEIVER screen.  
11 VOL +/–  
Use to adjust the volume of the receiver subwoofer.  
Operating the built-in FM/AM tuner  
12 MUTE  
TOP MENU  
MENU  
Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been  
muted (adjusting the volume also restores the sound).  
DISC  
NAVIGATOR  
1
2
LCD touch screen  
HOME  
MENU  
RETURN  
SETUP  
3
RECEIVER  
ADV.  
F.S.  
13  
SURR  
SURR SURR  
1
ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢁ (cursor buttons) and ENTER  
Use to control FM/AM tuner functions.  
2
SETUP  
SOUND  
DIRECT  
RTRV  
14  
15  
GENRE  
16  
Use to access the menu system or tuner settings.  
3
RETURN  
18  
19  
Use to cancel settings.  
TEST  
SOUND  
TONE  
MCACC  
SLEEP  
17  
20  
LCD touch screen  
21  
EXIT  
FM/AM  
13 SURR  
1
4
2
3
6
Use to select a Surround mode (page 31).  
ADV.SURR  
5
8
4
Use to change the audio setting to Pioneer’s original  
Advanced Surround mode (page 32).  
7
9
F.S.SURR  
Use to select a Front Stage Surround Advance mode  
5
6
7
DISP  
CLEAR  
0
(page 33).  
TUNE  
-
-
+
+
14 GENRE  
Use to listen to audio in Genre Sync mode (page 33).  
(This button is displayed only when the RECEIVER screen  
is shown during HDD/DVD recorder operation.)  
ST  
4
5
Number buttons  
Use to directly choose a preset radio station.  
15 SOUND RTRV  
Press to restore CD quality sound to compressed audio  
sources (page 33).  
CLEAR  
Press to clear an entry and start again.  
16 DIRECT  
Use to switch on/off the Effective Sound mode (page 33).  
DISP  
Use to display RDS information (page 36).  
17 MCACC  
Starts the Auto MCACC setup (page 30).  
6
TUNE +/–  
Use to find radio frequencies.  
18 TEST TONE  
Use to output the test tone (for speaker setup) (page 39).  
7
ST +/–  
Use to select a station preset.  
19 SOUND  
Press to access the sound menu, from which you can  
adjust bass and treble, etc.  
19  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
03  
Operating the supplied HDD/DVD Recorder  
4
MENU (page 104)  
Press to display the disc menu if a DVD-Video, finalized  
DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or finalized DVD+R/+RW disc  
is loaded.  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
TV  
ꢀ
ꢀ
1
4
CTRL  
ꢀ
®
When in the GUIDE Plus+ system, use to jump directly  
to the Menu bar.  
5
ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢁ (cursor buttons) and ENTER  
2
Use to navigate all on-screen displays. Press ENTER to  
PAGE  
select the currently highlighted option.  
TOP MENU  
DISC  
MENU  
3
5
While watching D.TV press ENTER to display the Channel  
NAVIGATOR  
List screen.  
HOME  
MENU  
6
HOME MENU  
RETURN  
INFO  
Press to display the Home Menu, from which you can  
navigate many functions of the system.  
SETUP  
6
8
9
7
7
RETURN  
GUIDE  
10  
Press to go back one level in the on-screen menu or  
display.  
1
ꢀ SOURCE  
Also press to exit the MHEG application.  
Switches the power for the HDD/DVD recorder to  
On/Standby.  
®
8
GUIDE Plus+ Action buttons  
Use when an EPG screen is displayed or when tuned to a  
data channel of a digital broadcast. The function of each  
button will be described on-screen, and changes  
depending on the screen being displayed.  
2
PAGE </>  
Switch between pages on the LCD touch screen when  
multiple pages are present.  
3
TOP MENU (page 104) / DISC NAVIGATOR  
9
GUIDE  
(page 106, 118)  
Press to display the EPG screen; press again to exit.  
Press to display the top menu if a DVD-Video or finalized  
DVD-R/-RW (Video) disc is loaded, or the Disc Navigator  
screen.  
10 INFO  
While watching D.TV, press to display information  
banner.  
LCD touch screen  
HDD/DVR 1/3  
HDD/DVR 2/3  
HDD/DVR 3/3  
12  
13  
HDD/ JUKE P.LIVE  
11  
14  
27  
1
4
7
2
3
6
DVD  
BOX  
TV  
ꢄ/  
ꢅꢆ  
ꢇ/  
ꢈꢉ  
ꢂ
21  
22  
5
8
ꢊ
ꢋ
ꢌ
DISP  
ꢃ
28  
29  
9
CLEAR  
+
CM  
BACK SKIP  
CM  
A.TV/  
D.TV  
15  
16  
0
STOP REC  
REC MODE  
TV/  
DVD  
O.T.  
COPY  
ìREC  
17  
20  
23  
24  
18  
25  
INPUT  
CH  
26  
18  
19  
TIMER TIMER  
HELP  
HELP TEXT  
-
REC  
ON/OFF  
11 HDD/DVD  
Press to select the hard disk (HDD) or DVD for recording  
and playback.  
12 JUKEBOX (page 134)  
Press to display the Jukebox screen of the HDD/DVD  
recorder, from where you can copy music to the HDD for  
playback.  
20  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
03  
13 P.LIVE TV (page 96)  
Press to start recording the current TV channel, but with  
playback paused, effectively pausing the broadcast.  
21 Number buttons  
Use the number buttons for track/chapter/title  
selection; channel selection, and so on.  
14 Playback controls (page 103)  
CLEAR  
Press to clear an entry and start again.  
ꢂ
Press to start playback.  
22 A.TV/D.TV  
Press to switch between analog TV antenna input and  
digital TV antenna input. The A.TV and D.TV indicators  
on the front panel show which is selected.  
ꢃ
Press to stop playback.  
ꢌ
23 TV/DVD  
Press to pause playback or recording.  
Press to switch between ‘TV mode’, in which you get the  
picture and sound from the TV’s tuner, and ‘DVD mode’,  
in which you get picture and sound from the system’s  
tuner (or an external input).  
ꢄ/ꢅ ꢆ, ꢇ/ꢈ ꢉ (page 108, 109)  
Press to start reverse or forward scanning. Press  
again to change the speed.  
While paused, press and hold to start slow-motion  
playback. Press repeatedly to change the playback  
speed.  
While paused, press to advance a single frame in  
either direction.  
24 INPUT (page 100)  
Press to change the HDD/DVD recorder input to use for  
recording.  
25 TEXT  
Press to display Teletext information (in European  
countries except the UK) or to start the MHEG application  
display (UK only) if available during digital broadcasts.  
®
When GUIDE Plus+ is displayed, use to display the  
previous/next day.  
ꢊ / ꢋ  
26 CHANNEL +/– (page 93)  
Press to change the channel of the built-in TV tuner.  
Press to skip to the previous or next title/chapter/  
track; or to display the previous or next menu page.  
27  
(AUDIO) (page 94, 111)  
®
When GUIDE Plus+ is displayed, use to display the  
previous/next page.  
Press to change the audio language or channel.  
(When the recorder is stopped, press to change the  
tuner audio.)  
15 CM BACK (commercial back)  
Press repeatedly to skip progressively backward  
through the video playing.  
(SUBTITLE) (page 111)  
Press to display/change the subtitles included in  
multilingual DVD-Video discs.  
CM SKIP (commercial skip)  
Press repeatedly to skip progressively forward  
through the video playing.  
While watching D.TV, press to change the D.TV  
subtitles.  
16 Recording controls (page 95)  
(ANGLE) (page 112)  
Press to switch camera angles on discs with multi-  
angle scenes.  
ì REC  
Press to start recording. Press repeatedly to set the  
recording time in blocks of 30 mins.  
28 DISP (page 112)  
Displays/changes the on-screen information displays.  
When the red action button is visible in a GUIDE  
®
Plus+ screen, use for One-Button-Record.  
29 O.T. COPY (page 127)  
Press to start One Touch Copy of the currently playing  
title to DVD or the HDD.  
STOP REC  
Press to stop recording.  
17 REC MODE (page 95)  
Press repeatedly to change the recording mode (picture  
quality).  
18 HELP  
Press for help on how to use the current GUI screen.  
19 TIMER REC (page 75, 98)  
Press to set a timer recording.  
20 TIMER ON/OFF  
This button cannot be used for the supplied HDD/DVD  
recorder.  
21  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
03  
Operating Pioneer plasma televisions and TVs  
First, refer to Setting up the remote to control your TV on page 47 for information about setting up your TV’s presets.  
Note that certain buttons may not work with some TVs.  
TELETEXT-related buttons can only be used with Pioneer plasma televisions.  
Shown when not set to  
a Pioneer plasma television.  
TV 1/2  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
TV  
1
3
ꢀ
ꢀ
2
1
2
3
CTRL  
ꢀ
PDP 1/2  
PDP 2/2  
14  
15  
17  
18  
20  
21  
23  
1
4
7
2
3
16  
19  
5
8
6
9
8
9
PAGE  
TOP MENU  
MENU  
22  
24  
DISC  
NAVIGATOR  
TV/  
4
INF0  
EXIT  
0
DTV  
HOME  
MENU  
11  
13  
26  
RETURN  
INFO  
SETUP  
+
+
+
5
7
6
INPUT  
13  
10  
12  
25  
12  
TV VOL  
P
TV VOL  
MUTE  
MUTE  
-
-
-
GUIDE  
1
2
ꢀ TV  
LCD touch screen  
Number buttons  
Switches the TV to On/Standby.  
8
TV CTRL  
TV/External input mode: Selects a channel.  
Switches the remote control to the TV operating  
mode (no effect on the current input source of this  
unit).  
Teletext mode: Selects a page.  
9
TV/DTV (For Pioneer plasma televisions only)  
Switches between the analog TV and DTV input modes.  
ꢀ SOURCE  
10 P +/–  
Switches the power for the TV to On/Standby.  
TV/External input mode: Selects a channel.  
3
PAGE </>  
11 INPUT  
Selects an input source of the TV.  
Switches pages on the LCD touch screen.  
4
ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢁ (cursor buttons) and ENTER  
Use to navigate all on-screen displays. Press ENTER to  
12 MUTE  
select the currently highlighted option.  
Mutes the sound.  
5
HOME MENU  
13 TV VOL +/–  
Display the HOME MENU screen.  
Sets the volume.  
6
RETURN  
Restores the previous menu screen.  
7
Colour (RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE) buttons  
Teletext mode: Selects a page.  
22  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
03  
The following only apply to Pioneer plasma  
televisions:  
14  
Jumps to Teletext subtitle page.  
15  
Displays hidden characters.  
16  
Selects the Teletext mode (all TV image, all TEXT image,  
TV/TEXT image).  
17  
Displays the channel information.  
18  
TV/External input mode: Freezes a frame from a moving  
image.  
Press again to cancel the function.  
19  
Selects the screen size.  
20  
Displays an Index page for the CEEFAX/FLOF format.  
Displays a TOP Over View page for the TOP format.  
21  
Teletext mode: Stops updating Teletext pages. Press  
again to release the hold mode.  
22  
Teletext mode: Switches Teletext images. (full/upper half/  
lower half)  
23 INFO  
24 EXIT  
Press to exit the channel information  
25  
Teletext mode: Selects a page.  
26  
Sets the sound multiplex mode.  
23  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
03  
Operating a Pioneer Blu-ray Disc player  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
TV  
BD 1/2  
BD 2/2  
ꢀ
ꢀ
1
CTRL  
ꢀ
9
1
4
2
3
6
ꢆ
ꢉ
ꢋ
ꢂ
ꢃ
ꢌ
5
8
0
2
13  
PAGE  
ꢊ
10  
11  
TOP MENU  
MENU  
7
9
3
5
4
7
DISC  
NAVIGATOR  
ꢄ/ꢅ  
ZOOM  
ꢈ/ꢇ  
DISP  
CLEAR  
ENTER  
HOME  
MENU  
PLAY  
MODE  
12  
DISP  
12  
RETURN  
14  
15  
SETUP  
6
8
VIDEO  
ADJ  
1
ꢀ SOURCE  
10 Playback controls  
Switches the power for a Blu-ray disc player to  
On/Standby.  
ꢂ
Press to start or resume playback.  
2
PAGE </>  
ꢃ
Switch between pages on the LCD touch screen when  
multiple pages are present.  
Press to stop playback (you can resume playback by  
pressing ꢂ).  
3
TOP MENU / DISC NAVIGATOR  
ꢌ
Press to display the top menu of a BD-ROM or DVD-Video  
disc.  
Press to pause playback; press again to restart.  
ꢆ, ꢉ  
When playing a DVD-R/-RW disc, press to display/exit the  
Disc Navigator.  
Press to start reverse/forward scanning.  
ꢊ, ꢋ  
4
MENU  
Press to jump to the start of the previous/next  
chapter/track.  
BD-ROM: Press to display/hide the pop-up menu.  
DVD-Video: Press to display the disc menu (if there is one).  
ꢄ/ꢅ, ꢇ/ꢈ  
5
ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢁ (cursor buttons) and ENTER  
Use for slow motion and step frame.  
Use to navigate on-screen displays and menus. Press  
ENTER to select an option or execute a command.  
11 ZOOM  
Press to zoom the screen when displaying a still image.  
6
HOME MENU  
12 DISP  
Press to display information.  
Press to display the player’s Home Menu, access most of  
the player’s functions.  
13 Number buttons  
7
RETURN  
Use to enter title, chapter or track numbers, etc.  
Press to return to a previous screen.  
ENTER  
8
Colour (RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE) buttons  
Press to select an option or execute a command.  
Use to navigate BD-ROM menus.  
CLEAR  
LCD touch screen  
Press to clear a numeric entry, etc.  
14 PLAY MODE  
9
(AUDIO)  
Press to change the Play Mode (repeat play, for example).  
Press to select the audio channel or language.  
15 VIDEO ADJ  
Press to display the Video Adjust screen.  
(SUBTITLE)  
Press to select a subtitle display.  
(ANGLE)  
Press to change the camera angle during BD-ROM  
or DVD-Video movie multi-angle scene playback.  
24  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
03  
Operating a Pioneer DVD player  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
TV  
ꢀ
ꢀ
1
DVD 1/2  
DVD 2/2  
CTRL  
ꢀ
8
9
1
4
2
3
6
9
ꢄ/  
ꢅꢆ  
ꢇ/  
ꢈꢉ  
ꢂ
12  
13  
5
8
2
PAGE  
ꢊ
ꢋ
TOP MENU  
MENU  
ꢃ
ꢌ
7
3
5
6
4
7
DISC  
NAVIGATOR  
ENTER  
CLEAR  
0
HOME  
MENU  
PLAY  
MODE  
ZOOM  
DISP  
11  
DISP  
11  
RETURN  
10  
SETUP  
1
ꢀ SOURCE  
9
Playback controls  
Switches the power for a DVD player to On/Standby.  
ꢂ
Press to start or resume playback.  
2
PAGE </>  
Switch between pages on the LCD touch screen when  
multiple pages are present.  
ꢃ
Press to stop playback (you can resume playback by  
pressing ꢂ).  
3
TOP MENU  
Press to display the top menu of a DVD-Video disc.  
ꢌ
Press to pause playback; press again to restart.  
4
MENU  
Displays a DVD disc menu – this varies with the disc and  
may be the same as the ‘top menu’.  
ꢄ/ꢅ ꢆ, ꢇ/ꢈ ꢉ  
Press to start reverse or forward scanning. Press  
again to change the speed.  
While paused, press and hold to start slow-motion  
playback. Press repeatedly to change the playback  
speed.  
While paused, press to advance a single frame in  
either direction.  
5
ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢁ (cursor buttons) and ENTER  
Moves the cursor around the screen. Press ENTER to select  
the current menu option.  
6
HOME MENU  
Display/exit the on-screen display.  
7
RETURN  
ꢊ / ꢋ  
Returns to the previously displayed menu screen.  
Press to skip to the previous or next title/chapter/  
track/folder; or to display the previous or next menu  
page.  
LCD touch screen  
10 ZOOM  
8
(AUDIO)  
Press to zoom the screen when displaying a still image.  
Press to select the audio channel or language.  
11 DISP  
Press to display information.  
(SUBTITLE)  
Press to select a subtitle display.  
12 Number buttons  
(ANGLE)  
Use to enter title, chapter or track numbers, etc.  
Press to change the camera angle during DVD-Video  
movie multi-angle scene playback.  
ENTER  
Press to select an option or execute a command.  
CLEAR  
Press to clear a numeric entry, etc.  
13 PLAY MODE  
Press to change the Play Mode (repeat play, for example).  
25  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
03  
Putting the batteries in the remote  
control  
Using the remote control  
Please keep in mind the following when using the remote  
control:  
1
Open the battery compartment cover on the  
• Make sure that there are no obstacles between the  
remote and the remote sensor on the unit.  
back of the remote control.  
• Remote operation may become unreliable if strong  
sunlight or fluorescent light is shining on the unit’s  
remote sensor.  
2
Insert four AA/LR6 alkaline batteries into the  
battery compartment following the indications  
(ꢍ,ꢎ) inside the compartment.  
• Remote controllers for different devices can interfere  
with each other. Avoid using remotes for other  
equipment located close to this unit.  
• Replace the batteries when you notice a fall off in the  
operating range of the remote.  
• Use within the operating range in front of the remote  
control sensor on the display unit, as shown.  
3
Close the cover.  
Caution  
Incorrect use of batteries can result in hazards such  
as leakage and bursting. Please observe the  
following:  
30  
30  
• Don’t mix new and old batteries together.  
• Don’t use different kinds of battery together —  
although they may look similar, different batteries  
may have different voltages.  
7 m  
• Make sure that the plus and minus ends of each  
battery match the indications in the battery  
compartment.  
• Remove batteries from equipment that isn’t going to  
be used for a month or more.  
• When disposing of used batteries, please comply with  
governmental regulations or environmental public  
instruction’s rules that apply in your country /area.  
WARNING  
• Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or  
other excessively hot place, such as inside a car or  
near a heater. This can cause batteries to leak,  
overheat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the  
life or performance of batteries.  
26  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
04  
CBhaepfteor 4re you start  
Switching on  
The HDD/DVD recorder and receiver subwoofer have separate power switches. The power switch for the receiver  
subwoofer is located on the display unit.  
Turn the receiver subwoofer ON.  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
TV  
Turn the HDD/DVD Recorder ON (only in the HDD/DVR mode).  
ꢀ
ꢀ
CTRL  
3
ꢀ
HDMI  
2
1
TV  
Selected HDD/DVR mode.  
(See next page for details.)  
FM/AM  
LINE  
HDD/DVR 1/3  
ꢀ STANDBY/ON  
HDD/ JUKE P.LIVE  
DVD  
BOX  
TV  
Receiver  
subwoofer  
ꢄ/  
ꢅꢆ  
ꢇ/  
ꢈꢉ  
ꢂ
ꢊ
ꢋ
ꢌ
ꢃ
CM  
BACK SKIP  
CM  
STOP REC  
REC MODE  
ìREC  
TIMER TIMER  
REC ON/OFF  
HELP  
PAGE  
Display Unit  
TOP MENU  
MENU  
DISC  
NAVIGATOR  
Remote Control  
STANDBY/ON  
DV IN  
USB  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
PLAY  
STOP  
REC  
STOP REC  
HDD/DVD Recorder  
The table below shows what needs to be switched on for  
various system functions:  
Setting up  
After connecting and installing the HDD/DVD recorder  
and receiver subwoofer, complete the steps below to set  
the system up for use.  
Function  
Display unit  
HDD/DVD recorder  
DVD playback  
CD playback  
HDD playback  
Radio  
On  
On  
On  
On  
Off  
On  
On  
On  
Off  
On  
HDD/DVD recorder  
• Set the date and time, TV channel tuning and the type  
of TV in the Setup Navigator (page 68).  
Receiver subwoofer  
Timer recording  
• Complete the Auto MCACC setup to optimize the  
surround sound (page 30).  
27  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
Basic operation  
04  
• When the desired source cannot be found, or when  
you have a component not manufactured by Pioneer  
connected, press RCV to put the remote control into  
Receiver mode. The input for this unit remains  
unchanged.  
This manual is split into two parts, one covering using the  
receiver subwoofer, the other using the HDD/DVD  
recorder. Below are some common operations and  
where to find them explained in this manual.  
Note  
Operating the remote control  
To temporarily control the receiver while listening to  
audio from a connected component on this unit,  
press RCV. The selected input will not change, and  
the remote changes to Receiver mode. To return to  
the previous operating mode, press RCV once more.  
The supplied remote control can control not only the  
receiver subwoofer and HDD/DVD recorder, but also  
other Pioneer products such as Blu-ray disc players, DVD  
players, and plasma televisions.  
To operate these components, orient the remote control  
toward the display unit.  
Using the LCD touch screen  
Depending on the type of connected component you are  
operating (such as an HDD/DVD recorder), there may be  
multiple pages of information for the LCD touch screen.  
When the component you would like to control is not  
displayed, press PAGE to scroll to the page where the  
component you would like to control is located.  
Operating the receiver subwoofer  
RCV  
•
Press to display the RECEIVER screen.  
The RECEIVER screen is shown on the remote control’s  
LCD screen, and the remote is switched to Receiver  
mode.  
• When no operations are carried out for over 10  
seconds, the display on the LCD touch screen of the  
remote control is automatically turned off. To have  
the display shown once again, either touch the LCD  
or press a button on the remote control.  
RECEIVER  
ADV  
F.S.  
SURR  
SURR SURR  
Watching a DVD  
Choosing and operating a source component  
Remember that when using the remote to control the  
supplied HDD/DVD recorder, you should point the  
remote towards the display unit, not the recorder itself.  
HDMI  
TV  
LINE  
FM/AM  
1
1
2
3
RECEIVER  
Press to cycle through connected components.  
The selected component changes, and the LCD screen  
on the remote control changes to that of the appropriate  
component.  
ꢀ
1
2
Switch on the receiver subwoofer.  
Set the remote control to HDD/DVR mode.  
The LCD screen changes to that for the HDD/DVD  
recorder, and you can then operate the desired  
component (see Choosing and operating a source  
component above).  
• To select input for Digital 1, Digital 2, Analog, Front  
Audio In, or iPod, press the LINE button until the  
desired input function is shown on the display unit.  
2
Choose the input source you are using when you  
SOURCE  
have selected HDMI 1 to HDMI 3 or LINE.  
The LCD screen changes to that for the selected  
component, and you can then operate the desired  
component.  
ꢀ
3
Switch on the HDD/DVD recorder.  
TV  
ꢀ
4
Switch on your TV.  
Turn on your TV and make sure that it is set to the HDMI  
video input.  
HDD/  
DVR  
HDD/  
DVR  
BD  
DVD  
BD  
DVD  
TV  
HDD/  
5
6
DVD Press to select DVD.  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
Press on the HDD/DVD recorder to open  
the disc tray.  
EXIT  
EXIT  
HDMI input  
LINE input  
28  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
04  
7
Load a disc.  
Watching a title recorded on the HDD  
Load a disc with the label side facing up, using the disc  
tray guide to align the disc (if you’re loading a double-  
sided DVD disc, load it with the side you want to play  
face-down).  
RECEIVER  
ꢀ
1
2
Switch on the receiver subwoofer.  
Set the remote control to HDD/DVR mode.  
See Choosing and operating a source component on  
page 28.  
SOURCE  
ꢀ
3
4
Switch on the HDD/DVD recorder.  
TV  
ꢀ
Switch on your TV.  
HDD/  
5
6
DVD Press to select HDD.  
ꢂ
8
Press to start playback.  
Start playback of the HDD title (page 104).  
Press to stop playback.  
You can resume playback from the same  
ꢃ
VOL  
point by pressing ꢂ. (Press ꢃ again to  
cancel the resume function.)  
7
RECEIVER  
Adjust the volume.  
Pauses playback, or restarts playback  
when paused.  
ꢌ
Listening to the radio  
Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly  
to increase the scanning speed.  
RECEIVER  
ꢄ/  
ꢇ/  
ꢈ ꢉ  
ꢅ ꢆ  
ꢀ
1
2
Switch on the receiver subwoofer.  
See Basic playback on page 103 for more on playing  
Set the remote control to FM/AM mode.  
See Choosing and operating a source component on  
discs.  
page 28.  
3
Tune to a station (page 35).  
VOL  
The LCD screen changes to that for the radio, and you  
can then operate the desired component.  
9
RECEIVER  
Adjust the volume.  
Listening to a CD  
VOL  
RECEIVER  
4
RECEIVER  
Adjust the volume.  
ꢀ
1
2
Switch on the receiver subwoofer.  
Set the remote control to HDD/DVR mode.  
See Choosing and operating a source component on  
page 28.  
SOURCE  
ꢀ
3
Switch on the HDD/DVD recorder.  
HDD/  
4
5
DVD Press to select DVD.  
Load a CD and start playback (page 104).  
VOL  
6
RECEIVER  
Adjust the volume.  
29  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
05  
Chapter 5  
Getting started  
1
Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP  
Important  
MIC jack on back of the display unit.  
RCV  
•
Press to set the remote control to receiver  
control mode in order to operate the receiver  
subwoofer (make sure that the LCD displays the  
RECEIVER screen, as shown below).  
2
Place the microphone at your normal listening  
position.  
Place it about ear height, and make sure it is level by  
using a table or chair.  
Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers  
and the microphone.  
RECEIVER  
RECEIVER  
ADV  
F.S.  
SURR  
SURR SURR  
ꢀ
3
If the receiver subwoofer is off, press  
ꢀ
RECEIVER to turn the power on.  
MCACC  
4
Press MCACC.  
Using the Auto MCACC setup for  
optimal surround sound  
Try to be as quiet as possible after pressing MCACC. The  
volume increases automatically and the system outputs  
a series of test tones.  
The Multichannel Acoustic Calibration (MCACC) system  
measures the acoustic characteristics of your listening  
area, taking into account ambient noise, and testing for  
channel delay and channel level. After you have set up  
the microphone provided, the system uses the  
• To cancel Auto MCACC setup before it has finished,  
press MCACC. The unit will continue to use the  
previous settings.  
• If the ambient noise level is too high, Noisy! blinks in  
information from a series of test tones to measure  
standing wave and reverb, optimizing the speaker  
settings and equalization (MCACC Effect) for your  
the display for five seconds. To exit and check the  
2
noise levels , press MCACC, or to try again, press  
1
ENTER when Retry shows in the display.  
particular room.  
• If you see an Error MIC! or Error Speaker! message  
in the display, there may be a problem with your mic  
or the speaker connections. To try again, press  
Important  
3
• The test tones used for Auto MCACC setup are loud;  
however, do not turn the volume down during setup  
as this may result in a sub-optimal setup.  
ENTER .  
When the MCACC setup is complete, the volume level  
4
returns to normal, Complete shows in the display, and  
• Make sure the microphone and speakers are not  
moved during the MCACC setup.  
5
MCACC Effect is activated.  
• Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this unit  
upon completion of the Auto MCACC setup.  
Note  
1 You only need to use the Auto MCACC setup once (unless you change the placement of your speakers or your room layout).  
2 • If the room environment is not optimal for the Auto MCACC setup (too much ambient noise, echo off the walls, obstacles blocking the speak-  
ers from the microphone) the final settings may be incorrect. Check for household appliances (air conditioner, fridge, fan, etc.), that may be  
affecting the environment and switch them off if necessary.  
• Some older TVs may interfere with the operation of the mic. If this seems to be happening, switch off the TV during Auto MCACC setup.  
3 If this doesn’t work, press MCACC, turn off the power, and check the problem indicated by the Error message, then try the Auto MCACC setup  
again.  
4 If Complete doesn’t appear, it is likely an error occurred during the setup. Please check all connections and try again.  
5 See Listening with MCACC Effect on page 34 to switch on/off MCACC Effect.  
30  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to your system  
06  
Chapter 6  
Listening to your system  
• Stereo Playback in Surround  
Important  
Outputs audio from the surround speakers while  
directing vocal sound to the front channels. You can  
play back stereo sources like CDs in seamless,  
comfortable surround sound.  
This effect is available when you play back stereo  
sources in the Auto listening mode (see below).  
RCV  
•
Press to set the remote control to receiver  
control mode in order to operate the receiver  
subwoofer (make sure that the LCD displays the  
RECEIVER screen, as shown below).  
The Effective sound mode can be turned off (activating  
Direct mode) by doing the following:  
RECEIVER  
ADV  
F.S.  
SURR  
SURR SURR  
DIRECT  
•
Press to switch to Direct Sound.  
Press this button to switch between Effective Sound and  
Direct Sound.  
• When Direct Sound is selected, the DIRECT indicator  
lights.  
Effective Sound (for optimum sound)  
With the uniquely shaped high-quality speakers supplied  
with this unit, the Effective Sound mode enables the  
following Pioneer exclusive audio technologies designed  
to maximize the real experience of sound originally  
inherent in movies and music.  
Auto listening mode  
The Auto listening mode is the simplest way to listen to  
any source as it was mastered: the output from the  
speakers mirrors the channels in the source material.  
Turn on the Effective Sound mode under normal  
circumstances to maximize the capabilities of this unit.  
If you set up the system for Front surround (page 6), the  
Front Stage Surround modes will give the best results  
(see page 33).  
• Dialogue Enhancement  
Clarifies dialogue in movies to make it stand out from  
other background sounds.  
• Dynamic Range Compression  
SURR  
•
Press to select the Auto listening mode.  
Resuscitates detailed sound susceptible to ambient  
noise to create an acoustic environment where you  
feel as if you are right in the action.  
Listening in surround sound  
• Original Channel Balance & Channel Mix  
Since the orientation of the supplied speaker units is  
uniquely designed, channels are mixed down and  
balanced in a special manner. Also, the optimum  
balance is automatically achieved according to the  
contents being played back.  
You can listen to stereo or multichannel sources in  
surround sound. Surround sound is generated from  
stereo sources using one of the Dolby Pro Logic or DTS  
1
Neo:6 decoding modes.  
If you set up the system for Front surround (page 6), the  
Front Stage Surround modes will give the best results  
(see page 33).  
• Frequency Characteristic Correction  
Realizes the playback characteristic optimized for  
long hours of listening in addition to the added  
features of the supplied speaker units.  
SURR  
•
Press repeatedly to select a listening mode.  
The choices that appear in the display will vary according  
2
to the type of source that’s playing.  
Note  
1 After the surround back signals of the 6.1/7.1-channel audio represented by DTS-ES are properly decoded, the original virtual surround back  
function outputs the surround back signals in combination with surround signals.  
2 You cannot select a mode other than Auto and Stereo while playing back DTS-HD, DTS-Express, or Dolby TrueHD (176.4 kHz/192 kHz). Also,  
you cannot select DTS Neo:6 for Dolby Digital Plus or Dolby TrueHD (below 96 kHz).  
31  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to your system  
06  
With two channel sources, you can select from:  
• Panorama – Extends the front stereo image to  
include the surround speakers for a ‘wraparound’  
effect.  
• Auto – Auto listening mode (see page 31)  
• 2PL II Movie (Dolby Pro Logic II Movie) – 5.1  
channel surround sound, especially suited to movie  
sources  
ENTER  
3
Adjust the setting, then press ENTER to  
• 2PL II Music (Dolby Pro Logic II Music) – 5.1  
channel surround sound, especially suited to music  
sources; see Dolby Pro Logic II Music settings below  
confirm.  
Center image setting  
• 2PL II Game (Dolby Pro Logic II Game) – 5.1  
channel surround sound, especially suited to video  
games  
When listening to two channel sources in Neo:6 Music  
mode (see page 31), you can also adjust the center image  
effect.  
• 2Pro Logic (Dolby Pro Logic) – 4.1 channel  
surround sound for use with any two-channel source  
Adjusts the center image to create a wider stereo effect  
2
with vocals.  
• Neo:6 Cinema – 6.1 channel sound, especially suited  
to movie sources  
SOUND  
1
Press when Neo:6 Music mode is active.  
• Neo:6 Music – 6.1 channel sound, especially suited to  
music sources; see Center image setting on page 32  
ENTER  
• Stereo – See Listening in stereo on page 33.  
2
3
Select ‘Center Image’ then press ENTER.  
Adjust the setting, then press ENTER to  
With multichannel sources, you can select (according to  
format):  
ENTER  
• Auto – Auto listening mode (see page 31)  
• StandardDecode – Listening in Dolby Digital or DTS  
surround decoding. Plays back multichannel  
sources like Dolby Digital, DTS, and multichannel  
PCM with the most standard decoder.  
confirm.  
• Adjust the effect from 0 (all center channel sent to  
front right and left speakers) to 10 (center channel  
sent to the center speaker only).  
• Stereo – See Listening in stereo on page 33.  
Using Advanced Surround  
Dolby Pro Logic II Music settings  
When listening in Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode (see  
above), there are three settings you can adjust: Center  
Width, Dimension, and Panorama.  
The Advanced Surround effects can be used with any  
multichannel or stereo source for a variety of additional  
surround sound effects. These modes are designed to  
provide optimum listening effect when using the  
Standard surround setup described on page 6.  
SOUND  
1
Press when Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode is  
active.  
ADV  
SURR  
•
Press to select an Advanced Surround mode.  
The ADV.SURR. indicator lights when one of these  
ENTER  
modes is chosen. You cannot switch between modes for  
2
Select ‘Center Width’, ‘Dimension’ or  
3
some audio streams.  
‘Panorama’ then press ENTER.  
Press repeatedly to select:  
• Action – Designed for action movies with dynamic  
soundtracks  
1
• Center Width – Provides a better blend of the front  
speakers by spreading the center channel between  
the front right and left speakers, making it sound  
wider (higher settings) or narrower (lower settings).  
• Drama – Designed for movies with lots of dialog  
• Sci-Fi – Designed for science fiction with lots of  
• Dimension – Adjusts the depth of the surround  
sound balance from front to back, making the sound  
more distant (minus settings), or more forward  
(positive settings).  
special effects  
• Mono Film – Creates surround sound from mono  
soundtracks  
Note  
1 As this product uses a dual center speaker system, you should normally use the C.Width 3 setting.  
2 As this product uses a dual center speaker system, you should normally use the C.Image 3 setting.  
3 You cannot use this function for the following audio streams:  
• Dolby TrueHD: over 88.2 kHz  
• DTS-HD: over 88.2 kHz or with the channel format of 2/0  
• DTS-Express: with the channel format of 2/0  
32  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to your system  
06  
• Ent.Show – Suitable for musical sources  
• Expanded – Creates an extra wide stereo field  
• TV Surround – Provides surround sound for both  
mono and stereo TV sources  
• Advanced Game – Suitable for video games  
• Sports – Suitable for sports programs  
• Classical – Gives a large concert hall-type sound  
• Rock/Pop – Creates a live concert sound for rock  
and/or pop music  
Genre Sync Mode  
Only when you have this unit connected to the supplied  
HDD/DVD recorder and are using the HDMI Control  
function, you can make use of the Genre Sync Mode to  
have the listening mode automatically change to that  
which best matches the genre of the contents playing  
2
from the recorder.  
• Set the HDMI Mode to AMP Mode (page 43).  
• Unplugged – Suitable for acoustic music sources  
• Ext.Stereo – Gives multichannel sound to a stereo  
source, using all of your speakers  
GENRE  
•
Press when listening to media contents  
from a recorder.  
The most appropriate listening mode is selected and  
shown in the display. When the related genre could not  
be determined, No Genre or Can’t use may be displayed  
and the listening mode remains unchanged.  
Using Front Stage Surround Advance  
The Front Stage Surround Advance modes are effective  
when you are using the Front surround speaker setup as  
described on page 6.  
Tip  
F.S.  
SURR  
• Mainly used with Jukebox and MP3 sources.  
•
Press to select a Front Stage Surround  
• To use this function, you must have an HDMI Control-  
compatible Pioneer HDD/DVD recorder connected via  
HDMI, and have the HDMI Control function set to On.  
Advance mode.  
The F.S.SURR indicator lights.  
Press repeatedly to select Focus 5.1ch, Wide 5.1ch or  
Extra Power. You cannot select a mode other than Extra  
1
Power for some audio streams.  
Using the Sound Retriever  
• Focus 5.1ch – Use to provide a rich surround sound  
effect directed to the center area where the left and  
right speakers sound projection converges.  
• Wide 5.1ch – Use to provide a surround sound effect  
to a wider area than Focus 5.1ch mode.  
When audio data is removed during the MP3 or WMA  
compression process, sound quality often suffers from  
an uneven sound image. The Sound Retriever feature  
employs new DSP technology that helps bring CD quality  
sound back to compressed two channel audio by  
restoring sound pressure and smoothing jagged artifacts  
left over after compression.  
• Extra Power – Outputs stereo sound (in the case of  
multi-channel sources, down-mixed stereo sound)  
from the surround speakers for powerful stereo effect.  
Tip  
Listening in stereo  
• This feature is effective when used together with the  
Jukebox function of the HDD/DVD recorder.  
You can listen to any source — stereo or multichannel —  
in stereo. When playing a multichannel source, all  
channels are downmixed to the front left/right speakers  
and the subwoofer.  
SOUND  
RTRV  
3
•
Press while listening to a stereo source .  
Press repeatedly to switch between:  
• Retriever On — Switches the Sound Retriever on.  
• Retriever Off — Switches the Sound Retriever off.  
SURR  
•
Press repeatedly until STEREO shows in the  
display.  
Note  
1 You cannot use this function for the following audio streams:  
• Dolby TrueHD: over 88.2 kHz  
• DTS-HD: over 88.2 kHz or with the channel format of 2/0  
• DTS-Express: with the channel format of 2/0  
2 This function is available only for a Pioneer HDMI Control-compatible HDD/DVD recorder.  
3 This setting cannot be used with multichannel sources. Also, in case of SACD, DTS-HD, DTS-Express, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, and  
PCM (192 kHz/176.4 kHz), even stereo sources cannot be used.  
33  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to your system  
Listening with MCACC Effect  
06  
Adjusting the bass and treble  
Listen to sound using the corrected acoustic field  
settings obtained by MCACC.  
Use the bass and treble controls to adjust the overall tone.  
SOUND  
1
2
3
Press to open the sound menu.  
Select ‘Tone’ then press ENTER.  
SOUND  
1
2
3
Press to open the sound menu.  
ENTER  
1
ENTER  
Select ‘MCACC Effect’ then press ENTER.  
ENTER  
S
elect ‘Bass/Treble’ then press ENTER.  
ENTER  
• Selecting Bass/Treble cancels the Midnight,  
Loudness and Quiet listening modes. These modes  
cannot be used at the same time.  
Switch ’MCACC On’ or ‘MCACC Off’ then  
press ENTER to confirm.  
• When MCACC Effect is off, equalization, channel  
delay, channel level and standing wave are set to off.  
ENTER  
• When MCACC Effect is off, the channel delay and  
channel level can be adjusted manually and the  
settings stored separately from when MCACC Effect  
is on.  
4
Use the ꢄ/ꢁ buttons to select ‘Bass’ or  
’Treble’; use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to adjust the sound  
then press ENTER to confirm.  
• Bass and Treble can be adjusted from -6dB to +6dB.  
• MCACC Effect is set to on automatically after Auto  
MCACC setup is used.  
• When the Bass or Treble is set to something other  
than 0dB, the TONE indicator lights.  
Using Midnight, Loudness and Quiet  
listening modes  
Adjusting sound delay  
The Midnight listening feature allows you to hear  
Some monitors have a slight delay when showing video,  
so the soundtrack will be slightly out of sync with the  
picture. By adding a bit of delay, you can adjust the sound  
to match the presentation of the video.  
effective surround sound of movies at low volume levels.  
The Loudness listening feature can be used to get good  
bass and treble from music sources at low volume levels.  
There are a total of 60 steps (levels) that you can adjust,  
with a total range of 200 msec.  
The Quiet listening feature reduces excessive bass or  
treble in a sound source.  
SOUND  
SOUND  
1
2
3
Press to open the sound menu.  
1
2
3
Press to open the sound menu.  
Select ‘Tone’ then press ENTER.  
ENTER  
ENTER  
1
Select ‘Sound Delay’ then press ENTER.  
ENTER  
ENTER  
S
elect ‘Midnight’, ‘Loudness’ or ‘Quiet’  
Select the length of the delay in sound,  
2
then press ENTER to confirm.  
then press ENTER to confirm.  
• To cancel the Midnight, Loudness or Quiet listening  
• This option is deactivated and not displayed if you  
have AutoDelay set to On in HDMI Setup (see Setting  
the Auto Delay on page 46).  
modes, select Bass/Treble.  
Note  
1 While playing back DTS-HD (over 88.2 kHz) or Dolby TrueHD (over 88.2 kHz) audio streams, you cannot select Tone if a mode other than Bass/  
Treble is selected.  
2 While playing back DTS-HD (over 88.2 kHz) or Dolby TrueHD (over 88.2 kHz) audio streams, you cannot select a mode other than Bass/Treble.  
34  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to the radio  
07  
Chapter 7  
Listening to the radio  
Important  
ENTER  
3
Choose ‘FM Auto/Mono’ then press  
Select ’FM Mono’ then press ENTER.  
FM/AM  
•
To listen to the radio, press the FM/AM button  
to set the remote control to FM/AM control mode. The  
LCD screen on the remote control changes to the  
FM/AM screen.  
ENTER.  
ENTER  
4
The mono indicator ( ) lights when the tuner is in mono  
reception mode.  
FM/AM  
Select FM Auto above to switch back to auto-stereo  
1
2
3
mode (the stereo indicator (  
stereo broadcast).  
) lights when receiving a  
Improving poor AM sound  
Listening to the radio  
The simplest way to improve the sound quality of AM  
radio is to make sure that the TV in the room is switched  
off. Also try changing the position and direction of the  
AM loop antenna.  
The tuner can receive both FM and AM broadcasts, and  
lets you memorize your favorite stations so you don’t have  
to manually tune in every time you want to listen.  
1
FM/AM Switch to the tuner, then press repeatedly to  
Changing the noise cut mode  
select the FM or AM band.  
If you find that the AM sound quality is bad even after  
trying the above, you may be able to improve it using a  
different noise cut mode. Just choose the one that  
sounds best.  
The display shows the band and frequency.  
TUNE  
-
+
2
Tune to a frequency.  
There are three tuning modes — manual, auto, and high-  
speed:  
SETUP  
1
2
3
4
Press after tuning to an AM radio station.  
• Manual tuning – Press TUNE +/– repeatedly to  
change the displayed frequency.  
ENTER  
ENTER  
ENTER  
Select ‘Tuner Setup’ then press ENTER.  
• Auto tuning – Press and hold TUNE +/– until the  
frequency display starts to move, then release. The  
tuner will stop on the next station it finds. Repeat to  
keep searching.  
Choose ‘Noise Cut’ then press ENTER.  
• High-speed tuning – Press and hold TUNE +/– until  
the frequency display starts to move rapidly. Keep the  
button held down until you reach the frequency you  
want. If necessary, fine tune the frequency using the  
manual tuning method.  
Select a Noise cut mode (1, 2 or 3) then  
press ENTER.  
Memorizing stations  
Improving poor FM reception  
If you’re listening to an FM station in stereo but the  
reception is weak, you can improve the sound quality by  
switching to mono.  
You can save up to 30 station presets so that you always  
have easy access to your favorite stations without having  
to tune in manually each time.  
1
Tune to an FM or AM radio station.  
Select mono or auto-stereo reception (FM) or the Noise  
Cut mode (AM) as necessary. These settings are saved  
along with the preset.  
SETUP  
1
Press after tuning to an FM radio station.  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘Tuner Setup’ then press ENTER.  
SETUP  
2
Press SETUP.  
ENTER  
3
Select ‘Tuner Setup’ then press ENTER.  
35  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to the radio  
07  
Displaying RDS information  
ENTER  
You can display the different types of RDS information  
available.  
4
5
Choose ‘ST.Memory’ then press ENTER.  
2
ENTER  
DISP  
•
Display the RDS information.  
Select the station preset you want then  
.
Each press changes the display as follows:  
press ENTER  
• Radio Text (RT) – Messages sent by the radio station.  
For example, a talk radio station may provide a phone  
number as RT.  
Listening to station presets  
1
2
Make sure the tuner function is selected.  
• Program Service Name (PS) – The name of the radio  
station.  
ST  
-
+
Select a station preset.  
• Alternatively, use the number buttons to select a  
preset directly.  
• Program Type (PTY) – This indicates the kind of  
program currently being broadcast.  
• Search – PTY search (see below)  
• Current tuner frequency  
Using RDS  
Radio Data System (RDS) is a system used by most FM  
radio stations to provide listeners with various kinds of  
information — the name of the station and the kind of  
show they’re broadcasting, for example.  
Searching for RDS programs  
You can search for a program type listed above.  
3
FM/AM  
One feature of RDS is that you can search by type of  
program. For example, you can search for a station that’s  
broadcasting a show with the program type, Jazz.  
1
Press to select the FM band.  
DISP  
2
Press repeatedly until ‘Search’ appears in the  
1
You can search the following program types:  
display.  
News – News  
Finance – Stock market reports,  
commerce, trading, etc.  
Children – Programs for children  
Social – Social affairs  
Affairs – Current Affairs  
Info – General Information  
Sport – Sport  
3
Select the program type you want to hear.  
Start the search.  
Educate – Educational  
Drama – Radio plays, etc.  
Culture – National or regional  
culture, theater, etc.  
Science – Science and  
technology  
Varied – Usually talk-based  
material, such as quiz shows or Leisure – Leisure interests and  
interviews  
Religion – Programs concerning  
religion  
Phone In – Public expressing  
their views by phone  
Travel – Holiday-type travel  
rather than traffic  
announcements  
ENTER  
4
The system searches the station presets for a match. If it  
finds one, searching stops for five sec.  
5
If you want to keep listening to the station, press  
ENTER within the five seconds.  
If you don’t press ENTER, searching resumes.  
hobbies  
Jazz – Jazz  
Country – Country music  
Nation M – Popular music in a  
Pop M – Pop music  
Rock M – Rock music  
Easy M – Easy listening  
Light M – ‘Light’ classical music language other than English  
Classics – ‘Serious’ classical  
music  
Other M – Music not fitting  
above categories  
Oldies – Popular music from the  
’50s and ’60s  
Folk M – Folk music  
Document – Documentary  
Weather – Weather reports  
Note  
1 In addition, there are three other program types, Test, Alarm, and No Type. Alarm and Test are used for emergency announcements. You  
can’t search for these, but the tuner will switch automatically to this RDS broadcast signal. No Type appears when a program type cannot be  
found.  
2 • If any noise is picked up while displaying the RT scroll, some characters may be displayed incorrectly.  
• If you see No Radio Text Data in the RT display, it means no RT data is sent from the broadcast station. The display will automatically switch  
to the PS data display (if no PS data, the frequency is displayed).  
• In the PTY display, No Data or No Type may be shown. In this case, the PS display is shown after a few seconds.  
3 RDS is only possible in the FM band.  
36  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Surround sound settings  
08  
CShuaprterr o8 und sound settings  
SETUP  
1
2
3
Press SETUP.  
Important  
RCV  
•
Press to set the remote control to receiver  
control mode in order to operate the receiver  
subwoofer (make sure that the LCD displays the  
RECEIVER screen, as shown below).  
ENTER  
Select ‘Sound Setup’ then press ENTER.  
Select ‘ChannelLevel’, then press ENTER.  
Use the ꢄ/ꢁ buttons to select a channel  
ENTER  
RECEIVER  
ADV  
F.S.  
SURR  
SURR SURR  
4
or the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to adjust the level of that  
channel.  
2
• You can adjust the level of each channel by 10 dB.  
Using the Sound Setup menu  
ENTER  
From the Sound Setup menu you can access all the  
surround sound settings of the system.  
5
Press once when you’re finished.  
• If you use the Auto MCACC feature again, it will  
overwrite the settings you have made here.  
During setup, the speakers are represented by the  
following letters:  
• L – Front left speaker  
• C – Center speaker  
1
Speaker distance setting  
The Auto MCACC feature (see page 30) should give you  
the best surround sound setup. However you may find  
that by further adjustment of the speaker distance  
settings you can improve the surround sound in your  
listening room.  
• R – Front right speaker  
• SR – Surround right speaker  
• SL – Surround left speaker  
• SW – Subwoofer  
Set the distance of each speaker from your normal  
listening position.  
1
Channel level setting  
ENTER  
The Auto MCACC feature (see page 30) should give you  
the best surround sound setup. However you may find  
that by further adjustment of the channel levels you can  
improve the surround sound in your listening room.  
SETUP  
1
2
3
Open the ‘Sound Setup’ menu.  
ENTER  
Select ‘Distance’ then press ENTER.  
This method of setting the channel levels allows you to  
listen to a source and adjust the levels of each playback  
channel.  
A further method of setting the channel levels is to use  
the test tone method. See Adjusting the channel levels  
using the test tone on page 39 for more on this.  
Use the ꢄ/ꢁ buttons to select a speaker  
or the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to adjust the distance.  
Each speaker can be adjusted from 0.1 m to 9.0 m.  
ENTER  
4
Press ENTER when you’re finished.  
• If you use the Auto MCACC feature again, it will  
overwrite the settings you have made here.  
Note  
1 When this function is set while MCACC Effect is on, the value for the same function adjusted with the Auto MCACC feature is overwritten.  
When MCACC Effect is off, the value set here is applied, regardless of the value adjusted with the Auto MCACC feature. (The Auto MCACC  
setting is not overwritten.)  
2 The range of adjustment is limited when the volume level is set over 51.  
37  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Surround sound settings  
08  
1
2
Dynamic Range Control  
Dual mono setting  
When watching Dolby Digital or DTS material at low  
volume, low level sounds — including some of the dialog  
— can be difficult to hear properly. Using one of the  
Dynamic Range Control (DRC) settings can help by  
bringing up the low level sounds, while controlling high  
level peaks.  
Specifies how dual mono encoded Dolby Digital  
soundtracks should be played. You can also use this  
setting to switch the audio channel on DVD-RW discs  
recorded with bilingual audio.  
ENTER  
SETUP  
Dynamic Range Control works only with Dolby Digital  
soundtracks and some DTS soundtracks.  
1
2
3
Open the ‘Sound Setup’ menu.  
Select ‘Dual Mono’, then press ENTER.  
Select a setting.  
ENTER  
ENTER  
SETUP  
1
2
3
Open the ‘Sound Setup’ menu.  
Select ‘D.R.C.’, then press ENTER.  
Select a setting.  
ENTER  
Select one of the following:  
• CH1 Mono – Only channel 1 is played  
• CH2 Mono – Only channel 2 is played  
• CH1/CH2 – Both channels are played through the  
front speakers  
Select one of the following:  
• D.R.C. Auto – Only available for Dolby TrueHD  
signals. Select D.R.C. High or D.R.C. Mid for signals  
other than Dolby TrueHD.  
ENTER  
4
Press to exit.  
• D.R.C. High – Dynamic range is reduced (loud  
sounds are reduced in volume while quieter sounds  
are increased)  
• D.R.C. Mid – Mid setting  
• D.R.C. Off – No dynamic range adjustment (use  
when listening at higher volume)  
ENTER  
4
Press to exit.  
Note  
1 This setting is effective for the speaker output. A similar adjustment feature is available on the HDD/DVD recorder — see Audio DRC on  
page 156.  
2 This setting is effective for the speaker output. A similar adjustment feature is available on the HDD/DVD recorder — see Switching audio chan-  
nels on page 111.  
38  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Surround sound settings  
08  
Using the Virtual Surround Back mode  
This mode allows you to hear a virtual surround back  
channel through your surround speakers. You can  
choose to listen to sources with no surround back  
channel information, or if the material sounds better in  
the format (for example, 5.1) for which it was originally  
encoded, you can have the receiver only apply this effect  
Adjusting the channel levels using  
the test tone  
If you prefer, you can set the channel levels using a test  
tone as a reference, rather than playing a source (see  
Channel level setting on page 37). A test tone is played  
through each speaker in turn, allowing you to adjust the  
level as it plays.  
1
to 6.1 encoded sources like Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES.  
You can also adjust the channel levels for surround  
sound using test tone.  
ENTER  
SETUP  
1
2
3
Open the ‘Sound Setup’ menu.  
Select ‘Virtual SB’, then press ENTER.  
Select a setting.  
TEST  
TONE  
1
Carry out tone testing.  
ENTER  
The test tone is output from each speaker in turn.  
Adjust the volume level below 50.  
2
Adjust the channel level of a tune while it  
Select one of the following:  
is playing.  
• Vir.SB On – Virtual Surround Back is always used (for  
example, on 5.1 encoded material)  
The aim is to adjust the levels so that you hear the test  
tone at the same volume from each speaker. You can  
adjust the level of each channel by 10 dB.  
• You can adjust the overall volume of test tone output  
using the VOL +/– buttons (this does not affect the  
channel level settings).  
• Vir.SB Auto – Virtual Surround Back is automatically  
applied to 6.1 encoded sources (for example, Dolby  
Digital EX or DTS-ES), DTS Neo:6 or Advanced  
Surround mode  
• Because of the ultra low frequencies the subwoofer  
produces, it may sound quieter than it really is. We  
suggest adjusting the subwoofer level while listening  
to a source. See the method described in Channel  
level setting on page 37.  
• Vir.SB Off – Virtual Surround Back mode is switched  
off  
ENTER  
4
Press to exit.  
ENTER  
3
Press to exit test tone setup once you have  
LFE Attenuate  
Some Dolby Digital and DTS audio sources include ultra-  
low bass tones.  
finished.  
• If you use the Auto MCACC feature again, it will  
overwrite the settings you have made here.  
Set the LFE attenuator as necessary to prevent the ultra-  
low bass tones from distorting the sound from the  
speakers.  
The LFE is not limited when set to 0dB, which is the  
recommended value. When set to -5dB, -10dB, -15dB or  
-20dB, the LFE is limited by the respective degree. When  
Off is selected, no sound is output from the LFE channel.  
ENTER  
SETUP  
1
2
3
Open the ‘Sound Setup’ menu.  
Select ‘LFE ATT’, then press ENTER.  
Adjust the setting then press ENTER to  
ENTER  
ENTER  
confirm.  
Note  
1 Depending on the input signal and the listening mode, the Virtual Surround Back mode may not be effective.  
39  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
09  
Chapter 9  
Other connections  
You can also use the OPTICAL IN 1 jack to connect  
external components when not using it for sound input  
from a TV.  
Important  
• When making or changing connections on the side  
panel of this unit, be sure to switch power off and  
disconnect the power cord from the wall socket.  
After completing all connections, connect the power  
cord to the wall socket.  
Connecting an analog audio component  
You can use the ANALOG AUDIO IN jacks to connect an  
analog audio component, such as a tape player.  
Receiver subwoofer  
Connecting auxiliary components  
You can connect both analog and digital external audio  
sources to this system. Digital audio sources include  
digital satellite receivers, CD recorders, etc.  
Side panel  
We recommend using an HDMI cable to connect  
sources that have HDMI terminals. For more information  
see Connecting using HDMI on page 42.  
L
R
To listen to audio from a TV, connect the TV’s audio cable  
to one of the inputs on this unit.  
ANALOG  
AUDIO IN  
Connecting for digital audio  
This system has optical-type digital inputs. Use these to  
connect external components, such as your MD or CD  
recorder.  
From Audio output  
Tape player, MD, DAT, etc.  
Receiver subwoofer  
You can use the F.AUDIO input jack on the display unit  
to easily playback audio from a digital audio player or PC.  
Use a stereo mini-plug cable to connect a source to the  
display unit.  
• When you connect a cable to the F.AUDIO jack, this  
unit’s input automatically switches to Front Audio In.  
Side panel  
Display unit  
IN  
1
IN  
2
OPTICAL  
DIGITAL  
DISPLAY UNIT  
iPod  
MCACC  
SETUP MIC  
SYSTEM  
F.AUDIO  
From digital audio  
output (optical)  
F.AUDIO  
MD, CD Recorder, etc.  
Connect the OPTICAL IN 2 jack on the side panel  
to the optical output of an external playback  
component.  
From analog  
audio output  
•
These include digital components such as an MD player,  
digital satellite, or a game system.  
Stereo mini-plug cable  
Digital audio player, etc.  
40  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
09  
Connecting an iPod  
You can use the iPod jack on the display unit to playback  
music from an iPod. All operations can be carried out via  
the iPod. Use the supplied iPod cable to connect an iPod  
to this unit.  
Listening to an external audio source  
To listen to audio from a connected external component  
on this unit, choose its input function on the remote  
control. Some Pioneer products can be controlled via this  
remote.  
• When you connect an iPod, this unit’s input  
automatically switches to iPod.  
1
If the system isn’t already on, press ꢀ RECEIVER  
• Certain iPod models have connectors that are not  
compatible with this unit.  
to switch on.  
Also make sure that the external source (TV, satellite  
receiver, etc.) is switched on.  
Display unit  
LINE  
2
Select an audio input source.  
DISPLAY UNIT  
Input sources are cycled through as shown below:  
iPod  
MCACC  
SETUP MIC  
SYSTEM  
F.AUDIO  
Digital 1  
Digital 2  
Analog  
iPod  
Front Audio In  
iPod  
The LCD screen changes to that of the selected input  
source.  
3
Press the button for the appropriate connected  
component.  
When a connected component is not displayed on the  
screen, or when you have connected a component not  
manufactured by Pioneer, press RCV button to put the  
remote control on the receiver subwoofer operation  
screen.  
iPod R  
iPod cable  
iPod  
Music  
>
Extras  
Settings  
>
>
Shuffle Songs  
Backlight  
4
If necessary, start playback of the external source.  
MENU  
®
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S.  
and other countries.  
41  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
09  
Connecting external antennas  
About control out connections  
For an external AM antenna, use 5 to 6 meters of vinyl-  
insulated wire and set up either indoors or outdoors.  
Leave the loop antenna connected.  
Many Pioneer components support CONTROL  
connections, by which you can use the remote controls  
of any connected components by aiming them at the  
sensor of just one component.  
For an external FM antenna, use a PAL connector to hook  
up an external FM antenna.  
When you use a remote control, the control signal is  
passed along the chain to the appropriate component.  
external FM antenna  
If you choose to use this feature, you must make sure that  
you also have at least one set of HDMI or analog audio  
jacks connected to another component for grounding  
purposes.  
Receiver subwoofer  
•
Using a cable with mono mini-plugs on either  
side (sold separately), connect the CONTROL IN jack  
on another Pioneer component to the CONTROL OUT  
jack on the receiver subwoofer.  
Side panel  
This will allow you to control the other component by  
pointing its remote at the display unit supplied with this  
receiver subwoofer.  
ANTENNA  
AM LOOP  
FM  
UNBAL 75 Ω  
AM Loop antenna  
Connecting using HDMI  
If you have an HDMI or DVI (with HDCP) equipped  
component, you can connect it to this receiver using a  
external AM antenna  
PAL connector  
1
commercially available HDMI cable.  
The HDMI connection transfers uncompressed digital  
video, as well as almost every kind of digital audio that the  
connected component is compatible with, including  
DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, SACD, Blu-ray Disc, Video CD/  
Super VCD, CD and MP3, etc.  
Indoor antenna  
(vinyl-coated Wire)  
Outdoor antenna  
(5 m to 6 m)  
Receiver subwoofer  
HDMI  
T
IN 3  
IN 2  
IN 1  
HDMI  
OUT  
IN  
3
IN  
2
IN  
1
SYSTEM  
Rear panel  
From HDMI output  
HDMI/DVI-equipped component  
Note  
1 • An HDMI connection can only be made with DVI-equipped components compatible with both DVI and High Bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HD-  
CP). If you choose to connect to a DVI connector, you will need a separate adaptor (DVIꢅHDMI) to do so. A DVI connection, however, does not support  
audio signals. Consult your local audio dealer for more information.  
• This unit has been designed to be compliant with HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) Version 1.3a. Depending on the component you have  
connected, using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal transfers. Also, when using a component with HDMI version 1.0, it is not possible to  
output copy-controlled DVD-Audio CPPM sources from the HDMI connection.  
• This unit supports SACD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD Master Audio. To take advantage of these formats, however, make sure that  
the component connected to this unit also supports the corresponding format.  
42  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
09  
1
Use an HDMI cable to connect the HDMI IN 1 to 3  
ENTER  
interconnect on this receiver subwoofer to an HDMI  
output on your HDMI component.  
Once this receiver subwoofer is properly connected to  
your HDMI component, the HDMI indicator (red) lights  
up on the display unit when you watch HDMI contents  
4
Adjust the setting then press ENTER to  
confirm.  
• AMP Mode – Output an HDMI audio signal from this  
unit.  
• Through Mode – Output an HDMI audio signal from  
a TV or plasma television.  
2
Use an HDMI cable to connect the HDMI OUT  
interconnect on this receiver subwoofer to an HDMI  
interconnect on a HDMI-compatible display.  
• The arrow on the cable connector body should be  
facing right for correct alignment with the connector  
on the player.  
The HDMI THROUGH indicator lights.  
About HDMI  
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) supports  
both video and audio on a single digital connection for  
use with DVD players, DTV, set-top boxes, and other AV  
devices. HDMI was developed to provide the  
technologies of High-bandwidth Digital Content  
Protection (HDCP) as well as Digital Visual Interface  
(DVI) in one specification. HDCP is used to protect digital  
content transmitted and received by DVI-compliant  
displays.  
3
Use the HDMI 1 to 3 button to select the HDMI input  
you’ve connected to (for example, HDMI 2).  
You can also use the display unit INPUT SELECTOR to  
carry out this operation.  
HDMI has the capability to support standard, enhanced,  
or high-definition video plus standard to multi-channel  
surround-sound audio. HDMI features include uncom-  
pressed digital video, a bandwidth of up to 2.2 gigabytes  
per second (with HDTV signals), one connector (instead  
of several cables and connectors), and communication  
between the AV source and AV devices such as DTVs.  
• Set the HDMI Mode in HDMI mode setting below to  
Through Mode if you want to hear HDMI audio  
output from your TV or plasma television (no sound  
will be heard from this receiver).  
• If the video signal does not appear on your TV or  
plasma television, try adjusting the resolution  
settings on your component or display.  
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia  
Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI  
Licensing LLC.  
HDMI mode setting  
Specifies the routing of the HDMI audio signal out of this  
receiver subwoofer (amp) or through to a TV or plasma  
television. You cannot use a number of sound functions  
of this unit when HDMI Mode is set to Through Mode.  
Important  
RCV  
•
Press to set the remote control to receiver  
control mode in order to operate the receiver  
subwoofer (make sure that the LCD displays the  
RECEIVER screen).  
SETUP  
1
2
3
Press SETUP.  
ENTER  
Select ‘HDMI Setup’ then press ENTER.  
ENTER  
Select ‘HDMI Mode’, then press ENTER.  
43  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HDMI Control  
10  
Chapter 10  
HDMI Control  
By connecting this unit to an HDMI Control-compatible  
Pioneer plasma television or the HDD/DVD recorder with  
an HDMI cable, you can control this unit from the remote  
control of a connected plasma television, as well as have  
the connected plasma television automatically change  
inputs in response to operations carried out on this unit.  
Making the HDMI Control connections  
You can use synchronized operation for a connected  
plasma television and up to three other components  
(including a maximum of two recorders or players).  
Be sure to connect the plasma television’s audio cable to  
the audio input of this unit.  
Refer to the operating instructions for your plasma  
television for more information about which operations  
can be carried out by connecting via HDMI cable.  
• If you use a commercially available HDMI cable,  
check whether the cable supports the HDMI 1.3  
standard. Otherwise, the HDMI Control function may  
not operate properly.  
• You cannot use this function with components that  
do not support HDMI Control.  
• We cannot guarantee this unit will work with HDMI  
Control-compatible components other than those  
made by Pioneer.  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO OUT  
AC IN  
COAXIAL  
HDMI OUT  
ANTENNA(DIGITAL)  
Important  
OUT  
5
IN  
V
30 mA  
RCV  
•
Press to set the remote control to receiver  
control mode in order to operate the receiver  
subwoofer (make sure that the LCD displays the  
RECEIVER screen, as shown below).  
HDMI  
OUT  
HDD/DVD Recorder  
SDVR-LX70D  
Receiver subwoofer  
Side panel  
RECEIVER  
Rear panel  
HDMI  
OUT  
IN  
3
IN  
2
IN  
1
ANTENNA  
ADV  
F.S.  
SURR  
L
SURR SURR  
AM LOOP  
IN  
1
IN  
2
R
OPTICAL  
DIGITAL  
FM  
UNBAL 75 Ω  
ANALOG  
AUDIO IN  
SYSTEM  
or  
From digital audio  
output (optical)  
From Audio output  
To HDMI input  
HDMI Control-compatible  
Pioneer plasma television  
44  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HDMI Control  
10  
• Connect the plasma television directly to this unit.  
Interrupting a direct connection with other amps or  
an AV converter (such as an HDMI switch) can cause  
operational errors.  
Important  
• When connecting this system or changing  
connections, be sure to switch the power off and  
disconnect the power cord from the wall socket.  
After completing all connections, connect the power  
cords to the wall socket.  
•
After connecting this unit to an AC outlet, a 15-second  
initialization process begins. You cannot carry out  
any operations during initialization. The HDMI  
indicator on the display unit blinks during  
initialization, and you can turn this unit on once it has  
stopped blinking.  
HDMI Control-compatible  
Pioneer plasma television  
HDMI input  
HDMI cable  
HDMI output  
Other amps  
• To get the most out of this function, we recommend  
that you connect your HDMI component not to a  
plasma television but rather directly to the HDMI  
terminal on this unit.  
or AV converter  
HDMI input  
HDMI cable  
HDMI OUT  
Setting the HDMI options  
You must adjust the settings of this unit as well as HDMI  
Control-compatible connected components in order to  
make use of the HDMI Control function. For more  
information see the operating instructions for each  
component.  
Receiver subwoofer  
• Only connect components you intend to use as a  
source to the HDMI input of this unit. Interrupting a  
direct connection with other amps or an AV converter  
(such as an HDMI switch) can cause operational errors.  
Setting the HDMI Control mode  
Choose whether to set this unit’s HDMI Control function  
On or Off. You will need to set it to Control On to use the  
HDMI Control function.  
• When using a TV not manufactured by Pioneer, put  
this setting to Control Off.  
HDMI Control-compatible  
Pioneer plasma television  
HDMI input  
SETUP  
1
2
3
4
Press SETUP.  
HDMI cable  
HDMI OUT  
ENTER  
ENTER  
ENTER  
Select ‘HDMI Setup’ then press ENTER.  
Select ‘HDMI Ctrl’, then press ENTER.  
Adjust the setting then press ENTER to  
Receiver subwoofer  
HDMI IN  
HDMI cable  
HDMI output  
confirm.  
Other amps or AV converter  
• Control On – Enables the HDMI Control function.  
When this unit’s power is turned off and you have a  
supported source begin playback while using the  
HDMI Control function, the audio and video output  
from the HDMI connection are output from the  
plasma television.  
• Control Off – The HDMI Control is disabled.  
Synchronized operations cannot be used. When this  
unit’s power is turned off, audio and video of sources  
connected via HDMI are not output.  
45  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HDMI Control  
10  
Setting the Auto Delay  
Important  
This feature automatically corrects the audio-to-video  
delay between components connected with an HDMI  
cable. The audio delay time is set depending on the  
operational status of the display connected with an HDMI  
cable. The audio delay time is automatically adjusted  
according to the video delay time.  
• You must set this setting to activate the HDMI Control  
function.  
Before using synchronization  
Once you have finished all connections and settings, you  
must:  
SETUP  
1
2
3
4
Press SETUP.  
1
Put all components into standby mode.  
ENTER  
ENTER  
ENTER  
Select ‘HDMI Setup’ then press ENTER.  
Select ‘Auto Delay’, then press ENTER.  
Select ‘A.Delay On’ or ‘A.Delay Off’ then  
2
Turn the power ON for all components, with the  
power for the plasma television being turned on  
last.  
3
Choose the HDMI input to which the TV is  
connected to this unit, and see if video output from  
connected components displays properly on the  
screen or not.  
press ENTER to confirm.  
Synchronized amp mode  
Tip  
Synchronized amp mode begins once you carry out an  
operation for the plasma television. For more  
information, see the operating instructions of your  
plasma television.  
• This feature is only available when the connected  
display supports the automatic audio/video  
synchronizing capability (‘lip-sync’) for HDMI or  
HDMI Control. If you find the automatically set delay  
time unsuitable, set A.Delay to Off and adjust the  
sound delay settings manually (page 34).  
Synchronized amp mode operations  
By connecting a component to this unit with an HDMI  
cable you can use synchronized amp mode, which allows  
you to synchronize the following operations:  
Audio input settings from Plasma televisions  
(TV Input)  
• Displays on the plasma television when you mute or  
adjust the volume of this unit.  
To listen to audio from a plasma television on this device,  
you will need to connect an audio cable other than an  
HDMI cable. From this menu, set the audio input to that  
which you would like to connect. Press TV on the remote  
control to switch this unit to the input source selected  
here. This setting is changed to the selected input and  
the audio from the plasma television is output from this  
device.  
• The input of this unit is automatically changed when  
playback occurs on a connected component.  
• Even if you change this unit’s input to a device that is  
not connected by HDMI, the synchronized amp mode  
remains in effect.  
• By pressing GENRE when listening to a source from  
a supplied HDD/DVD recorder, the most appropriate  
listening mode is automatically selected (page 33).  
Select from inputs Digital 1, Digital 2 and Analog.  
SETUP  
1
2
3
4
Press SETUP.  
Canceling synchronized amp mode  
ENTER  
ENTER  
ENTER  
If you cancel synchronized amp mode while connected  
via HDMI to a plasma television or while you are watching  
a TV programme, the power for this unit is turned off.  
Select ‘System Setup’ then press ENTER.  
Select ‘TV Input’, then press ENTER.  
Adjust the setting then press ENTER to  
confirm.  
46  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
11  
Chapter 11  
Additional information  
After selecting Sleep On, you can press SLEEP again to  
check how much time is left. Each line indicates  
approximately 12 minutes (remaining):  
Important  
RCV  
•
Press to set the remote control to receiver  
control mode in order to operate the receiver  
subwoofer (make sure that the LCD displays the  
RECEIVER screen, as shown below).  
S l e e p - - - - -  
RECEIVER  
Setting up the remote to control your TV  
ADV  
F.S.  
SURR  
SURR SURR  
You can use the supplied remote to control your TV. To be  
able to use this feature you first have to program the  
remote with a maker code from the table on the following  
page.  
Dimming the display  
You can choose to dim the display of the display unit if you  
TV  
1
2
Set the input to TV.  
1
find it too bright.  
Press and hold the TV button and press SETUP.  
The TV preset screen is shown on the remote control, and  
the current maker code is displayed on the LCD screen.  
SETUP  
1
2
3
4
Press SETUP.  
TV PRESET  
ENTER  
ENTER  
ENTER  
Select ‘System Setup’ then press ENTER.  
Select ‘Dimmer’ then press ENTER.  
Select ‘Dimmer Light’ or ’Dimmer Dark’  
3 5 1  
2
Maker code  
Number buttons  
ENTER  
1
3
4
7
5
6
9
8
CLEAR  
ENTER  
0
then press ENTER to confirm.  
EXIT  
3
Use the number buttons to input the maker code  
Setting the sleep timer  
for your TV, and press ENTER.  
The sleep timer switches off the receiver subwoofer after  
a specified time so you can fall asleep without worrying  
See the table on the next page for the list of maker codes.  
If there is more than one code given for your make, input  
the first one in the list.  
2
about it.  
• If the maker’s name of your TV doesn’t appear in the  
table, you will not be able to use this remote to control  
your TV.  
SLEEP  
•
Press to select an option.  
Choose between the following options:  
• Sleep On – Switches off after about an hour  
• Sleep Off – Cancels the sleep timer  
4
Point the remote towards your TV and press  
ꢀ SOURCE to check that the remote works with your  
TV.  
If the remote is set up correctly, the TV should switch off.  
If it doesn’t and there is another code given for your  
maker, repeat step 1 with a new code.  
Note  
1 The display of the display unit dims when the sleep timer is set, regardless of this setting.  
2 The display of the display unit dims when the sleep timer is set. The HDD/DVD recorder does not automatically switch off with the sleep timer.  
47  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
TV Preset code list  
11  
Resetting the system  
Please note that there are cases where only certain functions  
may be controllable after assigning the proper preset code, or  
the codes for the manufacturer in the list will not work for the  
model that you are using.  
Use this procedure to reset all system settings to the  
factory default.  
1
Switch the system on.  
2
Press and hold INPUT SELECTOR then press the  
Manufacturer Code(s)  
ꢀ STANDBY/ON button on the display unit.  
The next time you switch on, all the system settings  
should be reset.  
AIWA 006  
AKAI 009, 010  
ALBA 011  
BESTER 015  
BLAUPUNKT 016, 017  
BLUE SKY 018  
BRANDT 019  
BUSH 022  
Installation and maintenance  
CLATRONIC 023  
DAEWOO 035, 036, 037  
DUAL 039,040  
Hints on installation  
We want you to enjoy using this system for years to come,  
so please bear in mind the following points when  
choosing a location:  
FERGUSON 048, 048, 050  
FIRSTLINE 051  
FISHER 053  
FRABA 054  
Do...  
FUNAI 056, 058, 059  
ꢆ Use in a well-ventilated room.  
GOLDSTAR 070  
ꢆPlace on a solid, flat, level surface, such as a table, shelf or  
stereo rack.  
GOODMANS 071, 072, 073  
GRUNDIG 074, 075, 076  
ICE 084  
IRRADIO 085  
ITT 086, 087  
JVC 093, 094, 095, 096  
KENDO 098  
Don’t...  
ꢇ Use in a place exposed to high temperatures or humidity,  
including near radiators and other heat-generating  
appliances.  
LOEWE 103, 104, 105  
ꢇ Place on a window sill or other place where the system will  
be exposed to direct sunlight.  
MARK 116  
MATSUI 117, 118  
MEDION 119  
ꢇ Use in an excessively dusty or damp environment.  
ꢇ Place directly on top of an amplifier, or other component in  
your stereo system that becomes hot in use.  
MITSUBISHI 123, 124, 125  
MIVER 127  
ꢇ Use near a television or monitor as you may experience  
interference — especially if the television uses an indoor  
antenna.  
NEC 130  
NOKIA 086, 087, 132, 133, 134, 135, 136  
NORDMENDE 137, 138, 139  
OCEANIC 135, 136  
OKANO 140  
ꢇ Use in a kitchen or other room where the system may be  
exposed to smoke or steam.  
ONWA 141  
ꢇ Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover with cloth — this may  
prevent proper cooling of the system unit.  
ꢇ Place on an unstable surface, or one that is not large enough  
to support all four of the system unit’s feet.  
PANASONIC 146, 147  
PHILIPS 155  
PHONOLA 157  
RADIO 163  
RADIOLA 168  
SABA 176, 177, 178, 179, 180  
SAMSUNG 185, 186  
SANYO 190, 191, 192, 193, 194  
SCHNEIDER 199, 200, 201, 202  
SHARP 208, 209  
SIEMENS 212  
SONY 215  
TATUNG 221  
TELEFUNKEN 222, 223, 224, 225  
THOMSON 226, 227  
THORN 228  
TOSHIBA 231, 232  
UNIVERSUM 235  
W.HOUSE 239  
WATSON 244  
YAMAHA 245, 246, 247, 248, 249  
PIONEER 001, 002  
48  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
Surround sound formats  
11  
Digital, the multi-channel audio standard for DVD and HD  
broadcasts worldwide, Dolby Digital Plus was designed for  
the next-generation A/V receivers but remains fully  
compatible with all current A/V receivers.  
Below is a brief description of the main surround sound  
formats you’ll find on DVDs, satellite, cable and terrestrial  
broadcasts, and video cassettes.  
Dolby Digital Plus delivers multi-channel audio programs of  
up to 7.1 channels (*) and supports multiple programs in a  
single encoded bitstream with the maximum bit rate  
potential of up to 6 Mbps and the maximum bit rate  
performance of up to 3 Mbps on HD DVD and 1.7 Mbps on  
Blu-ray Disc, and it outputs Dolby Digital bitstreams for  
playback on existing Dolby Digital systems. Dolby Digital  
Plus can accurately reproduce the sound originally intended  
by directors and producers.  
Dolby  
The Dolby technologies are explained below. See  
www.dolby.com for more detailed information.  
It also features multi-channel sound with discrete channel  
output, interactive mixing and streaming capability in  
advanced systems. Supported by High-Definition Media  
Interface (HDMI), a single-cable digital connection is  
possible for high-definition audio and video.  
Dolby Digital  
Dolby Digital is a multichannel digital audio coding system  
widely used in cinemas, and in the home for DVD and digital  
broadcast soundtracks. It can deliver up to six discrete audio  
channels, comprising five full range channels and a special  
LFE (low frequency effects) channel used mainly for deep,  
rumbling sound effects; hence the term “5.1-channel” Dolby  
Digital.  
Dolby TrueHD  
Dolby TrueHD is the next-generation lossless encoding  
technology developed for high-definition optical discs in the  
upcoming era. Dolby TrueHD delivers tantalizing sound that  
is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, unlocking the true  
high-definition entertainment experience on high-definition  
optical discs in the next generation. When coupled with high-  
definition video, Dolby TrueHD offers an unprecedented  
home theater experience with stunning sound and high-  
definition picture.  
In addition to the format features above, Dolby Digital  
decoders offer downmixing for compatibility with mono,  
stereo and Dolby Pro Logic audio from a number of bit rates  
and channels. Another feature, called Dialog Normalization,  
attenuates programs based on the average level of dialog in  
a program relative to its peak level (also known as Dialnorm)  
in order to achieve uniform playback level.  
It supports bit rates of up to 18 Mbps and records up to 8 full-  
range channels (*) individually with 24-bit/96 kHz audio. It  
also features extensive metadata including dialogue  
normalization and dynamic range control. Supported by  
High-Definition Media Interface (HDMI), a single-cable  
digital connection is possible for high-definition audio and  
video.  
Dolby Pro Logic II and Dolby Surround  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is an improved version of the Dolby Pro  
Logic II (and Dolby Pro Logic) decoding system. Using the  
innovative “steering logic” circuit, this system extracts  
surround sound from sources as follows:  
• Dolby Pro Logic – 4.1 channel sound (mono surround)  
from any stereo source  
* HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc standards currently limit their  
maximum number of audio channels to eight, whereas  
Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD support more than  
eight audio channels.  
• Dolby Pro Logic II – 5.1 channel sound (stereo  
surround) from any stereo source  
With two channel sources, the “.1” subwoofer channel is  
generated by bass management in the receiver.  
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”,  
“Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby  
Laboratories.  
Dolby Surround is an encoding system which embeds  
surround sound information within a stereo soundtrack,  
which a Dolby Pro Logic decoder can then use for enhanced  
surround listening with greater sound detail.  
DTS  
The DTS technologies are explained below. See  
www.dtstech.com for more detailed information.  
Dolby Digital Plus  
Dolby Digital Plus is the next-generation audio technology  
for all high-definition programming and media. It combines  
the efficiency to meet future broadcast demands with the  
power and flexibility to realize the full audio potential  
expected in the upcoming high-definition era. Built on Dolby  
49  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
11  
DTS Digital Surround  
DTS 96/24  
DTS Digital Surround is a 5.1-channel audio coding system  
from DTS Inc. now widely used for DVD-Video, DVD-Audio,  
5.1 music discs, digital broadcasts, and video games. It can  
deliver up to six discrete audio channels, comprising five full  
range channels, including an LFE channel. Higher sound  
quality is achieved through the use of a low compression  
rate, and high rates of transmittance during playback.  
DTS 96/24 is an extension of the original DTS Digital  
Surround which offers high quality 96 kHz/24-bit audio using  
a DTS 96/24 decoder. This format is also fully backward  
compatible with all existing decoders. This means that DVD  
players can play this software using a conventional DTS 5.1  
channel decoder.  
DTS-EXPRESS  
DTS-ES  
DTS-EXPRESS is a low-bitrate encoding technology  
supporting up to 5.1 channels with fixed data transfer rates.  
This format is incorporated with sub audio on HD DVD and  
secondary audio on Blu-ray Disc while boasting the potential  
applicability to upcoming broadcasts and memory audio  
contents.  
DTS-ES (the ES stands for Extended Surround) is a decoder  
that is capable of decoding both DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 and  
DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 encoded sources. DTS-ES Discrete 6.1  
gives ‘true’ 6.1 channel sound, with a completely separate  
(discrete) surround back channel. DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 has a  
surround back channel matrixed into the surround left/right  
channels. Both sources are also compatible with a  
conventional DTS 5.1 channel decoder.  
DTS-HD Master Audio  
DTS-HD Master Audio is a technology that delivers master  
audio sources recorded in a professional studio to listeners  
without any loss of data, preserving audio quality. DTS-HD  
Master Audio adopts variable data transfer rates, facilitating  
data transfer to the maximum rate of 24.5 Mbps in the  
Blu-ray disc format, 18.0 Mbps in the HD-DVD format, which  
by far exceeds that of a standard DVD. These high data  
transfer rates enable lossless transmission of 96 kHz/24-bit  
7.1-channel audio sources without deteriorating the quality  
of the original sound. DTS-HD Master Audio is an  
DTS Neo:6  
DTS Neo:6 can generate 6.1 channel surround sound from  
any matrixed stereo source (such as video or TV) and from 5.1  
channel sources. It uses both the channel information  
already encoded into the source, as well as its own  
processing to determine channel localization (with two  
channel sources, the “.1” subwoofer channel is generated by  
bass management in the receiver). Two modes (Cinema and  
Music) are available using DTS Neo:6 with two channel  
sources.  
irreplaceable technology that can reproduce sound faithfully  
as intended by the creator of music or movies.  
“DTS” is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. and “DTS-HD  
Master Audio” is a trademark of DTS, Inc.  
Troubleshooting  
Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions. If you think that there is something wrong with  
this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other  
components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks  
listed below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work.  
• If the system does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity disconnect the plug from  
the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.  
• If there is no sound or no multichannel sound from the SDVR-LX70D HDD/DVD recorder, try setting the recorder’s  
audio-related settings back to their defaults — see The Initial Setup menu on page 152.  
General  
Problem  
Remedy  
The power does not turn on, or • Leave the unit plugged in, wait for one minute, then switch back on.  
switches off suddenly (an error • Make sure there are no loose strands of wire touching the unit. This could cause the  
message may be displayed at system to shut off automatically.  
startup). Or, the display  
• Check that the speakers are connected correctly.  
disappears suddenly and no  
sound is output (with the  
POWER ON indicator (Blue)  
• Make sure there is enough space for ventilation around the receiver subwoofer.  
• Make sure the voltage of the mains power source is correct for the model.  
• Try reducing the volume level.  
and the HDMI indicator (Red) • If the problem persists, take it to your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your  
lit up).  
dealer for servicing.  
• Do not block the air intake opening on the bottom as well as the air exhaust opening on  
the back of this unit.  
50  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
11  
Problem  
Remedy  
No sound is output when an  
input function is selected.  
• When playing back a source on the supplied HDD/DVD recorder, make sure that the  
settings for Audio Out (page 155), and the HDMI Output under Audio Output Setting  
(page 159) are all at their default values.  
• If you’re using the line input, make sure the component is connected correctly and the  
volume level of your external component (i.e. a portable player, etc.) is adjusted (see  
Connecting auxiliary components on page 40).  
• Turn up the volume.  
• No audio is output from the speakers connected to this unit if HDMI Mode is set to  
Through Mode (page 43).  
• No audio is output if a DVI component is connected via HDMI.  
• Press MUTE on the remote control to turn muting off.  
No sound from surround  
speaker.  
• Refer to Channel level setting on page 37 to check the speaker levels.  
• Check that you haven’t selected the Stereo mode (see Listening in surround sound on  
page 31).  
• Connect the speakers properly (refer to Connecting up on page 8).  
• Verify the audio output and HDMI settings of your external component when connecting  
an external component via an optical digital cable or HDMI cable.  
Can’t operate using the remote • Replace the batteries (Putting the batteries in the remote control on page 26).  
control.  
• Operate within 7 m, 30° of the remote sensor (Using the remote control on page 26).  
• Remove any obstacles or operate from another position.  
• Avoid exposing the remote sensor on the front panel to direct light.  
• For operating the HDD/DVD recorder, make sure that the control cable and HDMI cable  
are connected (page 13).  
• For operating the other Pioneer component connected to the CONTROL OUT jack of this  
receiver subwoofer, make sure that the control cable and either an HDMI or analog audio  
cable are connected (page 42).  
Tuner  
Problem  
Remedy  
Considerable noise in radio  
broadcasts.  
• Connect the AM antenna (refer to Connecting up on page 8) and adjust the direction and  
position for best reception. You may also connect an additional internal or external AM  
antenna (refer to Connecting external antennas on page 42).  
• Fully extend the FM wire antenna, position for best reception, and secure to a wall. You  
may also connect an outdoor FM antenna (see Connecting external antennas on page 42).  
• Turn off other equipment that may be causing the noise or move it further away.  
Auto tuning does not pick up  
some stations.  
• The radio signal is weak. Auto tuning will only detect radio stations with a good signal.  
For more sensitive tuning, connect an outdoor antenna.  
HDMI  
Symptom  
Remedy  
No picture or sound.  
• This receiver is HDCP-compatible. Check that the components you are connecting are  
also HDCP-compatible.  
• Depending on the connected source component, it’s possible that it will not work with  
this receiver (even if it is HDCP-compatible).  
• If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your  
monitor, please consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for  
support.  
No sound, or sound suddenly • Check that the HDMI Mode setting is set to AMP Mode/Through Mode.  
ceases.  
• If the component is a DVI device, use a separate connection for the audio.  
• Check the audio output settings of the source component.  
51  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
Displayed Messages  
11  
Message  
Description  
192kHz PCM  
SACD  
These messages are displayed when you operate a function incompatible with the audio  
source being played back.  
DTS-HD  
DTS Express  
Dolby TrueHD  
Dolby D+  
No MIC  
Muting  
2ch Only  
Displays when you press MCACC when the MCACC setup mic is not connected.  
Displays when you press TEST TONE or MCACC while this unit is muted.  
An operation is prohibited because it is only applicable to 2 channel sources, while the  
current source is a multichannel source.  
Exit  
Appears when a menu is automatically exited after a set period of inactivity.  
HDMI Through  
Displays when you change the Listening Mode, the volume level, or some sound settings  
when the HDMI Mode is set to Through Mode.  
Unknown  
The genre information for contents being played back on the HDD/DVD recorder cannot be  
obtained.  
No Genre  
There is no genre set for contents being played back on the HDD/DVD recorder.  
The connected component is not compatible with synchronized genre mode.  
HDMI C.ERR 2C*  
Can’t use  
• You tried to use Genre Sync Mode for a source component that does not support this  
function.  
• The source component is in a situation where Genre Sync Mode cannot be used.  
• You tried to use Genre Sync Mode when the input source of this unit is a source other  
than HDMI.  
• The operation is forbidden due to the surround settings.  
• When the volume level is over 51, some functions are restricted.  
HDMI C.ERR 1**  
Check if the HDMI cable is properly connected. If the cable is properly connected, this unit  
may be damaged. In such an event, please contact a Pioneer-authorized service center or  
your nearest dealer.  
Noisy!  
Background noise is too high to complete MCACC setup successfully.  
Error MIC!  
An error occurred during MCACC setup because the microphone is not connected or is  
not connected properly.  
Error Speaker!  
Over Temp  
An error occurred during MCACC setup because the speakers are not connected or are  
not connected properly.  
Try lowering the volume. If this problem is not fixed by removing and inserting the power  
cable, this unit may be damaged. In such an event, please contact a Pioneer-authorized  
service center or your nearest dealer.  
OC Error1  
OC Error2  
Check whether the speaker cables are short-circuited. If the error message continues to be  
displayed, contact your Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer for servicing.  
*** BackUpERR  
Contact your Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer for servicing.  
52  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
11  
SSP-LX70ST Satellite Speaker  
(Front/center speakers x2, Surround speakers x2)  
Specifications  
•
Front/center speakers  
Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closed-box bookshelf type  
(magnetically shielded)  
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 cm 1-way system  
Speakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 cm cone type x3  
Nominal impedance  
Front channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Ω  
Center channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Ω  
Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Hz to 20 kHz  
Maximum input power  
Front channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 W  
Center channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 W  
Dimensions . . . .122.5 mm (W) x 89.5 mm (H) x 104 mm (D)  
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.5 kg  
SX-LX70SW Audio Multi-channel Receiver Subwoofer  
•
Amplifier section  
RMS Power Output (8 channel output):  
Front, Center, Surround (6 channel). . . 50 W per channel  
(1 kHz, 10 % T.H.D., 8 Ω)  
Dual Subwoofer (2 channel) . . . . . . .100 W (50 W+ 50 W)  
(100 Hz, 10 % T.H.D., 8 Ω)  
•
FM tuner section  
Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87.5 MHz to 108 MHz  
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Ω, unbalanced  
•
AM tuner section  
Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531 kHz to 1602 kHz  
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Loop antenna  
•
Surround speakers  
Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closed-box bookshelf type  
(magnetically shielded)  
•
Subwoofer section  
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 cm 1-way system  
Speakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 cm cone type x2  
Nominal impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Ω  
Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Hz to 20 kHz  
Maximum input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 W  
Dimensions . . . .122.5 mm (W) x 89.5 mm (H) x 104 mm (D)  
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.44 kg  
Enclosure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Bass-reflex floor type  
(magnetically shielded)  
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 cm 1-way system  
Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 cm cone type x2  
Nominal impedance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Ω  
Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Hz to 500 Hz  
Maximum Input Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 W x2  
•
Input/Output section  
Accessories  
HDMI terminal  
•
Accessory box (AS-LX70):  
input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 pin x3  
output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 pin (5 V, 100 mA)  
Other connector  
System connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 pin  
Audio input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Optical x2 (Digital)  
RCA (2 pin) (Analog)  
Control output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini jack x2  
Display unit  
System connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 pin  
Front Audio input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Mini jack  
MCACC input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Mini jack  
iPod input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 pin (12 V, 420 mA)  
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
AA/LR6 alkaline batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4  
Power cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2  
Display unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
AM loop antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
FM wire antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
Microphone (for Auto MCACC setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
HDMI cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2  
Control cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
Display cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
Optical digital cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
iPod cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
•
Miscellaneous  
G-LINK™ cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1
Power requirements. . . . . . . AC 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz  
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 W  
Power consumption in standby  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.39 W (HDMI Control ON)  
0.29 W (HDMI Control OFF)  
Dimensions . . . . . . 245 mm (W) x 409 mm (H) x 600 mm (D)  
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.8 kg  
RF antenna cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2  
Warranty card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
These operating instructions  
•
Receiver subwoofer (SX-LX70SW) box:  
Cleaning cloth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
•
Satellite Speakers (SSP-LX70ST) box:  
Speaker cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Speaker bases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4  
Non-skid pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4  
Note  
• Specifications and design subject to possible  
modification without notice, due to improvements.  
53  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢀ
Section Two  
HDD/DVD Recorder  
SDVR-LX70D  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section Two  
Contents  
01 Before you start  
07 Playback  
Symbols used in this manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Disc/content format playback compatibility. . . . . . . 57  
About the internal hard disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
Basic playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
Using the Disc Navigator with recordable discs  
and the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106  
Using the Disc Navigator with  
02 Recorder connections  
Connecting a TV antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
Easy connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver . . . . . 63  
Connecting an external decoder box (1). . . . . . . . . . 64  
Connecting an external decoder box (2). . . . . . . . . . 65  
Connecting using HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
Connecting a DV camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Connecting a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
Plugging in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
playback-only discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107  
Scanning discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108  
Playing in slow motion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109  
Frame advance/frame reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109  
The Play Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109  
Displaying and switching subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
Switching DVD and DivX soundtracks . . . . . . . . . . 111  
Switching audio channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
Switching camera angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112  
Displaying disc information on-screen. . . . . . . . . . 112  
03 Getting started  
Switching on and setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
08 Playing and recording from a DV camcorder  
For users receiving digital broadcast services . . . . . 70  
Playing from a DV camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
Recording from a DV camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
About DV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116  
®
Setting up the GUIDE Plus+ system . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
04 Using the GUIDE Plus+ electronic programme  
guide  
09 Editing  
The GUIDE Plus+ system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
Using the GUIDE Plus+ system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76  
GUIDE Plus+ FAQ and troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . 83  
Editing options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117  
The Disc Navigator screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118  
10 Copying and backup  
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127  
One Touch Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127  
Using Copy Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128  
Using disc backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132  
05 Using the digital electronic programme guide  
The Digital EPG system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
Using the Digital EPG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86  
Setting timer programmes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86  
Other useful EPG functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
11 Using the Jukebox  
Copying music to the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134  
Copying files via USB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135  
Playing music from the Jukebox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137  
Changing the display style of the Jukebox . . . . . . . 139  
Copying albums/tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139  
Editing the HDD Jukebox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139  
06 Recording  
About DVD recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
About HDD recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
Recorded audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
Restrictions on video recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
Using the built-in A.TV and D.TV tuners . . . . . . . . . . 93  
Setting the picture quality/recording time . . . . . . . . 95  
Basic recording from the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95  
Pause Live TV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96  
About timer recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98  
Timer recording FAQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99  
Simultaneous recording and playback  
(Chase Play). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
Recording from an external component. . . . . . . . . 100  
Playing your recordings on other DVD players. . . . 101  
Initializing recordable DVD discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102  
DVD-RW Auto Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102  
12 The PhotoViewer  
Locating JPEG picture files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140  
Changing the display style of the PhotoViewer. . . . 141  
Playing a slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141  
Reloading files from a disc or USB device . . . . . . . 142  
Importing files to the HDD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142  
Selecting multiple files or folders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143  
Copying files to a DVD-R/-RW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143  
Copying selected files to a DVD-R/-RW . . . . . . . . . 144  
Editing files on the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144  
Printing files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146  
55  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section Two  
13 The Disc Setup menu  
Basic settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147  
Initialize settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147  
Finalize settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148  
Optimize HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148  
Initialize HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148  
14 The Video Adjust menu  
Setting the picture quality for TV and  
external input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149  
Setting the picture quality for disc playback . . . . . . 150  
15 The Initial Setup menu  
Using the Initial Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152  
Selecting other languages for language options. . . 162  
Using Software Update (Digital tuner) . . . . . . . . . . 162  
16 Additional information  
Minimum copying times. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163  
Manual recording modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164  
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165  
If the picture freezes and the front panel and  
remote control buttons stop working . . . . . . . . . . . 169  
On-screen displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170  
Front panel displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172  
Language code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172  
Country/Area code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173  
Screen sizes and disc formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173  
Handling discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174  
Cleaning the pickup lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174  
Cleaning the recorder’s exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174  
Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174  
Hints on installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175  
Moving the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175  
Resetting the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175  
Specifications (SDVR-LX70D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176  
56  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
01  
CBhaepfteor 1re you start  
Symbols used in this manual  
Disc/content format playback  
compatibility  
The following icons are provided to help you quickly  
identify which instructions you need for which kind of  
disc.  
Compatible media  
• DVD-RW ver. 1.1 / 1x / 1x to 2x, ver. 1.2 / 2x to 4x / 2x  
to 6x  
HDD  
HDD  
• DVD-R ver. 2.0 /1x / 1x to 4x / 1x to 8x / 1x to 16x,  
ver. 2.1 / 1x to 8x / 1x to 16x  
DVD  
Any type of DVD disc (recordable or  
playback only), finalized or not.  
• DVD+RW 1x to 2.4x / 1x to 4x / 3.3x to 8x  
• DVD+R 1x to 2.4x / 1x to 4x / 1x to 8x / 1x to 16x  
DVD-Video  
Commercially produced DVD, finalized  
Video mode DVD-R/-RW.  
• DVD-RAM ver. 2.0 / 2x, ver. 2.1 / 2x / 2x to 3x / 2x to 5x,  
ver. 2.2 / 2x / 2x to 3x / 2x to 5x  
• DVD-R DL ver. 3.0 / 2x to 4x / 2x to 8x  
• DVD+R DL 2.4x / 2.4x to 8x  
DVD (Video)  
Video mode DVD-R/-RW (unfinalized)  
DVD (VR)  
Note that older models of DVD recorders and DVD writers  
may reject DVD-RW ver. 1.2 discs and/or corrupt the data  
on the disc. If you want to share DVD-RW discs between  
this recorder and an older recorder/writer, we  
recommend using ver. 1.1 discs.  
VR mode DVD-R/-RW  
DVD+R  
DVD+R  
DVD+RW  
DVD+RW  
The following table shows older Pioneer DVD recorders’  
limited compatibility with DVD-RW ver. 1.2 discs.  
DVD-RAM  
DVD-RAM  
Model  
Playable  
Yes*1,2,3  
Yes*1  
Recordable  
CD  
DVR-7000  
No  
Audio CD  
DVR-3100/DVR-5100H  
No  
Video CD  
Video CD  
*1 Discs should be finalized in this recorder before playing. Unfinalized  
VR mode and Video mode discs may not play.  
*2 Cannot read the CPRM information will show in the display when  
Super VCD  
Super VCD  
you load a disc. However, this will not affect playback.  
*3 Copy-once protected disc titles will not play.  
WMA/MP3  
WMA or MP3 files  
DivX  
DivX files  
Readable file system  
This recorder can play DVDs recorded under the  
following file systems : ISO 9660*, UDF 1.02, UDF 1.50,  
ALL  
All of the above  
1
UDF 2.00, UDF 2.01.  
* ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant. Romeo and Joliet file  
systems are both compatible with this recorder.  
Note  
1 • Depending on the recording technique used, even files recorded in compatible file systems may not play correctly.  
• MP3/WMA/DivX files can be played back when recorded onto a DVD that contains no video titles and uses the UDF 1.02, UDF 1.50, UDF 2.01  
or ISO 9660 file systems.  
57  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
01  
HDD/DVD Recording and playback compatibility  
This recorder can play and record all widely-used DVD disc types, and additionally provides HDD functionality. The  
table below shows some specific compatibility differences between the different disc types.  
DVD  
+RW  
DVD  
-RAM  
HDD  
DVD-R  
DVD-RW  
DVD+R  
Marks used in this manual  
Logos  
HDD  
DVD (VR)  
DVD (Video)  
DVD (VR)  
DVD (Video)  
DVD+R  
DVD+RW  
DVD-RAM  
*1  
*1  
*2  
*13, 16  
ì
ì
ì
*3  
*3  
ì
ì
ì
*3  
ì
*14  
ì
ì
Re-recordable/Erasable  
ì
ì
*4  
ì
*4  
ì
*4  
ì
*4  
Editing of recorded programmes  
ì
*12  
ì
*12  
ì
*12  
Recording of Copy-once protected  
material  
n/a  
*5  
ì
*6  
*7  
ì
*6  
ì
*6, 15  
ì
*8  
ì
*9  
Playback in other players/recorders  
ì
ì
Chase play  
ì
ì
ì
16:9 and 4:3 programme recording  
ì
*10, 11  
ì
*11  
ì
*11  
ì
*11  
Bilingual broadcast recording of  
both audio channels  
Notes to table  
*1 Must be initialized for VR mode recording (page 147).  
*2 Must be initialized for Video mode recording (page 147).  
*3 Erasable, but free space does not increase.  
*4 Cannot erase sections, edit chapters or use playlist editing.  
*5 Must be compatible with DVD-R (VR) playback.  
*6 Finalize using this recorder (may not playback in some units)  
(page 101).  
*7 Must be compatible with DVD-RW (VR) playback.  
*8 Must be compatible with DVD+RW playback.  
*9 Must be compatible with DVD-RAM playback.  
*10 Only when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off  
(page 158).  
*11 Only when the recording mode is not set to LPCM.  
*12 CPRM-compatible discs only.  
*13 Take the disc out of the cartridge before use. Only Panasonic and  
Maxell discs have been tested to work reliably with this recorder. Discs  
from other makers may become unusable when recorded or edited.  
*14 Erasing a title does not increase the available recording time, nor  
increase the number of recordable titles left.  
Using DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs  
DVD-R DL (Dual-Layer) and DVD+R DL (Double-Layer)  
discs contain two recordable layers on a single side,  
giving about 1.8 times the recording capacity of a  
conventional single-layer disc. This recorder can record  
to both DVD-R DL and DVD+R DL discs.  
• If you intend to play DVD-R DL (Video mode) or  
DVD+R DL discs recorded on this recorder on other  
DVD recorders/players, you must finalize them. (Note  
that some DVD recorders/players may not play even  
finalized DL discs.)  
• This logo indicates that the disc is a DVD-R DL or  
DVD+R DL disc:  
*15 Must be compatible with DVD+R playback.  
*16 Depending on the disc, it may have to be initialized before it can be  
recorded (page 147). In this case, initialization will take about an hour.  
is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing  
Corporation.  
58  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
01  
Correct operation has been confirmed for DL discs:  
CD-R/-RW compatibility  
This recorder cannot record CD-R or CD-RW discs.  
• DVD-R DL ver. 3.0/2x to 4x  
Mitsubishi Kagaku Media (Verbatim)  
• Readable formats: CD audio, Video CD/Super VCD,  
ISO 9660 CD-ROM* containing MP3, WMA, JPEG or  
DivX files  
• DVD-R DL ver. 3.0/2x to 8x  
Mitsubishi Kagaku Media (Verbatim)  
* ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant. CD physical format:  
Mode1, Mode2 XA Form1. Romeo and Joliet file  
systems are both compatible with this recorder.  
That’s  
JVC  
• DVD+R DL 2.4x  
Mitsubishi Kagaku Media (Verbatim)  
RICOH  
• Multi-session playback: Yes (except CD audio and  
Video CD/Super VCD)  
• Unfinalized disc playback: CD audio only  
• DVD+R DL 2.4x to 8x  
Mitsubishi Kagaku Media (Verbatim)  
RICOH  
Compressed audio compatibility  
• Compatible media: DVD-ROM, DVD-R/-RW, DVD+R/  
+RW, DVD-RAM, CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, USB  
About DualDisc playback  
A DualDisc is a new two -sided disc, one side of which  
contains DVD content –video, audio, etc. –while the other  
side contains non-DVD content such as digital audio  
material.  
• Compatible formats: MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3),  
Windows Media Audio (WMA)  
• Sampling rates: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz  
• Bit-rates: Any (128 kbps or higher recommended)  
• Variable bit-rate (VBR) MP3 playback: Yes  
• VBR WMA playback: No  
The non-DVD, audio side of the disc is not compliant with  
the CD audio specification and therefore may not play.  
It is possible that when loading or ejecting a DualDisc,  
the opposite side to that being played will be scratched.  
Scratched discs may not be playable.  
• WMA encoder compatibility: Windows Media Codec  
8 (files encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be  
playable but some parts of the specification are not  
supported; specifically, Pro, Lossless, Voice and VBR)  
The DVD side of a DualDisc plays in this product. DVD  
-Audio content will not play.  
1
For more detailed information on the DualDisc  
specification, please refer to the disc manufacturer or  
disc retailer.  
• DRM (Digital Rights Management) file playback: No  
• File extensions: .mp3, .wma (these must be used for  
the recorder to recognize MP3 and WMA files – do  
not use for other file types)  
Other disc compatibility  
• File structure: The recorder can load up to 99 folders/  
999 files at one time (if there are more files/folders that  
this on the disc then more can be reloaded)  
In addition to DVD, this recorder is compatible with a  
wide range of disc types (media) and formats. Playable  
discs will generally feature one of the logos on the disc  
and/or disc packaging shown below. Note however that  
some disc types, such as recordable CD (and DVD), may  
be in an unplayable format — see below for further  
compatibility information.  
WMA (Windows Media™ Audio) content  
This recorder can playback Windows Media Audio  
content.  
WMA is an acronym for Windows Media Audio and refers  
to an audio compression technology developed by  
Microsoft Corporation.  
Audio CD  
CD-R  
CD-RW  
Windows Media is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.  
This product includes technology owned by Microsoft  
Corporation and cannot be used or distributed without a  
license from Microsoft Licensing, Inc.  
Super Video CD (Super VCD)  
Video CD  
Note  
1 DRM (digital rights management) copy protection is a technology designed to prevent unauthorized copying by restricting playback, etc. of  
compressed audio files on devices other than the PC (or other recording equipment) used to record it. For detailed information, please see the  
instruction manuals or help files that came with your PC and/or software.  
59  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
01  
• If you load a disc that contains DivX VOD content not  
authorized for this recorder, the message  
Authorization Error is displayed and the content  
will not play.  
DivX video compatibility  
• Resetting the recorder (as described in Resetting the  
recorder on page 175) will not cause you to lose your  
registration code.  
DivX is a compressed digital video format created by the  
DivX video codec from DivX, Inc. Keeping the same  
®
terminology as DVD-Video, individual DivX video files are  
called “Titles”. When naming files/titles on a disc prior to  
burning, keep in mind that by default they will be played  
in alphabetical order.  
JPEG file compatibility  
• Compatible formats: Baseline JPEG and EXIF 2.2*  
still image files  
*File format used by digital still cameras  
®
• Sampling ratio: 4:4:4, 4:2:2, 4:2:0  
• Horizontal resolution: 160 to 5120 pixels  
• Vertical resolution: 120 to 3840 pixels  
• Progressive JPEG compatible: No  
• Official DivX Certified product.  
®
®
• Plays all versions of DivX video (including DivX 6)  
with standard playback of DivX media files.  
®
• File extensions: .avi and .divx (these must be used for  
the recorder to recognize DivX video files). Note that  
all files with the .avi extension are recognized as  
MPEG4, but not all of these are necessarily DivX video  
files and therefore may not be playable on this recorder.  
• File extensions: .jpg, .jpeg, .jpe, .jif, .jfif (must be used  
for the recorder to recognize JPEG files – do not use  
for other file types)  
• File structure: The recorder can load up to 99 folders/  
999 files at one time (if there are more files/folders that  
this on the disc then more can be reloaded)  
• File structure: Up to 99 folders or 999 files.  
DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of  
DivX, Inc. and are used under license.  
PC-created disc compatibility  
Discs recorded using a personal computer may not be  
playable in this recorder due to the setting of the  
application software used to create the disc. In these  
particular instances, check with the software publisher  
for more detailed information.  
®
DivX VOD content  
DivX  
In order to play DivX VOD (video on demand) content on  
this recorder, you first need to register the recorder with  
your DivX VOD content provider. You do this by  
generating a DivX VOD registration code, which you  
submit to your provider.  
Discs recorded in packet write mode (UDF format) are  
not compatible with this recorder.  
Check the DVD-R/-RW or CD-R/-RW software disc boxes  
for additional compatibility information.  
Some DivX VOD content may only be playable a fixed  
number of times. When you load a disc containing this  
type of DivX VOD content, the remaining number of plays  
is shown on-screen and you then have the option of  
playing the disc (thereby using up one of the remaining  
plays), or stopping. If you load a disc that contains  
expired DivX VOD content (for example, content that has  
zero remaining plays), the message Rental Expired is  
displayed.  
Dolby Digital  
If your DivX VOD content allows an unlimited number of  
plays, then you may load the disc into your recorder and  
play the content as often as you like, and no message will  
be displayed.  
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.  
“Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby  
Laboratories.  
Important  
• DivX VOD content is protected by a DRM system. This  
restricts playback of content to specific, registered  
devices.  
60  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
01  
• Do not block the rear vent/cooling fan.  
DTS  
• Do not use the recorder in excessively hot or humid  
places, or in places that may be subject to sudden  
changes in temperature. Sudden changes in  
temperature can cause condensation to form inside  
the recorder. This can be a cause of HDD failure.  
• While the recorder is switched on (including during  
EPG download when the display shows EPG), do not  
unplug from the wall socket or switch the electricity  
off from the breaker switch.  
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are registered trademarks of  
DTS, Inc.  
• Do not move the recorder immediately after  
switching it off. If you need to move the recorder,  
please follow the steps below:  
DVB  
The Digital Video Broadcasting Project, or DVB for short,  
is a set of open standards for digital broadcasting,  
covering terrestrial, cable and satellite broadcasts.  
1 After the message POWER OFF is shown on the  
front panel display, wait at least two minutes.  
2 Unplug from the wall socket.  
Based around the MPEG-2 coding system, these open  
standards ensure that compliant systems are able to  
work together, independent of manufacturer.  
3 Move the recorder.  
• If there’s a power failure while the recorder is on  
there is a chance that some data on the HDD will be  
lost.  
DVB is extremely flexible, being able to deliver virtually  
any kind of digital content to the home, including High  
Definition and Standard Definition TV, broadband  
multimedia content and interactive services.  
• The HDD is very delicate. If used over time in an  
improper manner or in an unsuitable environment, it  
is possible that the HDD will fail. Signs of problems  
include playback unexpectedly freezing and  
noticeable block noise (mosaic) in the picture.  
However, sometimes there will be no warning signs  
of HDD failure. If the HDD fails, no playback of  
recorded material will be possible. In this case it will  
be necessary to replace the HDD unit.  
DVB is a registered trademark of the DVB Project.  
Optimizing HDD performance  
About the internal hard disk drive  
As you record and edit material on the HDD, the data on  
the disk becomes fragmented, eventually affecting the  
recorder’s performance. Before this happens, the  
recorder will warn you that it is time to optimize the HDD  
(which you can do from the Disc Setup menu; see  
Optimize HDD on page 148).  
The internal hard disk drive (HDD) is a fragile piece of  
equipment. When used without the proper care or in the  
wrong conditions, it is possible that recorded contents  
may be damaged or lost entirely, in some cases making  
even normal playback or recording impossible. Please  
understand that in the event of repair or replacement of  
the HDD or related components, all your HDD recordings  
will be lost.  
Please use the recorder following the guidelines below to  
protect against possible HDD failure.  
The HDD should not be regarded as a place to store  
recordings permanently. We recommend that you back up  
your important recordings onto DVD discs in order to  
protect against accidental loss.  
Pioneer cannot under any circumstances accept  
responsibility for any direct or indirect loss arising from any  
inconvenience or loss of recorded material resulting from  
HDD failure.  
• Do not move the recorder while it is on (this includes  
during EPG download when the display shows EPG).  
• Install and use the recorder on a stable, level surface.  
61  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recorder connections  
02  
CRhaepcteor 2rder connections  
Antenna  
wall outlet  
Connecting a TV antenna  
ANTENNA  
IN (RF IN)  
This recorder has separate built-in TV tuners for  
terrestrial digital and terrestrial analog TV broadcasts.  
ANTENNA  
IN  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO OUT  
If you are ready to receive digital broadcasts now, use one  
of the supplied RF antenna cables connect an antenna  
(either an antenna wall outlet or indoor antenna) to the  
ANTENNA (DIGITAL) IN connector. Next, connect the  
other supplied RF antenna cable to connect an antenna  
to the ANTENNA IN (RF IN) connector. Lastly, connect  
the recorder to your TV from the ANTENNA OUT  
connector.  
AC IN  
AV (INPUT 1/DECODER)  
2
COAXIAL  
HDMI OUT  
ANTENNA(DIGITAL)  
IN  
G-LINK CONTROL  
IN  
OUT  
5
OUT  
V
30 mA  
AV  
1
(RGB) – TV  
ANTENNA  
OUT  
To antenna input  
Antenna wall outlet  
or indoor antenna  
TV  
Antenna wall outlet  
We strongly recommend using an outdoor antenna for  
better broadcast picture quality.  
If, however, you want to use an indoor antenna, use one  
with a signal amplifier rated at 5 V, 30 mA and set Aerial  
Power to On in the Initial Setup menu (see page 153).  
ANTENNA  
IN (RF IN)  
ANTENNA  
(DIGITAL) IN  
ANTENNA  
IN  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO OUT  
AC IN  
AV (INPUT 1/DECODER)  
2
COAXIAL  
HDMI OUT  
ANTENNA(DIGITAL)  
IN  
G-LINK CONTROL  
IN  
OUT  
5
OUT  
V
30 mA  
AV  
1
(RGB) – TV  
ANTENNA  
OUT  
Easy connections  
• While we recommend using an HDMI connection  
(see page 13), you can also connect easily by using a  
SCART cable.  
The setup described below is a basic setup that allows  
you to watch and record TV programmes, and play discs.  
Other types of connections are explained starting on the  
following page.  
To antenna input  
TV  
Important  
Important  
• The AV1 (RGB)-TV AV connector can output ordinary  
(composite), S-Video or RGB video, plus stereo  
analog audio. The AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)  
connector accepts ordinary, S-Video and RGB video  
input, as well as stereo analog audio. See AV1 Out  
and AV2/L1 In on page 155 for how to setup these  
options.  
• If there is only one antenna outlet on your wall, use a  
divider.  
• Do not connect a component that can receive analog  
signals to the ANTENNA (DIGITAL) OUT.  
If your area is not yet served with terrestrial digital services,  
connect your antenna’s output to the ANTENNA IN (RF  
IN) connector using one of the supplied RF antenna  
cables. Next, connect the recorder to your TV from the  
ANTENNA OUT connector.  
• Before making or changing any rear panel  
connections, make sure that all components are  
switched off and unplugged from the wall outlet.  
62  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recorder connections  
02  
1
Connecting to a cable box or satellite  
receiver  
Antenna/cable TV  
wall outlet  
To antenna input  
If you have a cable box or satellite receiver with a built-in  
decoder, connect it to this recorder and your TV as shown  
on this page. If you are using a separate decoder box for  
your cable/satellite TV, set up following the instructions  
on the next page.  
From antenna output  
VCR  
From SCART AV  
connector  
To recorder's  
antenna input  
3
Using the setup on this page you can:  
AV2 (INPUT 1/  
DECODER)  
• Record any channel by selecting it on the cable box,  
satellite receiver or digital terrestrial receiver.  
ANTENNA  
IN  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO OUT  
AC IN  
AV (INPUT 1/DECODER)  
2
COAXIAL  
HDMI OUT  
ANTENNA(DIGITAL)  
IN  
G-LINK CONTROL  
IN  
OUT  
5
• Change channels and set timer recordings on the  
OUT  
V
30 mA  
AV  
1
(RGB) – TV  
®
external receiver using the GUIDE Plus+ system  
AV1 (RGB) - TV  
(via the G-LINK™ cable, and after setting up).  
2
Important  
• Do not connect this recorder to your TV ‘through’  
your VCR, satellite receiver or other component.  
Always connect each component directly to your TV  
or AV amplifier/receiver.  
To SCART AV  
connector  
• When using the GUIDE Plus+ system to make a  
timer recording from an external receiver, make sure  
that the external receiver is switched on.  
TV  
1
Connect your TV antenna to the recorder and TV.  
See Connecting a TV antenna on page 62 for details.  
1
• If you want to incorporate a VCR in your setup, connect  
it before the recorder (i.e., between the antenna wall  
outlet and the antenna input on the recorder).  
Satellite dish/  
antenna/cable TV  
wall outlet  
To antenna input  
From antenna output  
2
Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the  
Cable/Satellite  
receiver  
From SCART AV  
connector  
AV1 (RGB)-TV AV connector on this recorder to the  
SCART AV connector on your TV.  
To recorder's  
antenna input  
3
3
Use another SCART cable to connect the AV2  
AV2 (INPUT 1/  
DECODER)  
(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector to a SCART AV  
connector on your VCR.  
4
ANTENNA  
IN  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO OUT  
AC IN  
AV (INPUT 1/DECODER)  
2
COAXIAL  
HDMI OUT  
ANTENNA(DIGITAL)  
IN  
G-LINK CONTROL  
IN  
OUT  
5
OUT  
V
30 mA  
Tip  
AV  
1
(RGB) – TV  
• This recorder has a ‘through’ function which allows  
you to record a TV programme from the built-in TV  
tuner in this recorder while watching a video playing  
on your VCR (To use this feature when the recorder is  
in standby, Power Save must be set to Off — see  
Power Save on page 152).  
AV1 (RGB) - TV  
2
To SCART AV  
connector  
TV  
1
Connect RF antenna cables as shown.  
See Connecting a TV antenna on page 62 for more on RF  
antenna connections, including from this recorder to  
your TV.  
63  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recorder connections  
02  
2
Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the  
• For timer recording to work properly on this recorder,  
the VCR/satellite receiver/cable box must also be  
switched on during recording.  
AV1 (RGB)-TV AV connector to a SCART AV connector  
on your TV.  
This enables you to watch discs.  
• It is not possible to watch one TV programme and  
record another using this setup.  
3
Use another SCART cable to connect the AV2  
(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector to a SCART AV  
connector on your cable box/satellite receiver.  
This enables you to record scrambled TV channels.  
SCART AV  
connection  
1
Antenna/cable TV  
wall outlet  
2
4
Plug the supplied G-LINK™ cable to the G-LINK™  
To antenna input  
jack.  
This enables you to control the tuner in the external  
®
receiver using the GUIDE Plus+ system.  
Decoder  
VCR/Satellite receiver  
/Cable box  
Position the IR transmitter end of the G-LINK™ cable so  
that the IR receiver on your cable/satellite receiver will  
pick up the control signals (see diagram).  
From SCART AV  
connector  
3
AV2 (INPUT 1/  
DECODER)  
ANTENNA  
IN  
ANTENNA  
IN  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO OUT  
AC IN  
AV (INPUT 1/DECODER)  
2
COAXIAL  
AV  
2
(INPUT 1/DECODER)  
HDMI OUT  
ANTENNA(DIGITAL)  
IN  
G-LINK CONTROL  
IN  
G-LINK CONTROL  
IN  
OUT  
5
OUT  
OUT  
V
30 mA  
AV  
1
(RGB) – TV  
AV  
1
(RGB) – TV  
AV1 (RGB) - TV  
G-LINK cable  
4
See the manual that came with your cable/satellite  
receiver if you’re not sure where the IR receiver is on the  
front panel. Alternatively, experiment with the remote  
control, operating it from very close range until you find  
the place where the receiver responds.  
To SCART AV  
connector  
TV  
Tip  
1
Connect the cable from the antenna/cable TV  
• This recorder has a ‘through’ function which allows  
you to record a TV programme from the built-in TV  
tuner in this recorder while watching a video playing  
on your VCR (To use this feature when the recorder is  
in standby, Power Save must be set to Off — see  
Power Save on page 152).  
outlet to the antenna input on your VCR/satellite  
receiver/cable box.  
2
Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect your  
decoder to your VCR/satellite receiver/cable box.  
See the manual for your decoder box for more detailed  
instructions.  
3
Use a SCART cable to connect your VCR/satellite  
receiver/cable box to the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)  
AV connector on this recorder.  
Connecting an external decoder box (1)  
If you have an external, dedicated decoder box for your  
satellite or cable TV system, use the setup described on  
this page. See above for how to connect the G-LINK™  
cable.  
4
Use a SCART cable to connect the AV1 (RGB)-TV  
AV connector to your TV.  
Important  
• Do not connect your decoder box directly to this  
recorder.  
• Information from the decoder (for example, relating  
to pay TV services), is only viewable when this  
recorder is off (in standby).  
64  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recorder connections  
02  
Connecting an external decoder box (2) Connecting using HDMI  
If you only have a decoder, connect it to this recorder and  
your TV as shown on this page.  
Connect the receiver subwoofer to this recorder using  
the supplied HDMI cable (see page 13 for details).  
1
The HDMI connector outputs uncompressed digital  
video, as well as almost every kind of digital audio.  
When connected to an HDMI component or HDCP-  
compatible DVI component, the HDMI indicator lights.  
Using the setup on this page you can:  
• Record scrambled channels received using the  
recorder’s built-in analog TV tuner.  
HDMI setup is generally automatic. There are however  
settings you can change if you need to. See HDMI Output  
(only available when an HDMI device is connected) on  
page 159 for more information. Note that the HDMI  
settings remain in effect until you change them, or  
connect a new HDMI component.  
Important  
• Do not connect this recorder ‘through’ your VCR,  
satellite receiver or cable box. Always connect each  
component directly to your TV or other AV  
component.  
Important  
• An HDMI connection can only be made with DVI-  
equipped components compatible with both DVI and  
High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP).  
If you choose to connect to a DVI connector, you will  
need a DVI to HDMI adaptor cable. A DVI to HDCP  
connection, however, does not support audio.  
Decoder  
From SCART AV  
connector  
3
AV2 (INPUT 1/  
DECODER)  
Consult your local audio dealer for more information.  
ANTENNA  
IN  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO OUT  
AC IN  
AV (INPUT 1/DECODER)  
2
COAXIAL  
HDMI OUT  
ANTENNA(DIGITAL)  
IN  
G-LINK CONTROL  
IN  
OUT  
5
• The HDMI connection is compatible with 32 kHz,  
44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 96 kHz, 16 bit/20 bit/24 bit 2-channel  
linear PCM signals, as well as Dolby Digital, DTS and  
MPEG audio bitstream.  
OUT  
V
30 mA  
AV  
1
(RGB) – TV  
AV1 (RGB) - TV  
2
• If your connected component is only compatible with  
Linear PCM, the signal is output as Linear PCM (DTS  
audio is not output).  
• If you have connected to a Pioneer plasma television,  
please select the HDMI setup on the display (refer to  
the supplied manual for more on this).  
To SCART AV  
connector  
TV  
About HDMI  
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) supports  
both video and audio on a single digital connection for  
use with DVD players and recorders, DTV, set-top boxes,  
and other AV devices. HDMI was developed to provide the  
technologies of High-bandwidth Digital Content Protec-  
tion (HDCP) as well as Digital Visual Interface (DVI) in  
one specification. HDCP is used to protect digital content  
transmitted and received by DVI-compliant displays.  
1
Connect your TV antenna to the recorder and TV.  
See Connecting a TV antenna on page 62 for details.  
2
Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the  
AV1 (RGB)-TV AV connector to a SCART AV connector  
on your TV.  
This enables you to watch discs.  
3
Use another SCART cable to connect the AV2  
HDMI has the capability to support standard, enhanced,  
or high-definition video plus standard to multi-channel  
surround-sound audio. HDMI features include  
uncompressed digital video, a bandwidth of up to five  
gigabits per second (Dual Link), one connector (instead  
of several cables and connectors), and communication  
between the AV source and AV devices such as DTVs.  
(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector to a SCART AV  
connector on your decoder box.  
This enables you to record scrambled TV channels.  
Note  
1 In order to use this setup, you will need to make the following settings from the Initial Setup menu:  
• Set the AV2/L1 In setting to Decoder from the Initial Setup menu (see AV2/L1 In on page 155).  
• From the Manual CH Setting screen, set the Decoder setting for the scrambled channels to On (see Manual CH Setting on page 154).  
65  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recorder connections  
02  
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia  
Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI  
Licensing LLC.  
– Child lock settings (page 99).  
– When you connect a SCART cable and an HDMI  
cable to the same plasma television simultaneously.  
• If you want to use an HDMI cable other than the  
supplied HDMI cable, use the one that supports the  
HDMI 1.3 specification. The HDMI Control functions  
may not operate properly if you do not use an HDMI  
cable that supports the HDMI 1.3 specification.  
• Controls may not function properly in certain  
situations, such as immediately after you have  
connect an HDMI cable, turn this unit’s power off or  
remove the power cable for this unit or the connected  
component. If you experience any problems, set  
HDMI Control to On for all connected units, and then  
display the pictures stored on this unit on your  
plasma television to improve the situations.  
HDMI Control  
By connecting the receiver subwoofer to an HDMI  
Control-compatible Pioneer plasma television with an  
HDMI cable, you can control this unit from the remote  
control of a connected plasma television, as well as have  
the connected plasma television automatically change  
inputs in response to this unit starting playback.  
Refer to the operating instructions for your plasma  
television and HDMI Control on page 44 for more  
information about which operations can be carried out by  
connecting via HDMI cable.  
Auto-select function  
• We cannot guarantee this unit will work with HDMI  
control-compatible components other than those  
made by Pioneer.  
You can have a connected plasma television and the  
receiver subwoofer automatically change inputs when  
playback begins on this unit (including when you have a  
GUI (such as Disc Navigator) set to display on this unit).  
Certain connected plasma televisions may have their power  
turned from off to on when using this function.  
Connecting a DV camcorder  
You can connect a DV camcorder or DVD recorder with  
DV output to the front panel DV IN jack.  
Simultaneous power function  
You can have this unit turn on automatically when the  
power for a connected plasma television is turned on. To  
have this unit’s power turned off when a connected  
plasma television is turned off, you must change the  
simultaneous power function of your plasma television.  
Important  
• This jack is for connection to DV equipment only. It is  
not compatible with digital satellite receivers or D-  
VHS video decks.  
Unified language function  
STANDBY/ON  
By receiving language information from a connected  
plasma television, you can have this unit’s language  
settings automatically change to those of the plasma  
television (language information can be received only  
when no media is being played back and no recordings  
are taking place, or when you choose not to display this  
unit’s GUI displays).  
DV IN  
USB  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
PLAY  
STOP  
REC  
STOP REC  
DV IN  
From DV output  
DV camcorder  
Important  
• Use a DV cable (not supplied) to connect the DV  
jack of your DV camcorder to the front panel DV  
IN jack of this recorder.  
• Depending on the type of plasma television, some  
HDMI input terminals do not support the HDMI  
Control function. For details, see the operating  
instructions supplied with your plasma television.  
• To use the following functions, set this unit’s HDMI  
Control to Off (page 159).  
– The timer recording to use VPS/PDC (page 98).  
– When you want this unit to automatically switch off  
upon completion of timer recording. (When HDMI  
Control is set to On, this unit does not automatically  
switch off if your plasma television is switched on  
upon completion of timer recording.)  
– When using the Video Control function of an  
external component.  
66  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recorder connections  
02  
Using a USB hub  
• Use a hub compatible with USB 1.1 and/or 2.0.  
Connecting a USB device  
• Use an independently powered hub (bus powered  
hubs may not work reliably).  
Using the USB ports on the front of the recorder you can  
connect USB devices such as digital cameras, printers,  
keyboards and PCs. Please also see the instructions that  
came with the device you want to connect before using.  
• In the event of unreliable operation with the hub, we  
recommend plugging the device directly into the  
recorder’s USB port.  
STANDBY/ON  
D
V
I
N
USB  
OPEN/  
PLAY  
STOP  
REC  
STOP REC  
CLOSE  
• Operation may become unreliable if too many  
devices are connected to the hub. In this case, try  
unplugging some devices.  
USB  
USB  
(Type A)  
(Type B)  
• If the power delivered through a hub is insufficient for  
the devices connected, communication can become  
unreliable. In this case, disconnect one or more  
devices then perform a USB restart. (See Restart USB  
Device on page 160.)  
USB  
USB  
Digital Camera  
PictBridge-compatible  
Printer  
Using a USB printer  
• Use a PictBridge-compatible printer.  
Keyboard  
PC  
Using a USB keyboard  
• Do not use a PS/2 keyboard connected using a PS/2-  
USB adapter.  
Important  
• Some USB devices may not work with this recorder.  
Using a PC  
• When connecting a PC to this unit, make sure the  
power is turned off on both the PC and this unit when  
you connect them via USB.  
• Note that you can connect a PC to this device via USB  
to copy WMA and MP3 files. For more information,  
see Connect PC on page 135. To use Connect PC with  
this device, your PC must run either the Windows XP  
Home Edition (SP2), Windows XP Professional (SP2)  
or Windows Vista Home Premium operating system  
and be able to run Windows Media Player 11. Even if  
your PC can run Windows Media Player 11, we  
cannot guarantee that it will function properly with  
this device. For more details see the ‘Help’ section of  
Windows Media Player 11.  
• We recommend connecting USB devices when this  
recorder is switched off (in standby).  
JPEG file storage devices  
• Digital still camera  
• Memory card reader (any type of memory card)  
• USB memory  
The Mass Storage Class (MSC) device should be FAT-  
compatible. Note that if the device is partitioned, this  
recorder may not recognize it.  
Plugging in  
The Picture Transfer Protocol (PTP) can be used to  
transfer up to a maximum of 4000 files.  
After checking all the connections, plug in the recorder.  
•
Use the supplied power cable to connect this  
recorder to a power outlet.  
WMA/MP3 file storage devices  
• Memory card reader (any type of memory card)  
• USB memory  
• PC (Use Connect PC function)  
The Mass Storage Class (MSC) device should be FAT-  
compatible. Note that if the device is partitioned, this  
recorder may not recognize it.  
Note that although multi-slot card readers can be used,  
the recorder will only recognize the first card inserted. To  
read another card, remove all the cards and insert the  
card to be read again.  
67  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
03  
Chapter 3  
Getting started  
ENTER  
Important  
4
Start the Setup Navigator.  
• To control the HDD/DVD recorder, change the HDD/  
DVD recorder’s input function and put the remote  
control in HDD/DVR mode. When the remote control  
is in HDD/DVR mode, the HDD/DVR screen is  
shown on the LCD.  
k
t
Complete this setup before you  
start using your recorder.  
e
P
Start  
Cancel  
p
Please use the Initial Setup if you  
want to make more detailed settings.  
• The HDD/DVR settings are listed on three separate  
pages. To cycle between pages, use the PAGE button.  
• If you don’t want to use the Setup Navigator, press ꢁ  
to select Cancel, then press ENTER to exit the Setup  
Navigator.  
Switching on and setting up  
When you switch the recorder on for the first time, you  
can make several basic settings using the Setup  
Navigator feature. This takes you through setting the  
clock, the internal TV tuner and the video output.  
ENTER  
1
5
Select an Aerial Power setting for the  
built-in digital tuner.  
• On: power is always supplied to the connected aerial,  
whether the recorder is on or in standby.  
If you’re using the recorder for the first time, we strongly  
recommend you use the Setup Navigator before starting  
to use the recorder.  
• Auto: power is only supplied when this recorder is on.  
• Off: power is never supplied to the aerial.  
1
Switch on your TV and set the video input to this  
recorder.  
ENTER  
SOURCE  
6
Select ‘Auto Scan’ to start scanning for  
ꢀ
2
Switch on the recorder.  
D.TV channels.  
When you switch on for the first time, your TV should  
display the Setup Navigator screen (If the Setup  
Navigator doesn’t appear, you can also access it from the  
Initial Setup menu; see page 152).  
• Select Do not set if you want to skip D.TV channel  
setup (because they have already been set up, for  
example), then skip to step 8 below.  
• If this recorder is connected to a compatible TV using  
a fully-wired 21-pin SCART cable, the recorder will  
take a few seconds to download country, TV screen  
size and language information. (Check the manual  
that came with your TV for compatibility information.)  
ENTER  
7
Select your country.  
The recorder starts scanning for new channels. After the  
scan is complete the recorder will let you know how many  
new channels were found.  
• The country setting will apply to both the digital and  
analog TV tuners.  
ENTER  
3
Choose a language (then press ENTER).  
• The clock will also be set automatically here if D.TV  
channels are found.  
Initial Setup  
• If no new channels were found a message appears  
asking if you want to scan again. Check the aerial  
connection before selecting Yes. (If you select No,  
skip to step 8 below.)  
Basic  
Clock Language  
Input
Powe
Digital Tuner  
Analogue Tuner  
Video In/ Out  
Audio In  
HELP
EPG  
Setup  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Note  
1 If the recorder does not accept the On or Auto setting (the highlight jumps back to Off), check that the antenna is properly connected and  
that it is not shorted, then try making the setting again.  
68  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
03  
•
Auto clock setting  
ENTER  
Some TV channels broadcast time signals together  
with the programme. This recorder can use these  
signals to set the clock automatically.  
8
Select the analog TV (A.TV) Auto Channel  
Setting (‘Auto Scan’ or ‘Download from TV’), or ‘Do  
not set’.  
Set ‘Clock Set CH‘ to the channel preset number  
that broadcasts a time signal, then move the  
cursor down to ‘Start’ and press ENTER.  
k
AutoChannel Setting  
e
P
AutoScan  
Download from TV  
k
AutoClock Setting  
p
Do not Set  
Date  
––  
––  
/
:
––  
––  
/
––––  
e
Time  
• Select Do not set if you want to skip channel setup  
P
(because they have already been set up, for example).  
p
Clock Set CH  
Pr  
1
Start  
• You can only use the Download from TV feature if  
this recorder is connected to your TV using a fully-  
wired 21-pin SCART cable via the AV1 (RGB)-TV  
connector, and if your TV supports this function  
(check your TV’s instruction manual for more details).  
The recorder takes a short while to set the time. After  
you see that it’s set, select Next to proceed.  
k
AutoClock Setting  
Date  
MON 01  
11  
/
01  
20  
/
2007  
e
Time  
ENTER  
:
P
•
•
Select your country.  
p
Clock Set CH  
Pr  
1
Start  
Next  
k
t
Country Selection  
eCountry  
P
UK  
If the time could not be set automatically, press  
RETURN to go back to the previous screen and select  
Manual.  
Auto-tuning channels  
The Auto Scan option automatically scans and sets the  
channel presets.  
•
Manual clock setting  
If no stations in your area are broadcasting time  
signals, you can set the clock manually.  
Tuning  
32/99  
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to set your time zone.  
You can set this by selecting a city or a time relative  
to GMT.  
Cancel  
•
Downloading channels from your TV  
Use the Download from TV option to download all the  
channels that your TV is tuned to.  
1/2  
k
Manual Clock Setting  
Time Zone  
England  
London  
e
P
Downloading  
Pr 5  
p
Summer Time  
Off  
32/99  
Cancel  
Press ꢁ then use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to select ‘On’  
or ‘Off’ for summer time, then press ENTER.  
Select On if you are currently using summer time.  
ENTER  
9
Select ‘Auto’ for automatic time setting,  
1/2  
k
Manual Clock Setting  
or ‘Manual’ to set the clock manually.  
If the clock was already set from a D.TV channel in step 6,  
this step is skipped.  
Time Zone  
England  
London  
e
P
p
Summer Time  
On  
k
ClockSetting  
e
P
Auto  
Manual  
69  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
03  
Set the date (day/month/year) and time, then  
press ENTER to make all the settings.  
ENTER  
13  
Select ‘Finish Setup’ to exit the Setup  
2/2  
k
Manual Clock Setting  
Navigator, or ‘Go Back’ if you want to start again.  
Date  
er
MON 01  
/
:
01  
00  
/
2007  
k
Setting  
Setupis complete!  
P
Time  
00  
e
p
England  
London  
Finish Setup  
Go Back  
Time Zone  
p
Summer Time  
On  
That completes basic setup using the Setup Navigator.  
• Use the ꢄ/ꢁ buttons to change the value in the  
• If there are blank channels with no station, you can  
set these to skip using the manual channel setting.  
See Manual CH Setting on page 154.  
highlighted field.  
• Use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to move from one field to  
another.  
• You can go back to the previous screen in the Setup  
Navigator by pressing RETURN.  
For users receiving digital broadcast  
services  
ENTER  
This unit can set its internal clock automatically from  
digital broadcasts. However, depending on the  
broadcaster, the clock information received may not be  
accurate.  
10  
Select the EPG (Electronic Programme  
Guide) type to use.  
• GUIDE Plus+: Use the Gemstar GUIDE Plus+ EPG  
(see also Setting up the GUIDE Plus+® system on  
page 71 and Using the GUIDE Plus+ electronic  
programme guide on page 74).  
Use the following procedure (while the recorder is not  
recording) to set the clock manually.  
• Digital EPG: Use the SI EPG (programme information  
broadcast together with digital channels).  
HOME  
MENU  
SETUP  
• If no channels were found when scanning for digital  
TV channels then this screen does not appear and the  
EPG is set according to the country set in step 7  
above.  
1
2
Press HOME MENU.  
ENTER  
Select ‘Initial Setup’ > ‘Basic’ > ‘Clock  
Setting’.  
ENTER  
3
Highlight the time setting.  
11  
Select the TV screen type, ‘Wide (16:9)’ or  
‘Standard (4:3)’.  
ENTER  
4
Press to display the manual clock setting  
k
TVScreen Size  
screen.  
er
P
Wide (16:9)  
5
Set the correct time.  
Standard (4:3)  
p
Navigator  
Return to automatic clock setting  
• To return to the automatic clock setting, follow the  
instructions for ‘Replace Channels’ (page 153).  
ENTER  
12  
caution.  
Press to continue after reading the HDD  
k
Inthe event of HDD failure, recordings may  
be lost or normal playback/recording may  
not be possible.  
er
As recordings might be lost in case of  
a
HDD  
P
failure, we recommend to use the HDD only  
as temporary storage media.  
p
Please copy recordings you want to keep  
to recordable DVD.  
Press ENTER to continue.  
70  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
03  
GUIDE  
1
Display the GUIDE Plus+ setup menu.  
Setting up the GUIDE Plus+® system  
This section is only applicable if you chose to use the  
GUIDE Plus+ system as the EPG type in step 10 of the  
Setup Navigator above.  
®
The GUIDE Plus+ system* is a free, interactive on-  
screen television programming guide. The system offers  
programme listings for all major channels, one-touch  
recording, search by genre, recommendations according  
to your profile and more.  
For the GUIDE Plus+ system to function correctly, it is  
important that you set the language and country  
correctly in the Setup Navigator, and that you have  
performed a scan for available channels, as these are all  
used by the GUIDE Plus+ system. If any of these things  
are not yet set, please run the Setup Navigator first (see  
Switching on and setting up on page 68).  
The language and country settings are already set to  
whatever you selected in the Setup Navigator.  
TV listings information is received via ‘Host Channels’. In  
order to receive the correct TV listings information for  
your country or region you need to set up the GUIDE  
Plus+ system and ‘download’ the TV listings information.  
The initial download can take up to 24 hours, but once  
this is done, all future updates are automatic.  
ENTER  
2
Highlight ‘Postal Code’.  
* GUIDE Plus+, SHOWVIEW, VIDEO Plus+, G-LINK are (1)  
registered trademarks or trademarks of, (2) manufactured  
under license from and (3) subject of various international  
patents and patent applications owned by, or licensed to,  
Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or its related  
affiliates.  
Legal Notice  
GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR ITS  
RELATED AFFILIATES ARE NOT IN ANY WAY LIABLE FOR THE  
ACCURACY OF THE PROGRAM SCHEDULE INFORMATION  
PROVIDED BY THE GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM. IN NO EVENT SHALL  
GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR ITS  
RELATED AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNTS  
REPRESENTING LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, OR  
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN  
CONNECTION WITH THE PROVISION OR USE OF ANY  
INFORMATION, EQUIPMENT, OR SERVICES RELATING TO THE  
GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM.  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
ENTER  
3
(LCD page 2)  
Enter your postal code.  
71  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
03  
The system uses your postal code to identify which TV  
listings data is correct for the area in which you live, so it  
is important that you enter it correctly.  
If your external receiver still doesn’t respond to the G-  
LINK controller, please call customer support and report  
the brand and model of your external receiver.  
See also GUIDE Plus+ FAQ and troubleshooting on  
page 83.  
4
If you are using an external receiver (such as a  
satellite receiver) with the supplied G-LINK cable,  
complete this step, otherwise jump to step 5 below.  
5
Identify the Host Channel for your country.  
The TV listings information available in the GUIDE Plus+  
system is distributed throughout Europe by selected  
broadcasters called Host Channels. It is important that  
the host (analog) channel for your country is correctly  
identified in order to receive listings information (EPG  
download).  
Follow A, B or C below depending on your setup:  
A If you are not using an external receiver, this  
recorder will automatically scan all channels for the  
Host Channel:  
• Leave the recorder in standby overnight (do not leave  
it switched on).  
B If you are using an external receiver, you need to  
identify the Host Channel from the table below:  
• See Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver on  
page 63 for more on using the supplied G-LINK cable.  
Country/  
Region  
Host  
Channels  
Comments  
• Select External Receiver 1, 2 or 3, then press  
ENTER. (If you have just one external receiver, use  
External Receiver 1. You can add further receivers in  
2 and 3 if you need to.)  
Austria  
Belgium  
France  
Eurosport  
RTL-TVI  
Canal+  
Analog only  
Analog only  
Analog only  
After pressing ENTER:  
Germany  
Italy  
Eurosport  
MTV  
• Select your reception method (Terrestrial, Cable or  
Satellite).  
• Select your provider (if applicable).  
Netherlands  
Spain  
Eurosport  
Tele 5  
• Select the brand of your external receiver.  
• Identify which input your external receiver is  
connected to.  
Switzerland  
UK  
Eurosport  
ITV, Eurosport  
After completing these steps the recorder will try and  
communicate with your external receiver and change the  
channel via the G-LINK cable. If the channel was  
successfully changed, select Yes to confirm.  
ITV is analog only. Use Eurosport  
if you are a SKY subscriber and  
you no longer have an analog  
terrestrial antenna.  
If the channel did not change, select No. The GUIDE  
Plus+ system will try other codes assigned to your  
external receiver. If none of the codes changes the  
channel successfully, tune your external receiver to the  
Host Channel for your country (refer to step 5 below) and  
leave it on overnight. The recorder needs to be in standby;  
it will wake up automatically and download new codes  
from the Host Channel. The next day, try this setup  
process again:  
• Tune your external receiver to the appropriate Host  
Channel and leave the receiver on and the recorder in  
standby overnight.  
C If you use both an external receiver and this  
recorder as sources, follow the instructions above for  
setting up without an external receiver. Only if this is  
unsuccessful try the external receiver method.  
• Press GUIDE to display the GUIDE Plus+ screen.  
About EPG download  
• EPG data can only be received when the recorder is  
in standby. (When not using the recorder, therefore,  
please switch it into standby.) If you’re using an  
external receiver, leave this on when EPG data is  
downloading.  
• Press ꢄ to highlight the Menu bar, then use ꢃ to  
reach the Setup area and select Setup.  
• Continue setting up from the start of this step again.  
72  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
03  
• If you cannot receive any of the Host Channels (see  
the above table) then you won’t be able to use the  
GUIDE Plus+ system. In this case do not set the  
postal code (or set Country to Other) in the GUIDE  
Plus+ setup screen. (When GUIDE Plus+ service  
starts in your area, set the postal code again.)  
• For any channel that you turn ON, the GUIDE Plus+  
system will need to know how it is received (the  
source) and on which programme number. The  
source may be the built-in tuner of this recorder, or  
an external receiver. The programme number is the  
number on which the channel can be found on its  
receiving device/source. The entry in the Editor  
screen must match this number for correct recording  
of that channel.  
If digital broadcasts start in your area, please set the  
EPG Type Select setting in the Initial Setup menu to  
Digital EPG.  
• The above is especially important for the ‘Host  
Channel’. Please make sure that the Host Channel is  
always switched ON.  
• Even if you can’t use the EPG functions where you  
live, you can still set VIDEO Plus+ recordings and  
manual recordings — see Setting a manual recording  
on page 81.  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
• The front panel display shows EPG when receiving  
data. If you power on the recorder during an EPG  
download, the download is cancelled.  
2
(LCD page 2) Change the programme  
numbers as you like.  
• EPG data may be received several times a day. All  
updates are automatic.  
Changing the programme numbers allows you to decide  
the order in which the channels change when stepping  
through them sequentially. You can do this to group  
certain channels together, for example.  
• When downloading EPG data, the recorder may  
sound as though it is on. This is normal.  
Checking the downloaded data the  
following day  
GUIDE  
1
Display the GUIDE Plus+ screen.  
Name  
BBC1  
BBC2  
ITV  
CH4  
CH5  
BBC3  
ITV2  
E4  
On/Off Source  
Prog. No.  
001  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
Off  
On  
D. TV  
D. TV  
D. TV  
D. TV  
D. TV  
Ext. Rec. 1  
D. TV  
D. TV  
D. TV  
002  
003  
004  
005  
007  
006  
014  
017  
UKGOL  
3
When you’re done, press the BLUE Action button  
(Home) to get back to the GUIDE Plus+ home screen.  
• You can find detailed information on using the GUIDE  
Plus+ system in the following chapter.  
You should see a grid filled with channel logos and TV  
listings information. Use the ꢄ/ꢁ buttons to review the  
list. If you notice that there are channels missing, or that  
there are channels in the list that you don’t get, go to the  
Editor screen:  
• Press ꢄ repeatedly until the Menu bar is highlighted.  
• Press ꢃuntil Editor is highlighted. The main area of  
the screen now shows a list of channels. Those that  
are turned ON are displayed in the grid; those that  
are OFF are hidden. Use the ꢄ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to  
move down the list and turn channels ON or OFF as  
necessary.  
73  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the GUIDE Plus+ electronic programme guide  
04  
Chapter 4  
Using the GUIDE Plus+ electronic  
programme guide  
This chapter is only applicable if the EPG Type Select  
setting made in the Setup Navigator (or the Initial Setup  
menu) is set to GUIDE Plus+.  
Using the GUIDE Plus+ system  
All the various features and areas are colour-coded for  
ease of navigation. All screens (with the exception of  
some setup screens) have the following common  
elements:  
The GUIDE Plus+ system  
The GUIDE Plus+ system is a free, interactive on-screen  
1
television programming guide. The system provides  
programme listings for all major channels, one-touch  
recording, searching by genre, recommendations  
according to your profile and more. The GUIDE Plus+  
system is a convenient way to find out what’s on right  
now or during the coming week, by channel or by genre.  
The GUIDE Plus+ system also allows you to  
3
4
1
2
5
automatically set your viewing and recording selections  
quickly and easily.  
6
In order to receive the correct TV listings information for  
your country or region you need to set up the GUIDE  
Plus+ system and ‘download’ the TV listings information.  
If you haven’t already done this, please turn to Setting up  
the GUIDE Plus+® system on page 71 before  
proceeding.  
1 Video window – Allows you to continue watching  
the current programme while using the GUIDE  
Plus+ system.  
2 Information panels – Display programme  
promotions or instructions on the GUIDE Plus+  
system.  
3 Action bar – Colour-coded Action buttons change  
function depending on the area.  
4 Information box – Shows short programme  
descriptions or help menus.  
5 Menu bar – Gives access to the various areas of the  
GUIDE Plus+ system.  
6 Grid – Shows TV listings information for the next  
seven days by channel and time.  
Note  
1 The GUIDE Plus+ system can’t be used when the Input Line System is set to 525 System (see also Input Line System on page 152).  
74  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the GUIDE Plus+ electronic programme guide  
04  
If you need to, you can edit the settings at any time before  
the recording is due to start (see Editing a scheduled  
recording on page 79).  
GUIDE Plus+ navigation  
The table below shows a summary of the remote buttons  
you’ll use to navigate the GUIDE Plus+ system.  
Key  
What it does  
1
Highlight a programme title.  
Press to set or cancel One-Button-  
Recording.  
ì
REC  
(LCD Page 1)  
Press to display the GUIDE Plus+  
screen (also use to exit).  
GUIDE  
Use to navigate screens (highlight an  
item).  
Action buttons that change  
functionality depending on the Area.  
(RED, GREEN,  
YELLOW, BLUE)  
Press to jump directly to the Menu bar.  
MENU  
Press to go directly to the Schedule  
area.  
TIMER  
REC  
2
Press the RED Action button (Record).  
The programme is now set for recording. When the  
programme is due to start, the recorder will switch to the  
correct channel and start recording .  
(LCD Page 1)  
1
Press to display extended information  
for the current programme.  
INFO  
• You can also use the ì REC button (LCD page 1) to  
Press to confirm a selection or to leave  
the GUIDE Plus+ screen.  
set the recording.  
ENTER  
• You can review the shows you have set to record in  
the Schedule Area (see also The Schedule Area on  
page 79).  
Use for numeric entry.  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
Lock/Unlock video window  
(LCD Page 2)  
When you enter the GUIDE Plus+ system, the channel  
you were watching remains visible in the video window.  
The date stamp above the window lets you know the  
channel, date and time.  
Press to select the previous/next page  
of information (in the grid, for  
example).  
ꢁ
ꢂ
(LCD Page 1)  
The default setting for this window is ‘locked’, as  
indicated by a closed padlock icon above the video  
window. When locked, the video window always shows  
the channel you were previously watching as you move  
up and down through the listings grid.  
Press to select the previous/next day.  
ꢃ/  
ꢆ/  
ꢄ ꢅ  
ꢇ ꢈ  
(LCD Page 1)  
If you prefer, you can unlock the video window so that as  
you highlight different channels in the listings grid, that  
channel is shown in the video window.  
One-Button-Record  
The RED Action button (Record) is visible anytime you  
can highlight a programme title, including from the Grid,  
after a search, or in your recommendations in the My TV  
area.  
The programme name, date, channel, recording start  
and end times are all set automatically when you set a  
timer recording using One-Button-Record.  
Note  
1 Recording times set using the GUIDE Plus+ system do not automatically change to reflect any changes that may occur in the programme  
broadcast schedules.  
75  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the GUIDE Plus+ electronic programme guide  
The Grid Area  
04  
The Grid is the main TV listings screen of the GUIDE  
1
Highlight a channel logo.  
Plus+ system and is the first screen that you see when  
you press GUIDE. You can see TV listings for the next  
seven days, starting with the current day.  
When you highlight a programme in the Grid, you can  
see information about it in the Information Box, including  
title, synopsis, channel, source, time and length. If there  
is an i symbol in the Information Box, it means that there  
is an extended synopsis available. Press the INFO button  
to see it.  
In some countries, you can also see a rating for a  
particular programme (mostly movies). These ratings are  
provided by local partners, such as TV magazines.  
Channel logos are displayed to the left of programme  
titles.  
From the Grid Area you can:  
• View and scroll through programme listings  
• Read programme synopses  
2
Press the RED Action button (Unlock).  
The padlock icon above the video window becomes  
unlocked. It remains unlocked for the remainder of your  
current TV viewing session.  
1
• Tune to a programme that’s currently showing  
• Set a programme to record  
• Lock or unlock the video window  
• Access Information panels  
If you want to lock the video window again, follow the  
same procedure. The RED Action button will now act as  
Lock.  
Browsing the Grid  
Use the following remote buttons to browse the grid:  
Channel mosaic screen  
You can switch the display style of channels in the Grid  
Area, Schedule Area or My TV Area from a list to a mosaic  
of channel icons by pressing the YELLOW Action button.  
Select the channel icon you want using the cursor  
buttons, then press ENTER to return to the previous  
screen on that channel.  
ꢄ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor buttons) – Navigate the Grid  
ꢁ/ꢂ (LCD page 1) – Previous/next page  
ꢅ/ꢈ (LCD page 1) – Previous/next day  
BLUE Action button – Return to the current time/date in  
the Grid  
ENTER – Press on the current selection to exit the GUIDE  
Plus+ system and start watching the programme  
Areas  
The GUIDE Plus+ system consists of seven Areas. All  
The Search Area  
From the Search Area you can:  
Areas can be accessed from the Menu bar.  
• Grid – The GUIDE Plus+ system Home Area.  
Displays TV listings information for the next seven  
days by time and channel.  
• Search by category  
• Search by subcategory  
• Search by keyword  
• Search – Search for TV programmes by category  
(e.g., Sport), subcategory (e.g., Football) or keyword.  
• Read programme synopses  
• Tune to a programme that’s currently showing  
• Set a programme to record  
• Access Information panels  
• My TV – Set up a profile and receive  
recommendations according to your preferences.  
• Schedule – Show all scheduled recordings.  
• Info – Area for additional information, such as  
weather (not available in all regions).  
• Editor – Change channel settings.  
• Setup – Setup the GUIDE Plus+ system.  
Note  
1 If you’re using an external tuner (satellite tuner, for example), there will be a short delay of a couple of seconds while it tunes to the channel.  
This is normal.  
76  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the GUIDE Plus+ electronic programme guide  
04  
Searching  
Using My Choice keywords for a search  
You can search for programmes by category,  
subcategory or by keyword (My Choice). Categories for  
searching include Movies (purple), Sport (green),  
Children (blue) and Others (teal). In some countries there  
is a further subcategory available called ‘Tip of the Day’.  
These are programmes recommended by a local partner,  
such as a TV magazine.  
In addition to the standard categories, you can also set  
your own keywords.  
1
Access My Choice.  
1
2
Select ‘Search’ from the Menu bar.  
Select a category and a subcategory.  
2
3
Press the YELLOW Action button to add a keyword.  
ENTER  
Enter a keyword to appear in the menu.  
• If you choose All as the subcategory, all programmes  
in the category you selected will show up in the  
search results.  
ENTER  
3
Start the search.  
The search results are shown sorted by time and date.  
• If no search results are displayed, it means there are  
no programmes for the current day that match your  
search criteria.  
When you’re finished, press the GREEN Action button to  
exit and continue.  
ENTER  
4
Start the keyword search.  
• You can delete or edit keywords using the RED and  
GREEN Action buttons.  
• When you have set more than two keywords, an All  
subcategory automatically appears which allows you  
to search for all your keywords.  
77  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the GUIDE Plus+ electronic programme guide  
04  
Select a channel from the mosaic of channel icons and  
press ENTER. Repeat this step to add up to 16 channels.  
My TV Area  
The My TV Area allows you to set up a personal profile. You  
can define a profile by channels, themes and/or keywords.  
As soon as a personal profile has been set, the GUIDE  
Plus+ system continuously scans the TV listings for the  
next seven days. Whenever you access the My TV Area, a  
list of programmes matching your profile appears.  
4
To add a category to your profile, highlight  
‘Categories’ and press the YELLOW Action button.  
From the My TV Area you can:  
• Set up a profile by channel, theme and/or keyword  
• Edit and delete profiles  
• Read programme synopses  
• Tune to a programme that’s currently showing  
• Set a programme to record  
• Access Information panels  
Setting up a profile  
You can set up a profile with any combination of up to 16  
channels, four categories and 16 keywords.  
Select a category from the Search Area categories and  
press ENTER. Repeat this step to add up to four categories.  
1
2
Select ‘My TV’ from the Menu bar.  
5
To add a keyword to your profile, highlight  
Press the YELLOW Action button to set a profile.  
‘Keywords’ and press the YELLOW Action button.  
Channels is now highlighted.  
To add a channel to your profile, press the  
Use the ꢄ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ buttons followed by ENTER to select  
characters from the on-screen keyboard. When you’re  
finished, press the GREEN Action button to exit and  
continue.  
3
YELLOW Action button.  
6
Press ENTER to activate your profile.  
• You can add up to 16 keywords by repeating step 5.  
• You can edit or delete your profile using the RED and  
GREEN Action buttons.  
78  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the GUIDE Plus+ electronic programme guide  
04  
Press the GREEN Action button to go to continue, or the  
RED Action button to go back.  
The Schedule Area  
The Schedule Area is where you can set, see, edit and  
delete scheduled (timer) recordings.  
4
Enter a name for the scheduled recording.  
From the Schedule Area you can:  
• Edit or delete a One-Button-Recording  
• Set, edit or delete a VIDEO Plus+ recording  
• Set, edit or delete a manual recording  
Editing a scheduled recording  
You can edit any parameter in a scheduled recording, or  
1
delete it if you no longer require it .  
1
Highlight the left tile of a scheduled recording.  
Use the ꢄ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ buttons followed by ENTER to select  
characters from the on-screen keyboard.  
After entering the whole name, press the GREEN Action  
button to continue.  
5
Highlight the right recording tile.  
6
Press the RED Action button (Quality) to change  
the recording quality.  
• If you only want to edit the recording quality,  
frequency, destination, timing or genre settings, skip  
to step 5 below.  
2
3
Press the GREEN Action button (Edit).  
Use the cursor and number buttons (LCD Page 2) to  
edit the recording date, start time, end time and  
channel.  
2
Select from AUTO , XP, SP, LP, EP, SLP, SEP or a manual  
recording mode (see Manual Recording on page 157 and  
Manual recording modes on page 164).  
Use the ꢄ/ꢁ buttons or the number buttons to edit.  
Note  
1 See About timer recordings on page 98 for more information about scheduled recordings.  
2 This mode maximizes the recording quality to fit on to a single DVD disc. Can also be used when recording to HDD.  
79  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the GUIDE Plus+ electronic programme guide  
04  
7
Press the GREEN Action button (Frequency) to  
9
Press  
ꢃ
to access the extended recording options.  
change the recording frequency.  
• If you want to record to a particular HDD genre, use  
the YELLOW Action button (Genre) to select one.  
Select from the various options for one-time, daily and  
weekly recordings.  
• Use the GREEN Action button (Timing) to add extra  
time to the end of the recording (+0, +10, +20, +30 or  
VPS/PDC (V–P)).  
8
Press YELLOW Action button (Destination) to  
2
select the recording destination.  
• Press ꢂ to display the standard recording options  
again.  
Deleting a scheduled recording  
1 Highlight the left tile of a scheduled recording.  
Select from DVD, HDD or HDDr (Auto Replace  
1
Recording) .  
• Auto Replace Recording is only available as an option  
with regular daily or weekly recordings.  
2
Press the RED Action button (Delete).  
The scheduled event is deleted.  
Note  
1 • For a DVD timer recording, if Optimized Rec (see Optimized Rec on page 157) is set to On (and VPS/PDC is off), the recorder will adjust the  
recording quality to try and fit the recording on the disc. If the recording will not fit onto the disc even on MN1 recording quality (MN4 for  
DVD+R/+RW) then the Recovery Recording feature will automatically make the recording to the HDD instead.  
• If there is very little free space left on the HDD, an Auto Replace Recording may not complete successfully.  
• If the HDD is being used for playback or high-speed copying when an Auto Replace Recording is due to start, the new timer recording will  
not replace the old one. However, the next time the timer recording starts, both of the older two programmes will be erased.  
2 • If you set the timer recording to use VPS/PDC, you must switch the recorder into standby before the timer recording is due to start for it to  
work correctly. For non-VPS/PDC timer recordings there is no need to switch the recorder into standby.  
• Optimized Recording will not work if VPS/PDC is on.  
• Up to eight timer recordings can be set with VPS/PDC.  
• VPS/PDC cannot be set for recordings made from digital broadcasts or an external input, or when the recording mode is set to AUTO.  
80  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the GUIDE Plus+ electronic programme guide  
04  
®
Setting a manual recording  
Setting a VIDEO Plus+ recording  
1
Select ‘Schedule’ from the Menu bar.  
1
Select ‘Schedule’ from the Menu bar.  
2
3
Press the GREEN Action button (Manual).  
2
3
Press the RED Action button (VIDEO Plus+).  
Use the number (LCD Page 2) and ꢄ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ  
Use the number buttons (LCD Page 2) to enter a  
buttons to enter the recording date, then press the  
GREEN Action button (Next).  
PlusCode programming number.  
Please enter the PlusCode programming number and press  
ENTER to confirm.  
• If you live in an area not yet covered by the GUIDE  
Plus+ system you may also have to input a channel  
number. Follow the on-screen display to do this.  
4
In the same way, enter the recording start time,  
followed by the GREEN Action button (Next) to  
confirm.  
4
Press ENTER to confirm.  
5
Enter the recording end time in the same way,  
followed by the GREEN Action button (Next) to  
confirm.  
81  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the GUIDE Plus+ electronic programme guide  
04  
6
Use the number buttons to enter a channel  
1
Select ‘Editor’ from the Menu bar.  
number, then press the GREEN Action button (Next)  
to confirm.  
Name  
BBC1  
BBC2  
ITV  
CH4  
CH5  
BBC3  
ITV2  
E4  
On/Off Source  
Prog. No.  
001  
D.TV 001  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
Off  
On  
D. TV  
D. TV  
D. TV  
D. TV  
D. TV  
Ext. Rec. 1  
D. TV  
D. TV  
D. TV  
002  
003  
004  
005  
007  
006  
014  
017  
UKGOL  
2
Highlight the left channel tile of the channel you  
want to switch on or off.  
Alternatively, you can press the YELLOW Action button  
(Mosaic) and use the ꢄ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to select a  
channel from the mosaic, followed by ENTER.  
3
Press the RED Action button to switch the  
channel on or off.  
Changing the source and programme number  
The Info Area  
1
Select ‘Editor’ from the Menu bar.  
This area is reserved for additional information such as  
news, weather reports, stock quotes, and so on, and  
varies by region. (Note that this feature is not available in  
all countries/regions.)  
The Editor Area  
Prog. No.  
001  
002  
003  
004  
005  
007  
006  
014  
017  
Name  
BBC1  
BBC2  
ITV  
CH4  
CH5  
BBC3  
ITV2  
E4  
On/Off Source  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
Off  
On  
D. TV  
D. TV  
D. TV  
D. TV  
D. TV  
Ext. Rec. 1  
D. TV  
D. TV  
D. TV  
The Editor Area is the central location for you to manage  
your channels. Any changes you make here will affect  
what is displayed in the Grid Area. The Editor Area is  
mainly used when setting up the GUIDE Plus+ system to  
make any manual changes as necessary.  
You can also use the Editor Area if new channels become  
available in your area, or if you change from cable to  
satellite, say, or move house.  
UKGOL  
2
Highlight the right channel tile of the channel  
From the Editor Area you can:  
you want to make a change to.  
• Display/hide channels in the grid (switch the channel  
on/off)  
3
Press the RED Action button to change the  
channel source, or the GREEN Action button to enter  
a programme number.  
• Select a channel source (A.TV, D.TV, Ext. Rec. 1,  
Ext. Rec. 2, etc.)  
Each press of the RED Action button changes the  
channel source (A.TV, D.TV, Ext. Rec. 1, etc.). To set a  
programme number, use the number buttons to enter a  
programme number then press ENTER (When set to  
A.TV or D.TV, make sure that the programme number  
matches the preset number of this recorder for what you  
want to record).  
• Enter a channel programme number  
Switching a channel on/off  
You can choose whether or not to display a channel in the  
Grid Area by switching the channel on or off in the Editor  
Area.  
The Setup Area  
The Setup Area is where you can set up the GUIDE Plus+  
system for your particular region, TV reception  
conditions, and so on.  
82  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the GUIDE Plus+ electronic programme guide  
04  
You can reset the Host Channel settings at any time back  
Making changes to your GUIDE Plus+ setup  
to the default setting of automatic. Please be aware that  
resetting the Host Channel will erase all TV listings data.  
1
Select ‘Setup’ from the Menu bar.  
Press ENTER to access the Basic Setup screen.  
GUIDE Plus+ FAQ and  
troubleshooting  
This FAQ covers only a few questions. For a complete list  
please consult the GUIDE Plus+ website at:  
www.europe.guideplus.com  
Basic Setup  
Host Channel Setup  
GUIDE Plus+ System Information  
FAQ  
• When I tried setting up my external receiver I could not  
get any of the attempts to work, what should I do?  
There could be several reasons why your external  
receiver could not be controlled.  
2
Highlight the part you want to change.  
– The connections could be wrong. Make sure that  
the G-LINK cable is connected to the G-LINK  
connector on the recorder and the IR blaster is in  
front of the external receiver, pointing towards the IR  
receiver of your external receiver. See Connecting to a  
cable box or satellite receiver on page 63.  
– The code that is listed under your brand could be  
wrong. Please try other codes for your brand under  
satellite, cable or terrestrial. Go to the Setup Area and  
choose one of the three options (cable, satellite or  
terrestrial) that you have not already tried. Follow the  
on-screen prompts to make sure that the GUIDE  
Plus+ system can change channels on your external  
receiver. If it does not work, repeat the process,  
choosing different reception and external receiver  
combinations until you have tried all the codes for  
your brand of receiver that are already in the GUIDE  
Plus+ system. If it still does not work, see below on  
how to receive new codes overnight.  
1
You can change the Language, Country, Postal Code  
and the External Receiver settings.  
3
Press ENTER to confirm.  
– The unit has not yet received new codes. The nightly  
data downloads frequently include new codes for  
controlling external receivers. Please tune your  
external receiver to your local Host Channel and leave  
it on overnight. Switch this recorder into standby. The  
next morning, please perform the GUIDE Plus+  
setup again to see if your external receiver can now  
be controlled.  
Manual Host Channel setup  
The GUIDE Plus+ system will automatically identify your  
Host Channel as soon as the recorder is put into standby  
for the first time. See the table on page 72 for a list of all  
the European Host Channels.  
If you know your Host Channel details (source and  
programme number) or if the automatic identification did  
not provide the expected result, you can identify your  
Host Channel manually. Select Host Channel Setup in  
the Setup area and follow the instructions on the TV.  
Select the correct source (e.g., internal tuner or external  
receiver) and enter the respective programme number  
(e.g., if you have to press 9 on the remote to watch your  
Host Channel, enter 9 as the programme number). When  
you next switch the recorder into standby the GUIDE  
Plus+ system will complete the Host Channel setup.  
– The external receiver that you use is currently not  
supported. If, after leaving your external receiver on  
overnight, and doing the Reception and External  
Receiver Setup again, it still does not respond, please  
call Customer Support to report your brand and  
model.  
Note  
1 Making changes to the Country or Postal Code settings may require a new download of TV listings information. This can take up to 24 hours.  
83  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the GUIDE Plus+ electronic programme guide  
04  
• My external receiver was successfully setup. However  
I have found that when the GUIDE Plus+ system has  
to change to a channel with a three-digit programme  
number in the external receiver’s preset, it does not  
work. It looks like the GUIDE Plus+ system can only  
send two digits.  
– For external receiver users only: The connections  
and setup are OK, but the external receiver was not  
tuned to the correct Host Channel. Check the list of  
Host Channels (see step 5 of Setting up the GUIDE  
Plus+® system on page 71) and leave the recorder  
in standby and the external receiver on overnight  
tuned to the correct Host Channel.  
With the number of channels increasing, the number  
of digits has increased as well. While older boxes use  
only two digits, newer boxes require up to four. It is  
possible that you selected an older code for your  
brand during set-up. Please access the Setup Area,  
select External Receiver and repeat the setup for your  
brand (Note: Every time you see the on-screen  
question about whether the receiver has changed to  
a certain channel, the GUIDE Plus+ system has sent  
a different code). Try all the different codes until your  
GUIDE Plus+ system can control your external  
receiver correctly. If you have no success, try to  
receive new codes overnight.  
– You live in a country/region where the GUIDE Plus+  
system is not yet available. Check the list of countries  
to see if you are in a region that is supported.  
• I used the One-Button-Record feature (red Action  
button) to set a recording, but I recorded the wrong  
channel.  
If the channel to be recorded is received via the  
external receiver first make sure that the external  
receiver was left switched on. Next, in the Editor Area,  
make sure that the channel to be recorded is  
correctly set: Access the Editor Area. Check the  
source and programme number of the channel that  
you wanted to record. Change the source and preset  
numbers if incorrect.  
• I used to receive data through my terrestrial antenna or  
analog cable without a set-top box. Now, I have  
“upgraded” to a satellite system or to digital cable with  
external receiver. What should I do to receive data for  
the GUIDE Plus+ system?  
If you are recording from the recorder’s internal tuner  
(the A.TV or D.TV setting), make sure that the  
programme number is the same as the preset  
number set on this recorder. If they are different, go  
to the Editor Area and change the programme  
number to match the recorder’s preset number.  
You can try to receive your Host Channel through  
your new reception method. If you have problems to  
receive data we recommend that you keep your  
analog terrestrial or cable connection only to receive  
data this way. It is important that you identify your  
Host Channel correctly in the Editor Area.  
• The TV listings information doesn’t update.  
The latest TV listings information is automatically  
downloaded by the recorder overnight. This only  
happens if the recorder is in standby; if the recorder  
is left on, it will not download. When not using the  
recorder, please switch it into standby.  
• After I performed the initial set-up I found that the line-  
up for all the channels received via the external set top  
box is incorrect. How do I correct this?  
You can change the line-up in the editor according to  
your preferences. Access the Editor Area. Select the  
channels that you would like to change. Change the  
source and preset number according to your  
preferences.  
Data downloads can take several hours. The front  
panel display shows EPG when downloading. If you  
switch the recorder on while EPG is displayed, the  
download will be cancelled.  
• The GUIDE Plus+ system is not supported in my area,  
but when I switch the recorder into standby, after a  
while the front panel display shows EPG. Can I stop  
this from happening?  
• I performed the set-up but after many hours I still have  
a blank EPG what is going wrong?  
There are several possibilities:  
– Connections are wrong. See Recorder connections  
on page 62 to double check everything.  
If the GUIDE Plus+ system is not supported in your  
area, please do not set the postal code in the GUIDE  
Plus+ setup (see Setting up the GUIDE Plus+®  
system on page 71). When the GUIDE Plus+ service  
starts in your area, please set the postal code again.  
– The initial setup of GUIDE Plus+ was completed  
incorrectly. Try setting it up again (see Setting up the  
GUIDE Plus+® system on page 71).  
– Your cabling and setup is OK, but the recorder has  
not been connected for enough time to receive the TV  
listings data. Leave the recorder in standby overnight.  
• The automatic Host Channel search failed or the  
GUIDE Plus+ system identified the wrong Host  
Channel for my region.  
You can identify your Host Channel manually. See  
Manual Host Channel setup on page 83 for how to do  
this.  
84  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the digital electronic programme guide  
05  
Chapter 5  
Using the digital electronic  
programme guide  
• The general programme list may show sections  
This chapter is only applicable if the EPG Type Select  
setting made in the Setup Navigator (or the Initial Setup  
menu) is set to Digital EPG.  
whose bottom right corners have been folded. This  
indicates that other programmes have been  
scheduled for that period. To view the title of such a  
programme and related information, highlight a  
folded section, and then press ꢂ/ꢃ.  
The Digital EPG system  
The Digital EPG shows a table of scheduled digital TV  
programmes and detailed information about individual  
programmes. It also allows you easily to select and tune  
Programme information  
1
to a particular programme.  
D007  
The Digital EPG screen consists of programme  
Information, Channel List and General Programme List.  
This section describes information displayed in the  
schedule and information windows.  
1
2
3
4
Channel number  
Station name  
Note that the recorder’s clock must be set to the correct  
time and date to ensure all relevant EPG information is  
displayed.  
Programme title  
Appear when other programmes have been  
scheduled for the same period  
General Programme List  
5
6
Programme schedule  
Programme genre  
D007  
1
Appears when the schedule table can be scrolled  
forward or backward  
2
3
4
5
6
Time schedule  
Channel list  
Highlights the currently selected channel  
Indicates the programme set for recording  
Appears when other programmes (often short ones)  
have been scheduled for the same period  
7
8
Programme title  
Time dividers  
Note  
1 EPG information is only viewable for D.TV programmes that provide EPG information.  
85  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the digital electronic programme guide  
05  
• To quit the display of detailed information, press  
INFO again (or RETURN).  
Using the Digital EPG  
Using the Digital EPG you can check the schedule of  
digital TV programmes, view information about desired  
programmes, and/or select programmes.  
D007  
13:40-14:05  
************  
*************  
**************************  
GUIDE  
1
Press to display the Digital EPG screen.  
The EPG screen updates automatically if the EPG data is  
acquired successfully. If not, the Digital EPG screen  
shows a blank image.  
More...  
2
Select a TV programme.  
GUIDE  
4
Press to exit the Digital EPG screen.  
D007  
Setting timer programmes  
Using the Digital EPG, it’s easy to set digital TV  
2
programmes for recording .  
GUIDE  
1
2
Press to display the Digital EPG screen.  
Select a programme.  
ENTER  
• Press ꢁ/ꢂ (LCD page 1) to skip to the next or  
previous channel list page.  
D007  
• Information about the selected programme appears  
in the information window.  
1
• To watch a programme currently on air, select the  
programme (then press ENTER).  
• You can check information about programmes  
scheduled up to one week ahead, depending on  
conditions.  
• Depending on conditions, it may take some time to  
acquire EPG data.  
• Select a programme currently on-air: press ENTER to  
close the Digital EPG screen and watch the channel  
immediately, or press RED to set the programme for  
recording immediately.  
INFO  
3
Press to view more information about the  
selected programme.  
Detailed information appears in the schedule window.  
• Select a programme not yet started then press  
ENTER or RED to set the programme for recording.  
If the screen contains further information, More ... is  
displayed.  
Note  
1 The general programme list does not show programmes that have already finished.  
2 For more information on timer programmes, see About timer recordings on page 98.  
86  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the digital electronic programme guide  
05  
4
3
Enter the timer recording settings.  
VPS/PDC – Choose whether or not to use VPS/PDC  
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to select a field; use the ꢄ/ꢁ  
buttons to change the value .  
when making timer recordings of analog programmes  
(see About timer recordings on page 98).  
1
Auto Replace Rec. – Automatically erases the previous  
daily or weekly recording when the next one is recorded.  
Timer Programme Set  
Manhattan Open Tennis  
Genre – Select a record genre (for HDD recording only).  
CH  
Date  
SUN 1/4  
Start  
18:00  
Stop  
19:00  
Extend  
Off  
5
EPG Link (UK only) – Choose whether or not to have this  
D.TV003  
Store Programme  
device automatically record scheduled programmes  
from the Digital EPG even if the times in which they are  
broadcast change.  
Detailed Settings  
Record To  
Recording Mode  
VPS/PDC  
Auto Replace Rec.  
Genre  
Enter Details  
HDD  
XP  
------  
------  
Set Detailed  
Set Title Name  
Cancel  
6
Series Recording (UK only) – Choose whether or not to  
No Category  
record all programmes from a series when you make a  
recording from the Digital EPG (for HDD recordings only).  
VPS/PDC 0/8  
5
After entering all the timer recording information,  
• CH – Choose a channel (Pr 1 to Pr 99 for analog  
channels and available digital channels (excluding  
skip channels)) or an external input to record from.  
highlight ‘Store Programme’ and press ENTER  
A red clock icon appears for the programme.  
.
GUIDE  
6
Press to exit the Digital EPG screen.  
• Date – Choose a date up to one month in advance, or  
select a daily or weekly programme.  
• Start – Set the recording start time.  
Tip  
• Stop – Set the recording end time (maximum length  
• To enter a title name for the timer recording in  
advance, select Set Title Name and follow the on-  
screen display.  
of a timer recording is 24 hours).  
• Extend – Extend the end time of the timer recording  
(select Off, 10, 20 or 30 mins.).  
4
If you want to change the recording mode,  
recording destination, etc., select ‘Set Detailed’.  
In this area you can set:  
Record to – Select HDD for hard disk recording or DVD  
2
for DVD recording .  
3
Recording Mode – Select from AUTO , XP, SP, LP, EP,  
SLP, SEP (see Setting the picture quality/recording time on  
page 95). If Manual Recording is on, then you can also  
select the LPCM setting, XP+ or MN (press ENTER then  
use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to select the level).  
Note  
1 You cannot change the CH, Date, Start, Stop, Extend and title name when you have EPG Link set to On (see below).  
2 • For a DVD timer recording, if Optimized Rec (see Optimized Rec on page 157) is set to On (and VPS/PDC is off), the recorder will adjust the  
recording quality to try and fit the recording on the disc. If the recording will not fit onto the disc even on MN1 recording quality (MN4 for  
DVD+R/+RW) then the Recovery Recording feature will automatically make the recording to the HDD instead.  
• If there is very little free space left on the HDD, an Auto Replace Recording may not complete successfully.  
• If the HDD is being used for playback or high-speed copying when an Auto Replace Recording is due to start, the new timer recording will  
not replace the old one. However, the next time the timer recording starts, both of the older two programmes will be erased.  
3 This mode maximizes the recording quality to fit on to a single DVD disc. Can also be used when recording to HDD.  
4 • If you set the timer recording to use VPS/PDC, you must switch the recorder into standby before the timer recording is due to start for it to  
work correctly. For non-VPS/PDC timer recordings there is no need to switch the recorder into standby.  
• Optimized Recording will not work if VPS/PDC is on.  
• Up to eight timer recordings can be set with VPS/PDC.  
• VPS/PDC cannot be set for recordings made from digital broadcasts or an external input, or when the recording mode is set to AUTO.  
5 • You cannot set an EPG Link when recording mode is set to AUTO.  
• You cannot change the CH, Date, Start, Stop, Extend and title name when you have EPG Link set to On.  
• When you have EPG Link set to On and you set a timer recording for a programme that is divided into multiple parts, all parts of that  
programme are recorded automatically. In the programme list, the earliest part of the programme to be recorded has a red  
icon, with  
successive parts indicated by a gray  
programmes.  
6 • In the programme list, the earliest programme to be recorded has a red  
icon. Data provided by the broadcaster determines which programmes are classified as divided  
icon, with successive programmes indicated by a gray  
icon.  
• There is a limit to the number of programmes you can schedule to record with the Series Recording function.  
• Data provided by the broadcaster determines which programmes are classified as part of a series.  
87  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the digital electronic programme guide  
Editing a timer programme  
05  
ENTER  
You can change any of the settings in a timer programme  
4
Enter the timer recording settings.  
before the recording is due to start. Even if a programme  
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to select a field; use the ꢄ/ꢁ  
buttons to change the value. For more information on the  
options available at the Timer Programme Set screen,  
see Setting timer programmes on page 86.  
is currently being recorded, you can program a new end  
time or edit its extend time parameter.  
TIMER  
REC  
1
(LCD page 1) Press to display the Timer  
Programme View screen.  
ENTER  
You can also access the Timer Programme View screen  
from the Home Menu (press HOME MENU, select Timer  
Recording, then Timer Recording).  
5
After entering all the timer recording  
information, highlight ‘Store Programme’ and press  
ENTER.  
The timer recording list screen is displayed again. The  
timer programme you just input appears in the list. The  
rightmost column shows various timer recording status  
messages:  
This screen shows all the timer programmes currently set.  
Timer Programme View  
SUN 25/3 15:00  
VPS/PDC 0/8  
Manhattan Open Tennis  
Tmr Pgms 3/32  
OK  
SUN 25/3 18:00  
World Journey  
MON 26/3 19:30  
–
19:00  
21:00  
14:00  
Pr  
Pr  
Pr  
4
6
8
• OK – Can be recorded.  
OK  
–
• Time Over – Not enough space on the HDD (the  
recording won’t finish).  
Flower  
Until 20/4  
MON  
–
FRI 13:30  
–
New Input  
• Over 12h – Recording time of over 12 hours set  
(when recording to the HDD the recording will be  
split into two titles).  
HDD Remain  
DVD Remain  
59h59m(SP)  
1h59m(SP)  
• Overlap – Two timer programmes partially or  
completely overlap. The one starting earlier will take  
priority.  
• Each row is for one timer recording programme, with  
the date and time information, channel, recording  
mode, DVD or HDD and recording status.  
• Until ... (eg., Until 13/8) – For a regular recording,  
the last programme that could be recorded is shown.  
• The amount of free space available on the HDD and  
the currently loaded recordable DVD is shown  
towards the bottom of the screen.  
• Data Over – Can’t record because the disc  
management area of the disc is full.  
• Cancel Once – A regular timer programme is set to  
skip.  
• In the upper-right corner, the number of timer  
programmes already set is shown next to Tmr Pgms.  
• Can’t Rec – Not possible to record.  
• If there are more than five timer programmes already  
set, press ꢂ (LCD page 1) to switch page (go back  
using the ꢁ button).  
• Title Over – Can’t record because there is already  
the maximum number of titles on the disc (HDD: 999;  
DVD: 99).  
• You can also delete a timer programme before it’s  
started (before the recorder enters timer recording  
standby) by highlighting it and pressing CLEAR (LCD  
page 2). See also Deleting a timer programme on  
page 89.  
• Recording – The programme is currently recording.  
• Standby – The recorder is in timer recording standby.  
• Valid Until ... (eg., Valid Until 13/8) (UK only) –  
When you have set to make a series recording of a  
programme that has no new scheduled broadcasts,  
the date displayed indicates the last day until which  
the scheduled programme settings remain valid. (If  
the programme is not broadcast for over 13 weeks, its  
settings are automatically deleted.)  
2
Highlight the timer programme you want  
to change.  
If you want to set a new timer programme, select ‘New  
Input’ and skip to step 4.  
• No Broadcast (UK only) – Displays when a  
programme for which you had the EPG Link set to On  
does not record because the date of the scheduled  
recording has already passed.  
ENTER  
3
Press ꢃ then select ‘Modify’ from the  
command menu panel.  
Alternatively, press ENTER.  
• nothing displayed – Another timer recording or  
copying is in progress.  
The Timer Programme Set screen appears from which  
you can edit the settings.  
HOME  
MENU  
SETUP  
6
Press to exit the timer recording screen.  
88  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the digital electronic programme guide  
05  
Note  
ENTER  
3
Press ꢃ then select ‘Cancel Once’ from  
• If you set a DVD timer recording but there is no  
recordable DVD disc loaded, or the disc loaded  
doesn’t have enough free space for the complete  
recording, Recovery is shown. In this case (unless  
you load a suitable disc before the recording actually  
starts), the recorder will use the HDD for recording.  
(The message Can’t Rec will appear if there are  
already 999 titles on the HDD or if there is not enough  
free space on the HDD for recording.)  
the command menu panel.  
• In the timer programme list, Cancel Once appears by  
the programme.  
• You can also just press ꢉ (Pause)(LCD page 1) when  
the timer programme is highlighted.  
Checking for alternative broadcast times  
(UK only)  
• When you have EPG Link or Series Recording set to  
On, any changes in broadcast time or division of  
broadcasts are automatically accommodated for and  
your scheduled recordings are carried out without  
any additional settings. As a result, even when you  
have not scheduled programmes to record at the  
same time, changes in broadcasting schedules can  
cause scheduled recordings to overlap.  
You can check to see if a programme you have scheduled  
to record is airing at an alternative time slot .  
1
TIMER  
REC  
1
Press TIMER REC (LCD page 1).  
2
Highlight the timer programme you want  
to search.  
Deleting a timer programme  
You can delete timer programmes you no longer need.  
ENTER  
3
Press ꢃ then select ‘Alternate Search’  
TIMER  
REC  
1
Press TIMER REC (LCD page 1).  
from the command menu panel.  
• The search results are displayed. Choose the  
programme you would like to record and press either  
the RED button or ENTER to schedule a recording.  
2
Highlight the timer programme you want  
to erase.  
Searching for series  
ENTER  
(UK only)  
3
Press ꢃ then select ‘Erase’ from the  
You can search for broadcasts of programmes of the  
same series as a programme you have scheduled to  
command menu panel.  
• Select Yes to confirm or No to cancel.  
1
record .  
• You can also just press CLEAR (LCD page 2) when the  
timer programme is highlighted.  
TIMER  
REC  
1
Press TIMER REC (LCD page 1).  
Skipping a regular timer programme  
If you’ve set a regular daily or weekly timer programme,  
you can set the recorder to skip the next scheduled  
recording.  
2
Highlight the timer programme you want  
to search.  
TIMER  
REC  
ENTER  
1
Press TIMER REC (LCD page 1).  
3
Press ꢃ then select ‘Series Search’ from  
the command menu panel.  
• The search results are displayed. Choose the  
programme you would like to record and press either  
the RED button or ENTER to schedule a recording.  
2
Highlight the timer programme you want  
to skip.  
Note  
1 • Programme search results are based upon data provided by the broadcaster.  
• This function may not be applicable to all programmes.  
89  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the digital electronic programme guide  
05  
Searching for recommendations  
EPG Search  
(UK only)  
1
Press YELLOW when the EPG screen (Programme  
You can search for recommended programmes  
List, Detailed information or Search Result) is  
displayed.  
generated from the content of the programmes you have  
1
scheduled to record .  
TIMER  
REC  
1
Press TIMER REC (LCD page 1).  
2
In the ‘Date’ field select a date (within one  
week) to search in.  
2
Highlight the timer programme you want  
Date  
Sun.12.Sep  
12:00  
to search.  
Time  
Genre  
Select  
ENTER  
0/16  
3
Press ꢃ then select ‘Recommendation  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Search’ from the command menu panel.  
The search results are displayed. Choose the programme  
you would like to record and press either the RED button  
or ENTER to schedule a recording.  
Search  
Cancel  
Other useful EPG functions  
EPG Jump  
3
In the ‘Time’ field select the time of day  
(0:00 to 23:00) to search in.  
1
Press GREEN when the Digital EPG screen  
(Programme List, Detailed information or Search  
Result) is displayed.  
4
In the ‘Genre’ field, select the genre to  
search for.  
You can search for multiple genres by pressing ENTER  
after each genre.  
2
In the ‘Date’ field select a date (within one  
week) to jump to.  
ENTER  
5
6
Select ‘OK’.  
Date  
Time  
Mon.13.Sep  
14:00  
ENTER  
Select ‘Search’.  
Jump  
Cancel  
The results of your search are displayed.  
3
In the ‘Time’ field select a time of the day  
(0:00 to 23:00) to jump to.  
ENTER  
4
Select ‘Jump’.  
The Programme List for the specified day and time is  
displayed.  
Note  
1 • Programme search results are based upon data provided by the broadcaster.  
• This function may not be applicable to all programmes.  
90  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
06  
CRhaepcteor 6rding  
• If you delete a title from a DVD+R/+RW disc, the  
total number of recordable titles remaining may not  
increase.  
About DVD recording  
This recorder can record to DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R,  
DVD+RW, DVD-RAM, DVD-R DL and DVD+R DL media.  
• Although this recorder can record PAL, SECAM,  
NTSC and PAL-60, you can’t mix multiple TV line  
systems on one disc. A disc can contain PAL and  
SECAM recordings, or NTSC and PAL-60. See also  
Additional information about the TV system settings  
on page 161.  
DVD-R and DVD-RW discs can be initialized for Video  
mode or VR mode recording. Each has its advantages,  
and it depends on what you want to do with the recording  
which mode you choose.  
If you want to edit your recordings in any significant way,  
VR mode offers greater possibilities for cutting, copying,  
and changing the way the video is presented.  
• Fingerprints, dirt and small scratches on a disc can  
affect playback and/or recording performance.  
Please take proper care of your discs.  
Video mode is less flexible when it comes to editing, but  
it has the advantage that it is compatible with standard  
DVD players (many of which won’t play VR mode discs ).  
• Pioneer takes no responsibility for recording failure  
due to power cuts, defective discs, or damage to the  
recorder.  
1
Once a disc is initialized for a particular mode, all  
recording on that disc will be in that mode.  
• See also Disc/content format playback compatibility  
on page 57 for detailed disc compatibility information.  
DVD+RW discs can be initialized for +VR mode recording.  
DVD-RAM discs can be initialized for VR mode recording.  
DVD+R discs do not require initializing.  
Recording to DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs  
Recording to DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs is generally the  
same as recording to regular single-layer discs; however,  
please note the following points:  
Important  
• When the recorder switches from the first layer to the  
second during recording a DVD-R DL (Video mode)  
disc, a new title is automatically started on the new  
layer.  
• The table below shows the maximum number of titles  
recordable per disc and the maximum number of  
chapters per title:  
• Up to 99 titles can be recorded on a DVD-R DL (Video  
mode) disc. If the 99th title is being recorded when  
the layer is switched, recording will stop.  
Max. titles  
(per disc)  
Max. chapters  
(per title)  
Disc type/rec. format  
DVD-R/-RW  
Video mode  
99  
99  
49  
99  
• Up to 49 titles can be recorded on a DVD+R DL disc.  
• You cannot play, record additional material to, edit or  
finalize a DVD-R DL or DVD+R DL disc that has been  
recorded on but not yet finalized on another DVD  
recorder.  
*1  
DVD-R/-RW/-RAM  
VR mode  
999  
*2  
DVD+R/+RW  
99  
*1 A maximum of 999 chapters are recordable per disc.  
*2  
A maximum of 254 chapters are recordable per disc.  
About HDD recording  
Recording to the hard disk drive (HDD) is very flexible;  
you have the full choice of recording quality options,  
including manual mode, and of course you can record,  
erase and re-record as many times as you like.  
• This recorder cannot play or record unfinalized DVD  
-R/-RW (Video mode) and DVD+R discs recorded on  
another recorder. DVD+RW discs recorded on  
another recorder are playable on this recorder but are  
not recordable.  
The capacity of the hard disk drive means that you can  
store many hours of video on it, even using the higher  
quality recording modes.  
• The maximum continuous recording time for one title  
is eight hours when using a DVD+R/+RW disc.  
Note  
1 Some DVD players, such as some Pioneer models, are compatible with VR mode discs. Check the operating instructions for your player for  
VR mode compatibility information.  
91  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
06  
Important  
Restrictions on video recording  
• The maximum number of titles/chapters per title that  
can be recorded on the HDD is 999 and 99  
respectively. No more recording is possible on the  
HDD after the maximum number of titles has been  
reached.  
You cannot record copy-protected video using this  
recorder. Copy-protected video includes DVD-Video discs  
and some satellite broadcasts. If copy-protected material  
is encountered during a recording, recording will pause  
automatically and an error message will be displayed on-  
screen.  
• The maximum continuous recording time for one title  
is 12 hours.  
Video that is ‘copy-once only’ can only be recorded to  
DVD-RAM or HDD, CPRM-compatible VR mode DVD-R/  
-RW (see below).  
• It is possible to record both PAL and NTSC titles on  
the HDD. Before recording, you need to make sure  
that the Input Line System setting (page 161)  
matches the TV line system of the source you’re  
recording.  
When recording a TV broadcast or through an external  
input, you can display copy control information on screen  
(see Displaying disc information on-screen on page 112).  
HDD Video mode compatibility  
When recording to the HDD you can choose to record in  
one of two formats. Set the format from the HDD  
Recording Format item in the Initial Setup menu (see  
page 158).  
CPRM  
CPRM is a copy protection/scrambling system developed  
for the recording of ‘copy once’ broadcast programmes.  
CPRM stands for Content Protection for Recordable Media.  
This recorder is CPRM compatible, which means that you  
can record copy-once broadcast programmes, but you  
cannot then make a copy of those recordings. CPRM  
recordings can only be made on CPRM-compatible DVD  
-R (ver. 2.0/8x or higher) or DVD-RW (ver. 1.1 or higher)  
discs formatted in VR mode, DVD-RAM discs or on the  
HDD.  
When set to Video Mode On, high-speed copying from  
HDD to DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW is  
possible. When recording a bilingual broadcast, set  
which channel you want to record from the Initial Setup  
menu (see Bilingual Recording on page 155).  
When HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off,  
high-speed copying from HDD to DVD-R/-RW (Video  
mode) or DVD+R/+RW isn’t possible. However, both  
channels of bilingual broadcasts are recorded and you  
can switch the audio on playback.  
DVD CPRM recordings can only be played on players that  
are specifically compatible with CPRM.  
Recording equipment and copyright  
Recording equipment should be used only for lawful  
copying. You are advised to check carefully what  
constitutes lawful copying in the country in which you are  
making a copy. Copying of copyrighted material such as  
films or music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal  
exception or consented to by the rightowners.  
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is  
protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other  
intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other  
rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be  
authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and  
other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by  
Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is  
prohibited.  
Recorded audio  
In all except the LPCM mode, sound is recorded in two  
channel Dolby Digital format (only Dolby Digital 2.0 can  
be recorded; Dolby Digital 5.1 recording is not possible).  
When set to LPCM, sound is recorded in high quality,  
uncompressed Linear PCM format.  
If the broadcast audio is bilingual and you are recording  
to DVD-R/-RW (Video mode), DVD+R/+RW, or to the  
HDD with the HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode  
On, or on the LPCM setting, use the Bilingual Recording  
setting (page 155) to select the A/L or B/R audio channel  
to record before recording starts. In other cases, both  
channels of a bilingual broadcast will be recorded and  
you can switch on playback.  
92  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
06  
Using the D.TV Channel List  
When in D.TV mode, you can call up the on-screen Channel List  
anytime by pressing ENTER. Use the ꢄ/ꢁbuttons to select a  
channel, then press ENTER to switch to that channel.3  
Using the built-in A.TV and D.TV tuners  
Switching between A.TV and D.TV tuners  
D001  
D002  
D003  
D004  
D005  
D006  
************  
************  
******  
A.TV/  
D.TV  
•
(LCD page 2) Press to switch between D.TV  
(digital) and A.TV (analog).  
************  
****  
******  
Changing channels  
There are a number of ways to select analog and digital  
TV channels. Note that you can’t change the TV channel  
during playback, recording or during recording standby.  
1
Displaying a channel banner  
A channel banner shows programme titles, start and end  
times of the current programme and other channel  
information. The information is updated every minute.  
+
CH  
-
•
•
CH +/– buttons (LCD page 2)  
INFO  
•
Press to display the channel banner for the  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
current channel.  
D001  
Wed.30.Apr 12:46  
************  
Number buttons (LCD page 2)  
Now  
Next  
11:30-12:00  
12:00 - 12:30  
********************  
*************  
For example, to select channel 4 (digital channel  
D004), press 4 then ENTER; for channel 34 (digital  
channel D034), press 3, 4, ENTER.  
• Use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to display the channel banner  
for other channels. To switch to the displayed  
banner’s channel, press ENTER.  
2
• For D.TV channels only, you can also use the Channel  
List — see below.  
• The channel banner displays the Subtitles ( ) and  
Teletext/MHEG ( ) icon if they apply to the selected  
channel.4  
Tip  
• To see more detailed channel information, press  
INFO again.  
• When changing terrestrial digital broadcast  
channels, channels with a low signal strength may  
result in a black screen being displayed.  
5
Now  
11:30-12:00  
More...  
************************  
• For other channels, it may take a short while for the  
channel picture to appear, and/or for the channel  
number to appear.  
• In both of the above cases, some improvement may  
be possible by adjusting the antenna.  
Use the ꢄ/ꢁ buttons to display information about  
previous and following programmes. Use the ꢂ/ꢃ  
buttons to see information about other channels.  
• If there is still more information to be displayed,  
More ... is displayed; press the BLUE button to see  
the extra information.  
• To hide the channel banner, press RETURN.  
Note  
1 • If you select a locked channel, you will need to enter your password to access it.  
• While listening to D.TV radio channels, the screen saver automatically starts after no button has been pressed for three minutes.  
Analog channel presets are numbered 1 to 99; digital channel presets are numbered D001 to D999.  
2
3 • If you select a locked channel, you will need to enter your password to access it.  
• While listening to D.TV radio channels, the screen saver automatically starts after no button has been pressed for three minutes.  
4 Due to inaccurate information provided by the broadcaster, some icons may occasionally be present or absent in error.  
5 Not all channels supply more detailed information.  
93  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
06  
• If the NICAM audio setting (see NICAM Select on  
page 155) is set to NICAM and you are watching a  
NICAM broadcast, you can switch between NICAM  
and Regular (non-NICAM) audio.  
Changing D.TV audio languages  
•
(LCD page 3) Press to display the current  
audio language. Press repeatedly to change it to  
other available languages.  
NICAM  
Regular  
Changing D.TV subtitle languages  
• If the NICAM broadcast is bilingual, you can also  
select the language.  
•
(LCD page 3) Press to display the current  
NICAM A  
Regular  
NICAM B  
subtitle language. Press repeatedly to change it to  
other available languages.  
NICAM A+B  
• You can also select the language for a non-NICAM  
bilingual broadcast.  
Using the MHEG application  
(UK only)  
Some stations bring you programmes with the MHEG  
(Multimedia and Hypermedia Expert Group) application  
encoded, letting you experience D.TV interactively.  
A (L)  
B (R)  
A + B (L+R)  
1
• When watching a recording made from an external  
input with Bilingual recording selected (see External  
Audio on page 155), you can switch the audio  
channel between left (L), right (R) or both (L+R).  
The channel banner displays an icon ( ) to indicate that  
the MHEG application can be run.  
TEXT  
•
(LCD page 2) Press to start the MHEG  
2
L
R
application.  
• You can also use any of the colour buttons.  
L+R  
• Press TEXT to quit the MHEG application.  
Note  
Viewing Teletext  
• When recording to the HDD with HDD Recording  
Format set to Video Mode On, to DVD-R/-RW (Video  
mode), to DVD+R/+RW, or on the LPCM setting, only  
one channel of a bilingual broadcast is recorded. In  
this case, decide which language you want to record  
before recording by setting the Bilingual Recording  
setting (see Bilingual Recording on page 155).  
(European countries except the UK.)  
You can view the Teletext that comes simultaneously with  
certain programmes.  
TEXT  
•
(LCD page 2) Press to display the Teletext.  
• You can also use any of the colour buttons.  
• Press the TEXT button again to hide the Teletext  
screen.  
Switching between TV and DVD  
When the recorder is stopped or recording you can  
choose whether to have the audio/video from the built-in  
TV tuner (or external input) play on your TV (‘DVD mode’),  
or watch the channel that the TV is currently set to (‘TV  
mode’).  
Changing A.TV audio channels  
You can change the audio channel of the broadcast or  
external input signal.  
During playback or when a menu is being displayed on-  
screen, the sound and video is always routed to your TV  
and is unaffected by the TV/DVD mode setting.  
•
(LCD page 3) Press to change the audio type.  
The current audio channel is displayed on-screen.  
Note that the recorder must be connected to your TV  
using a SCART cable to be able to use this feature.  
TV/  
DVD  
•
(LCD page 2) Switch between TV mode and  
DVD mode.  
Note  
1 If you start recording while the MHEG application is running, the MHEG application screen will also be recorded. To avoid this, quit the  
application first, then start recording. It is not possible to start the MHEG application while recording is in progress.  
2 This function is not available when subtitle display is active.  
94  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
06  
Setting the picture quality/recording  
time  
Basic recording from the TV  
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD  
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD  
Basic recording from the TV involves just setting the  
channel to record, choosing whether to record to the  
HDD or a DVD and selecting the recording quality.  
Before starting a recording, you will usually want to set  
the picture quality/recording time. There are six standard  
settings available, which allow you to choose a balance  
between picture quality and recording time.  
HDD/  
DVD  
1
(LCD page 1) Select the HDD or DVD for  
recording.  
When Manual Recording is set to On (see Manual  
Recording on page 157), a further option will be available  
(MN1 to MN32, LPCM, or XP+ (a super-high quality HDD  
recording mode that features a transfer rate of around 15  
Mbps) depending on what you set).  
• If you’re recording to DVD, load a recordable disc (if  
you load a new blank DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc, the  
recorder takes a short while to initialize the disc).  
• If you want to record a VR mode DVD-R or a Video  
mode DVD-RW, you must initialize it before  
proceeding (see Initializing recordable DVD discs on  
page 102).  
When recording to DVD, MN32 is the highest recording  
quality available. If you select XP+, the recording mode  
will automatically revert to MN32.  
When recording to DVD+R/+RW, SLP is the longest  
recording time available. If you select SEP or MN1 to  
MN3, the recording mode will automatically revert to SLP  
A.TV/  
D.TV  
2
(LCD page 2) Press to switch between D.TV  
.
(digital) and A.TV (analog).  
REC  
+
CH  
-
MODE  
•
(LCD page 1) Press repeatedly to select the  
recording quality.  
• XP – High quality setting, gives about one hour of  
recording time on a DVD disc.  
3
Select a TV channel to record.  
The front panel display shows the channel number, or  
channel name if it’s available:  
• SP (Standard Play) – Default quality, used for most  
applications, gives about two hours of recording time  
on a DVD.  
A.TV Channel preset  
• LP (Long Play) – Lower video quality than SP, but  
doubles the recording time on a DVD to about four  
hours.  
• While the recorder is stopped, you can also use the  
number buttons on the remote to select the channel  
(For channel 24, press 2, 4 then ENTER).  
• EP (Extended Play) – Lower quality than LP, but gives  
about six hours of recording time on a DVD disc.  
• SLP (Super Long Play) – Lower quality than EP, but  
gives about eight hours of recording time on a DVD  
disc.  
REC  
MODE  
4
(LCD page 1) Set the picture quality/  
recording time.  
• See Setting the picture quality/recording time above  
for detailed instructions.  
• SEP (Super Extended Play) – Lowest video quality but  
gives about ten hours of recording time on a DVD  
disc.  
1
2
• MN1 to MN32/LPCM /XP+ – Manual/Linear PCM/  
XP+ (available only when manual recording is on).  
The setting is indicated in the front panel display, and  
shown on-screen together with the recording time for a  
blank recordable disc. If a recordable disc is loaded, the  
approximate remaining recording time for that disc is  
also shown. (Note that if the On Screen Display setting  
(see On Screen Display on page 160) is Off then this  
information is not displayed.)  
Note  
1 Audio is recorded in 16-bit Linear PCM format, video is recorded at XP quality. When recording a bilingual broadcast, select which audio chan-  
nel to record (see Bilingual Recording on page 155).  
2 Applicable only to HDD recording. (If this setting is used when recording to DVD, MN32 is used.) When copied to DVD, XP+ recordings are  
always copied in real time.  
95  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
06  
Tip  
5
(LCD page 3) If you’re recording from the  
A.TV tuner, select the audio channel to record.  
See Changing A.TV audio channels on page 94 for more  
on this.  
• During recording you can turn on/off the SCART loop  
through function. During recording, press the INPUT  
button (LCD page 2) to switch to SCART THRU (loop  
through on) or SCART NORM (loop through off).  
Loop through is automatically reset to off after  
recording has finished. Note that you can’t switch  
loop through on if recording from the AV1 (RGB)-TV  
connector.  
• When recording in VR mode, if a broadcast is  
bilingual, both audio channels are recorded, allowing  
you to switch the audio channel on playback. The only  
exception to this is when the picture quality is set to  
LPCM, in which case you do need to select the audio  
channel before recording.  
6
(LCD page 3) If you’re recording from the  
Pause Live TV  
D.TV tuner, select the audio language to record.  
• You may also be able to set which subtitle language  
HDD  
to record; use the  
button (LCD page 3) to select.  
The Pause Live TV feature lets you effectively pause a TV  
programme you’re watching. When you’re ready to  
resume watching, just press the ꢊ (Play) button (LCD  
page 1).  
• Note that audio and subtitle languages cannot be  
changed during the recording of a digital broadcast.  
ì
REC  
7
(LCD page 1) Start recording.  
If you want to set a recording end time, press the ì REC  
button repeatedly. The recording time increases in 30  
minute increments, up to a maximum of six hours. The  
time the recording will end is shown on-screen and in the  
front panel display. When the recording ends, the  
recorder automatically switches into standby if no other  
operation is being performed.  
Setting up for Pause Live TV  
You can use the Pause Live TV feature with an AV Link-  
compatible TV connected using a SCART cable (see TV  
tuner setup for Pause Live TV below), or using this  
recorder’s internal tuner (see Using the recorder’s  
internal tuner for Pause Live TV on page 97).  
TV tuner setup for Pause Live TV  
• To cancel the set recording time, press ì REC.  
To use this feature with an external TV tuner, the recorder  
must be connected to your TV using a SCART cable, and  
the AV. Link setting (page 160) should be set to This  
Recorder Only. See also Pause Live TV on page 160 for  
more on this.  
1
• If you want to pause recording at any time , press  
ꢉ (Pause). Press again to restart the recording (If  
recording to the HDD, DVD-RAM or in VR mode, a  
new chapter is started after recording restarts).  
2
In order to use Pause Live TV, make the following  
connections and settings.  
• Pause Live TV will not work as expected when  
watching TV via an external component such as a  
VCR or digital tuner. It only works with the channel  
selected on the TV.  
STOP  
REC  
8
Press to stop recording.  
• If you set the recording time in the previous step, you  
can still stop the recording anytime by pressing  
STOP REC.  
• Recording will stop automatically when there is no  
more space on the HDD/DVD, or after 12 hours of  
HDD recording (whichever is sooner).  
Important  
• Pause Live TV only works with the built-in A.TV  
(analog) tuner. It does not work with the D.TV tuner or  
the external input. Make sure the Auto Channel  
Setting is set to Download from TV (see Auto  
Channel Setting on page 154).  
1
Connect this recorder to your TV with a SCART  
cable.  
2
Press HOME MENU.  
Note  
1 Except during Chase Play.  
2 • Not all TVs support this feature. Check the instructions that came with your TV if you are unsure.  
• This feature will not work unless your TV is compatible with AV Link. See the operating instructions that came with your TV if you’re unsure  
about your TV’s compatibility with this feature.  
96  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
06  
3
Select ‘Initial Setup’ > ‘Options2’ > ‘Pause Live TV’  
Using Pause Live TV  
> ‘TV’s Tuner’.  
P.LIVE  
TV  
4
Select ‘Initial Setup’ > ‘Analog Tuner’ > ‘Auto  
1
(LCD page 1) Start recording the current TV  
Channel Setting’ > ‘Download from TV’.  
• If the Download from TV option appears grayed out,  
check the connections to your TV and try again.  
channel.  
Recording continues with playback paused.  
• Note that it may take up to 10 seconds for recording  
to start.  
• Depending on your TV, you might have to switch off  
and unplug it for a few moments before plugging it  
back in and switching it on again.  
ꢊ
2
Press to start playback.  
You can also use the scan buttons (ꢅ/ꢈ), pause (ꢉ)  
and stop (ꢋ) — all without affecting the recording.  
5
Follow the on-screen instructions.  
Using the recorder’s internal tuner for Pause Live TV  
If you haven’t connected to your TV using a SCART cable  
(or your TV is not compatible with AV Link) you can use  
the recorder’s internal tuner for the Pause Live TV.  
STOP  
REC  
3
Press to stop the recording.  
The operation is slightly different depending on the  
viewing source. See the Operation table below for details.  
1
Press HOME MENU.  
Tip  
2
Select ‘Initial Setup’ > ‘Options2’ > ‘Pause Live TV’  
> ‘Recorder’s Tuner’.  
See Pause Live TV on page 160 to do this.  
• When the Pause Live TV setting (see page 160) is set to  
TV’s Tuner, you can press P.LIVE TV while the  
recorder is in standby to switch on and immediately  
start recording. When set to Recorder’s Tuner, it is not  
possible to use the Pause Live TV feature from standby.  
You can record the channel selected on the recorder.  
• After pressing P.LIVE TV, it will take at least 10  
seconds for the picture to change (during this time,  
all controls except the power button are inoperative).  
(Note that startup from standby is not possible if you  
have selected Recorder’s Tuner in Pause Live TV on  
page 160.)  
• Please note that you can’t record from another  
component (VCR, etc.) that is connected by a SCART  
cable to the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) connector  
using the Pause Live TV feature.  
Operation table  
TV/DVD  
mode of DVR  
Pause Live TV  
function button  
Viewing source  
DVR source  
Condition  
TV built-in analog tuner  
TV  
–
Pause Live TV  
Preset channel of DVR and TV are matched after  
downloading from TV.  
Direct TV recording*1 Preset channel of DVR and TV are NOT matched after  
downloading from TV. Record TV programme that you’re  
watching.  
TV built-in digital tuner  
TV  
–
–
Direct TV recording*1 Preset channel info. in D.TV cannot be shared by DVR even  
after Download from TV. Record TV programme that you’re  
watching.  
External input of TV  
TV  
Direct TV recording*1 Record TV programme that you’re watching.  
DVR built-in analog tuner  
DVD  
DVR built-in Pause Live TV  
analog tuner  
DVR built-in digital tuner  
DVD  
DVR built-in Pause Live TV  
digital tuner  
*1 No Chase Play! Warning if you change input this will stop the recording.  
97  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
06  
• When the front panel display is set to ON, the timer  
indicator ( ) lights in the front panel display when  
the timer is active. If the indicator is blinking it means  
that (for a DVD timer recording) there is no disc  
loaded, or the disc loaded is not recordable (for an  
HDD timer recording it means that the HDD is not  
recordable).  
About timer recordings  
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD  
Using the timer recording features you can program up  
to 32 timer recordings up to a month in advance. Timer  
recording programmes can be set to record just once,  
every day, or every week.  
• Approximately two minutes before a timer recording  
is set to start, the recorder will go into timer recording  
standby. In timer recording standby you cannot use  
some functions.  
You can set the recording quality for your timer recording  
in the same way as for a regular recording, but with the  
added option of an AUTO mode, which maximizes the  
recording quality for the space available on the disc (if  
recording to DVD), or to fit on to a blank DVD disc (if  
recording to the HDD).  
• The maximum length for timer recordings made to  
the HDD is 24 hours. However, because one title  
(HDD) is limited to 12 hours, recordings over 12  
hours will be spread over two titles. Note that there  
will be a break in the recording of a few seconds  
between titles.  
You can set timer recordings to record to a recordable  
DVD or to the hard disk drive. For regular (daily or weekly)  
HDD timer recordings that you don’t need to keep, you  
can use the Auto Replace Recording feature to  
automatically replace the previous timer recording with  
the new one. Note that when you use this feature, the  
previous recording made on that timer programme will  
be replaced by the next one, regardless of whether you  
have watched it yet or not.  
• If you set the timer recording to use VPS/PDC, set  
this recorder’s HDMI Control to Off (page 159).  
• VPS/PDC works only with analog stations; it does not  
work with digital TV stations.  
• VPS/PDC may not work with all broadcast stations in  
your country/area. Check with the stations for  
compatibility.  
You can also set the recorder so that it will adjust the  
recording quality to try and fit the recording on to the disc  
if it would not otherwise fit at the recording quality you set  
(see Optimized Rec on page 157 for more on this).  
• The hours between 3:00 and 5:00 in the morning are  
used by the GUIDE Plus+ system to download  
programme information. During these times, VPS/  
PDC may not work reliably; leave VPS/PDC off if you  
set a timer recording for these times.  
Finally, if you set a timer recording to record to DVD but  
there isn’t a recordable DVD loaded at the time of the  
recording, the Recovery Recording feature will  
• Timer recordings with VPS/PDC set to On are not  
performed for the period between 20 minutes before  
the start time of timer recordings for which EPG Link  
is set to On until the such recordings are completed  
(page 87).  
automatically record the programme to the HDD for you.  
This recorder is compatible with VPS (Video  
Programming System) and PDC (Programme Delivery  
Control) systems used by many analog TV stations to  
ensure that a timer recording catches the whole  
programme even when the programme is not running to  
schedule. Up to eight timer programmes can be set with  
VPS/PDC on.  
• If VPS/PDC is active for two timer programmes that  
are programmed to start at the same time, then the  
programme that actually starts first takes priority.  
Extending a timer recording in progress  
You can extend a timer recording beyond the  
programmed end time. This can be useful if a broadcast  
programme overruns, for example.  
Important  
• A timer recording can’t be set if there are already 32  
timer programmes waiting to be recorded.  
• Timer recording will not start if:  
– The recorder is already recording.  
Cancelling or extending the timer  
– A disc is being initialized, finalized or unfinalized.  
ì
REC  
1
(LCD page 1) Press and hold for three seconds  
• Timer recording will start when the operation  
preventing timer recording has finished.  
during a timer recording.  
Recording continues, but the timer indicator disappears  
from the front panel display indicating that the timer has  
been cancelled.  
ì
REC  
2
Press repeatedly to extend recording in 30  
minute blocks.  
98  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
06  
Stopping a timer recording  
Timer recording FAQ  
STOP  
REC  
1
2
(LCD page 1) Press during a timer recording.  
Frequently Asked Questions  
• Even though the timer is set, the recorder doesn’t start  
recording!  
Check that the disc loaded or HDD is recordable, not  
locked (see Lock Disc on page 147), and that there are  
fewer than 99/999 titles already on the DVD/HDD.  
ENTER  
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm.  
Preventing use of the recorder before a timer  
recording (child lock)  
• The recorder won’t let me enter a timer programme!  
Why not?  
You can’t enter a timer programme if the clock isn’t  
set.  
• What happens when two or more timer programmes  
overlap?  
You can make all the front panel and remote control  
buttons inoperative using the child lock feature. This is  
useful when you set a timer recording and want to make  
sure that the timer settings are not changed before  
recording has finished.  
Basically, the programme with the earlier recording  
start time has priority. However, the recorder will  
start recording the programme with the later start  
time after the earlier programme is finished.  
If schedule to record two programmes have the same  
times (but different channels, for example), then only  
one of the two programmes will be recorded. In this  
event you should cancel the scheduled recording of  
the lesser important programme. If one of the  
overlapping programmes is a regular timer  
programme for a digital broadcast, you may choose  
‘Cancel Once’ in order to avoid having it overlap with  
a separately scheduled programme (see Skipping a  
regular timer programme on page 89).  
SOURCE  
ꢀ
1
2
If the recorder is on, switch it into standby.  
[Front panel] Press and hold for three  
STOP  
seconds to lock the controls.  
The front panel display briefly shows LOCKED. If any  
buttons are pressed on the remote or front panel,  
LOCKED is briefly displayed again.  
• To unlock the recorder, press and hold ꢋ (Stop) on  
the front panel (while the recorder is stopped) for  
three seconds until the display shows UNLOCKED.  
• Even if you make child lock settings, this recorder can  
still be controlled by the remote of a connected  
plasma television. If you do not want this unit to be  
able to be controlled by another component when  
you have set a child lock, turn this recorder’s HDMI  
Control to Off (page 159).  
99  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
06  
Simultaneous recording and  
playback (Chase Play)  
Recording from an external component  
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD  
HDD  
You can record from an external component, such as a  
camcorder or VCR, connected to an external input of the  
recorder.  
Chase Play allows you to watch a recording that is still in  
progress from the start, without having to wait until the  
recording has finished (i.e., playback is ‘chasing’ the  
recording).  
1
Make sure that the component you want to  
record from is connected properly to the HDD/DVD  
recorder.  
In fact, you’re not just limited to watching the recording  
in progress. You can watch anything else already on the  
HDD (or on a DVD if you’re recording to the HDD) by  
selecting it from the Disc Navigator screen (see Using  
the Disc Navigator with recordable discs and the HDD on  
page 106).  
See Chapter 2 (Recorder connections) for connection  
options.  
INPUT  
2
(LCD page 2) Press repeatedly to select an  
external input of the recorder to record from.  
The current input is shown on-screen and in the front  
panel display:  
Chase Play is not possible when DV is the recording input.  
ꢊ
2
•
(LCD page 1) Press during recording to start  
• AV2/L1 – Input 1  
playback from the beginning of the current  
Check that the Audio In settings for External Audio and  
Bilingual Recording are as you want them (see Audio In  
on page 155).  
1
recording .  
• If the aspect ratio is distorted (squashed or stretched),  
adjust on the source component or your TV before  
recording.  
DISC  
•
NAVIGATOR  
Press during recording to select another  
title to play.  
You can use all the usual playback controls, such as  
pause, slow-motion play, scan and skip.  
• To watch video coming in via the DV input (front  
panel), select DV > DV Video Playback from the  
Home Menu (see also Playing from a DV camcorder on  
page 114).  
• To stop playback, press ꢋ (Stop)(recording will  
continue).  
• To stop recording, press STOP REC (playback will  
continue).  
REC  
MODE  
3
(LCD page 1) Set the recording quality.  
• See Setting the picture quality/recording time on  
page 95 for detailed information.  
• During recording or in timer recording standby, you  
can’t play an HDD title, DVD or Video CD/Super VCD  
disc if the Input Line System setting doesn’t match  
the TV line system of the disc/HDD title (see also  
Additional information about the TV system settings  
on page 161). Also, during simultaneous recording  
and playback, if the TV line system of the playback  
track/title changes then playback will automatically  
stop.  
HDD/  
DVD  
4
5
Select the HDD or DVD for recording.  
ì
REC  
Press to start recording.  
• If your source is copy-protected using Copy Guard,  
you will not be able to record it. See Restrictions on  
video recording on page 92 for more details.  
Note  
1 You can’t start playback immediately after recording starts. Simultaneous playback and recording doesn’t work while copying or backing up.  
2 This cannot be selected if AV2/L1 In is set to Decoder (see AV2/L1 In on page 155).  
100  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
06  
• A VR mode DVD-R/-RW (excluding DVD-R DL) disc  
can still be recorded and edited on this recorder even  
after finalizing.  
Playing your recordings on other  
DVD players  
• DVD-R DL (Video mode) discs and DVD+R DL discs  
must be finalized in order to play in other recorders/  
players. Note however that some recorders/players  
will not play even finalized dual-layer discs.  
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW  
Most regular DVD players can play finalized discs  
recorded in DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) and DVD+R discs.  
A number of players (including many Pioneer models)  
can also play DVD-RW discs recorded in VR mode,  
finalized or not. Most players will not play VR mode DVD  
-R discs, although some DVD-ROM drives and DVD  
recorders may be able to (finalization might be  
necessary). Check the manual that came with the player  
to check what kinds of discs it will play.  
1
Load the disc you want to finalize.  
Make sure that the recorder is stopped before proceeding.  
HOME  
MENU  
SETUP  
2
3
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home Menu.  
Select ‘Finalize’ > ‘Finalize’ > ‘Next Screen’.  
ENTER  
When you finalize a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R  
disc, a title menu is created from which you can select  
titles when you play the disc. There are a number of  
different styles of title menu to choose from to suit the  
content of the disc.  
Disc Setup  
Next Screen  
Start  
Basic  
Finalize  
Initialize  
Undo Finalize  
Finalize  
All the title menus are navigated in the usual way,  
pressing MENU or TOP MENU to display the menu, then  
using the ꢄ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ followed by ENTER to select titles  
and start playback.  
Optimize HDD  
Finalizing a disc  
ENTER  
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW  
4
For DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) and DVD+R/  
+RW discs only, select a title menu style, then select  
‘Yes’ to start finalization or ‘No’ to cancel.  
The menu you select will be the one that appears when  
the ‘top menu’ (or ‘menu’ for a DVD+R/+RW) is selected  
on any DVD player.  
Finalizing ‘fixes’ the recordings on the disc so that it can  
be played on a regular DVD player or computer equipped  
with a suitable DVD-ROM drive.  
1
Note that the disc name will appear in the title menu after  
you finalize a disc. Make sure the disc name is as you  
want it before you finalize the disc as it can’t be changed  
afterwards. If you want to rename the disc, see Input Disc  
Name on page 147 before starting the steps below.  
Finalize  
DVD+RW discs don’t generally need finalizing. However,  
if you want a title menu to appear when you play the disc,  
then you will need to finalize. When using a DVD+RW,  
you can still record and edit even after finalizing.  
although the title menu will disappear if you do so.  
Finalize the disc again to generate a new title menu.  
• Discs recorded partially or fully on the Pioneer DVR-  
7000 DVD recorder do not support this feature. These  
discs will have only a text title menu when finalized on  
this recorder.  
Important  
• Once you’ve finalized a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or  
DVD+R disc, you can’t edit or record anything else  
on that disc. However, the finalization on a DVD-RW  
disc maybe ‘undone’; see Undo Finalize on page 148  
for how to do this.  
Note  
1 If the TV line system of the disc is different to the current setting of the recorder, you will not be able to finalize the disc. See Additional  
information about the TV system settings on page 161 for how to change the recorder’s setting.  
101  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
06  
5
The recorder will now start finalizing the disc.  
HOME  
MENU  
During finalization:  
SETUP  
1
2
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home Menu.  
Select ‘Initialize’ > ‘Video Mode’, ‘VR  
• If the finalization process of a DVD-RW or DVD+R/  
+RW disc is going to take more than around four  
minutes, you can press ENTER to cancel. Around  
four minutes before completion, the option to cancel  
disappears.  
ENTER  
Mode’ or ‘Initialize DVD+RW’.  
• You can’t cancel the finalization of a VR mode DVD-R  
disc.  
Disc Setup  
Start  
Start  
Start  
Basic  
VR Mode  
• How long finalization takes depends on the type of  
disc, how much is recorded on the disc and the  
number of titles on the disc. A disc recorded in VR  
mode can take up to one hour to finalize. DVD-R/-RW  
(Video mode) and DVD+R/+RW discs can take up to  
20 minutes.  
Initialize  
Finalize  
Video Mode  
Initialize DVD+RW  
Optimize HDD  
ENTER  
Initializing recordable DVD discs  
DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+RW DVD-RAM  
3
Select ‘Start’.  
It takes about 30 seconds to initialize the disc (except  
DVD-RAM discs, which can take up to an hour).  
DVD-R/-RW discs can be initialized for either Video mode  
1
recording or VR mode recording.  
Initializing Disc  
Pr 1  
1 min left  
When you first load a blank DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc,  
the recorder initializes it for recording automatically. By  
default, blank DVD-RW discs are initialized for VR mode  
recording. See DVD-RW Auto Initialize below if you want to  
change the default to Video mode.  
DVD-R discs are ready for Video mode recordings out of  
the box; if you want to use a DVD-R for VR mode  
recording, you must initialize it before recording anything  
on the disc.  
DVD-RW Auto Initialize  
DVD-RW  
• Default setting: VR Mode  
DVD+RW and DVD-RAM discs can also be initialized in  
order to erase the contents of the disc.  
Initialization mode is automatically carried out when you  
insert a blank DVD-RW. You must set the desired  
initialization mode before inserting a disc.  
Important  
HOME  
MENU  
• Initializing a DVD-RW, DVD+RW or DVD-RAM disc  
will erase everything recorded on it. Make sure there  
is nothing on the disc that you want to keep!  
SETUP  
1
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home Menu.  
• You may not be able to re-initialize a DVD-RW disc in  
a different format if it was originally initialized on an  
older DVD recorder.  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘Basic’>’DVD-RW Auto Init.’, then  
‘VR Mode’ or ‘Video Mode’.  
• Once initialized for VR mode recording, you can’t re-  
initialize a DVD-R back to Video mode.  
Disc Setup  
VR Mode  
Basic  
Input Disc Name  
Lock Disc  
Video Mode  
Initialize  
Finalize  
DVD-RW Auto Init.  
Optimize HDD  
Note  
1 If a disc was previously finalized on an older DVD recorder, you may not be able to re-initialize and/or initialize it for Video mode recording.  
102  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
07  
CPhlaapteyr b7 ack  
ꢊ
3
Start playback.  
Introduction  
• If you’re playing a DVD-Video or Video CD, a disc  
menu may appear when you start playback. Use the  
ꢄ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ buttons, number buttons, and ENTER to  
navigate DVD disc menus, and the number buttons  
and ENTER for Video CD menus.  
Most of the features described in this chapter make use  
of on-screen displays. Navigate these using the cursor  
buttons and ENTER. To go back one level from any  
screen, use the RETURN button.  
Remember also that the button guide at the bottom of  
every screen shows which buttons do what.  
• The Disc Navigator is automatically displayed for  
WMA/MP3 files and Audio CDs (see Using the Disc  
Navigator with playback-only discs on page 107).  
Many of the functions covered in this chapter apply to the  
HDD, DVD discs, Video CDs, Super VCDs, WMA/MP3/  
DivX discs and CDs, although the exact operation of  
some varies slightly with the kind of disc loaded.  
• This unit automatically searches for track names of  
Audio CDs (see About the automatic display of titles  
on page 107).  
• Many functions are not available when a Video CD is  
playing in PBC mode. Start playback from the Disc  
Navigator screen for non-PBC playback (see Using the  
Disc Navigator with playback-only discs on page 107).  
• When playing video from the HDD, playback will  
automatically stop after the end of a title is reached.  
• There may be a slight pause when playback switches  
from the first to the second layer of a dual-layer disc.  
• For discs that contain JPEG picture files, see The  
PhotoViewer on page 140.  
• See the following sections for more details on playing  
specific kinds of discs.  
ꢋ
4
5
Press to stop playback.  
Basic playback  
When you’ve finished using the recorder, eject  
ALL  
the disc and switch the recorder back into standby.  
This section shows you how to use your recorder for  
playback of discs (DVD, CD, etc.), and for playback of  
video from the HDD.  
Playing DVD discs  
The table below shows the basic playback controls for  
DVD-Video, and recordable DVD discs.  
Important  
Press to start playback.  
If RESUME is displayed on-screen, play-  
back starts from the place last stopped.  
ꢊ
• Throughout this manual, the term ‘DVD’ means any  
kind of playable or recordable DVD. If a function is  
specific to a particular kind of DVD disc, it is specified.  
(LCD page 1)  
Press to stop playback.  
ꢋ
• Some DVD-Video, DVD+R and DVD+RW discs don’t  
allow certain playback controls to operate at certain  
points in the disc. This is not a malfunction.  
You can resume playback from the same  
point by pressing ꢊ (Play). (Press ꢋ (Stop)  
again to cancel the resume function.)  
(LCD page 1)  
Pauses playback, or restarts playback  
when paused.  
HDD/  
DVD  
ꢉ
1
(LCD page 1) Select the HDD or DVD for  
playback.  
(LCD page 1)  
• If playing video from the HDD, skip to step 3 below.  
Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly  
to increase the scanning speed.  
ꢃ/  
ꢆ/  
ꢇ ꢈ  
• Select DVD for any kind of disc playback.  
ꢄ ꢅ  
(LCD page 1)  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
2
[Front panel] Load a disc.  
Press to skip to previous/next chapter/title.  
DVD+R/DVD+RW only:  
ꢁ (Previous) may not always skip to the  
previous title.  
Load a disc with the label side facing up, using the disc  
tray guide to align the disc (if you’re loading a double-  
sided DVD-Video disc, load it with the side you want to  
play face down).  
ꢁ
ꢂ
(LCD page 1)  
• If you want to play a DTS Audio CD, please first read  
the note on page 104.  
103  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
07  
Except VR mode: During playback, enter a  
chapter number then press ENTER to skip  
directly to that chapter within the currently  
playing title.  
On some discs, you can also use the num-  
ber buttons to select numbered items in  
the disc menu.  
Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly  
to increase the scanning speed.  
ꢃ/  
ꢆ/  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
ꢄ ꢅ  
ꢇ ꢈ  
(LCD page 1)  
9
CLEAR  
Press to skip to previous/next chapter/title.  
ꢁ
ꢂ
(LCD page 2)  
(LCD page 1)  
ENTER  
VR mode only: During playback, enter a  
title number then press ENTER.  
All: Press CLEAR to clear a number entry  
and start again.  
During playback, enter a title number then  
press ENTER to skip directly to that title.  
Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and  
start again.  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
CLEAR  
(Commercial back/skip)  
(LCD page 2)  
CM  
CM  
BACK SKIP  
Each press skips backward/ forward  
progressively up to a maximum of two  
hours in either direction.  
(LCD page 1)  
ENTER  
(Commercial back/skip)  
While paused, press and hold to start  
slow-motion playback. Press repeatedly to  
change the playback speed.  
While paused, press to advance a single  
frame in either direction.  
CM  
CM  
ꢃ/  
ꢆ/  
BACK SKIP  
ꢄ ꢅ  
ꢇ ꢈ  
Each press skips backward/ forward  
progressively up to a maximum of two  
hours in either direction.  
(LCD page 1)  
(LCD page 1)  
While paused, press and hold to start  
slow-motion playback. Press repeatedly to  
change the playback speed.  
While paused, press to advance a single  
frame in either direction.  
ꢃ/  
ꢄ ꢅ  
ꢆ/  
ꢇ ꢈ  
Press to display the menu of a DVD-Video  
disc. (DVD+R/+RW discs finalized on this  
recorder will display the Disc Navigator.  
Press MENU to display the disc menu.)  
TOP MENU MENU  
(LCD page 1)  
Use the cursor buttons to navigate DVD-  
Video disc menus; press ENTER to select  
items.  
ENTER  
Playing CDs and WMA/MP3 discs  
The table below shows the basic playback controls for  
1
Audio CDs , and WMA/MP3 files.  
Press to return to the previous level of a  
DVD-Video disc menu.  
RETURN  
Press to start playback.  
ꢊ
(LCD page 1)  
Playing from the HDD  
Press to stop playback.  
The table below shows the basic playback controls when  
playing video recorded on the hard disk (HDD).  
ꢋ
(LCD page 1)  
Press to start playback.  
If RESUME is displayed on-screen, play-  
back starts from the place last stopped.  
Playback automatically stops after the end  
of a title is reached.  
Pauses playback, or restarts playback  
when paused.  
ꢊ
ꢉ
(LCD page 1)  
(LCD page 1)  
Press to start scanning. Press again to  
ꢃ/  
ꢆ/  
ꢇ ꢈ  
ꢄ ꢅ  
increase the scanning speed. (There are  
two scan speeds; the current scan speed  
is shown on-screen.)  
Press to stop playback.  
(LCD page 1)  
ꢋ
You can resume playback from the same  
point by pressing ꢊ (Play). (Press ꢋ (Stop)  
again to cancel the resume function.)  
(LCD page 1)  
Press to skip to previous/next track.  
ꢁ
ꢂ
Pauses playback, or restarts playback  
when paused.  
(LCD page 1)  
ꢉ
(LCD page 1)  
Note  
1 If you want to play a DTS Audio CD, make sure the recorder is connected to a DTS-compatible amp/receiver with a digital connection. Noise  
will be output through the analog outputs. Also make sure that STEREO is selected using the  
channels on page 111).  
button (LCD page 3) (see Switching audio  
104  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
07  
Playing Video CD/Super VCDs  
The table below shows the basic playback controls for  
Video CD/Super VCDs.  
Playing DivX video files  
The table below shows the basic playback controls for  
DivX video files.  
Some discs feature Playback Control (PBC for short)  
menus. These discs show PBC in the display when you  
load them and display a menu on-screen from where you  
Press to start playback.  
If RESUME is displayed on-screen, play-  
back starts from the place last stopped.  
Playback of titles (DivX files) proceeds in  
alphabetical order.  
ꢊ
(LCD page 1)  
1
can select what to watch.  
Press to start playback.  
Video CD only: If RESUME is displayed on-  
ꢊ
Press to stop playback.  
ꢋ
(LCD page 1)  
screen, playback starts from the place last  
stopped.  
You can resume playback from the same  
point by pressing ꢊ (Play). (Press ꢋ (Stop)  
again to cancel the resume function.)  
(LCD page 1)  
Press to stop playback.  
ꢋ
Video CD only: You can resume playback  
from the same point by pressing  
ꢊ (Play). (Press ꢋ (Stop) again to  
cancel the resume function.)  
Pauses playback, or restarts playback  
when paused.  
ꢉ
(LCD page 1)  
(LCD page 1)  
Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly  
to increase the scanning speed.  
ꢃ/  
ꢄ ꢅ  
ꢆ/  
ꢇ ꢈ  
Pauses playback, or restarts playback  
when paused.  
ꢉ
(LCD page 1)  
(LCD page 1)  
Press to skip to previous/next title.  
ꢁ
ꢂ
Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly  
to increase the scanning speed.  
ꢃ/  
ꢄ ꢅ  
ꢆ/  
ꢇ ꢈ  
(LCD page 1)  
(LCD page 1)  
While paused, press to advance one  
frame. Press and hold to start slow motion  
playback (press repeatedly to change the  
slow motion play speed).  
ꢆ/  
ꢇ ꢈ  
Press to skip to previous/next track.  
When a PBC menu is displayed, press to  
display the previous/next page.  
ꢁ
ꢂ
(LCD page 1)  
(LCD page 1)  
Press to display the playback audio type;  
press repeatedly to change the playback  
audio type.  
During playback, enter a track number  
then press ENTER to skip directly to that  
track.  
Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and  
start again.  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
(LCD page 3)  
(LCD page 3)  
9
CLEAR  
Press to display subtitle information; press  
repeatedly to change subtitles.  
(LCD page 2)  
While a PBC menu screen is displayed,  
use to select numbered menu items.  
ENTER  
Video CD in non-PBC mode only:  
(Commercial back/skip)  
CM  
CM  
BACK SKIP  
(LCD page 1)  
Each press skips backward/forward  
progressively up to a maximum of two  
hours in either direction.  
While paused, press and hold to start  
slow-motion playback. Press repeatedly to  
change the playback speed (forward only).  
While paused, press to advance a single  
frame (forward only).  
ꢆ/  
ꢇ ꢈ  
(LCD page 1)  
Press to display the disc menu of a Video  
CD/Super VCD playing in PBC mode.  
RETURN  
Note  
1 When playing in PBC mode, some playback features, such as search, repeat and programme play are not available. You can play a PBC Video  
CD/Super VCD in non-PBC mode by starting playback using the Disc Navigator (see Using the Disc Navigator with playback-only discs on  
page 107).  
105  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
07  
Changing the display style of the Disc  
Navigator  
Using the Disc Navigator with  
recordable discs and the HDD  
You can choose to display titles in the Disc Navigator in  
various different ways, sorted alphabetically, by  
recording date, by genre, and so on. You can also choose  
whether to display four or eight titles on the screen at the  
same time.  
DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD  
You can use the Disc Navigator to browse and edit video  
on recordable DVDs and the HDD, and to view  
information on titles.  
See also Editing on page 117 for more on editing  
recordable discs.  
1
Display the view options panel.  
The view options panel  
HDD/  
DVD  
1
2
(LCD page 1) Select the HDD or DVD.  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10Titles  
23:00 FRI 3/12 Pr  
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
4
4
SP  
SP  
Style  
4
Titles  
DISC  
NAVIGATOR  
2h00m(1.0G)
Open the Disc Navigator.  
Sort order  
7
20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr  
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
9
9
SP  
SP  
2h00m(1.0G)  
SP  
SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Recent first  
MENU  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10  
Genre  
10Titles  
22:00 THU 2/12 Pr  
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr  
7
7
All Genres  
23:00 FRI 3/12 Pr  
4
SP  
SP  
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
4
2h00m(1.0G)
4
Titles  
19:00 MON 29/11 Pr  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
2
2
SP  
SP  
HDD  
SP  
9
8
7
20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr  
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
9
9
SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
SP  
2h00m(1.0G)  
SP  
SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Remain  
30h30m  
Recent first  
All Genres  
MENU  
22:00 THU 2/12 Pr  
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr  
7
7
ENTER  
19:00 MON 29/11 Pr  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
2
2
SP  
SP  
2
Choose ‘Style’, ‘Sort order’ or ‘Genre’,  
HDD  
SP  
then press ENTER to see the available view options.  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Remain  
30h30m  
• Style – Select four or eight titles per screen view  
• You can also access the Disc Navigator from the  
Home Menu.  
• Sort order – Sort by date (most recent first),  
unwatched first, title name or recording date (oldest  
first)  
• Genre – Display all genres or just a selected genre  
3
Browse the list of titles.  
• Use the ꢁ/ꢂ buttons (LCD page 1) to display the  
previous/next page of titles.  
ENTER  
3
Choose a view option, then press ENTER.  
The title list display is updated according to the new  
display preferences.  
• To change the thumbnail picture displayed for a title  
see Set Thumbnail on page 121.  
• For HDD recordings, you should be able to see a  
thumbnail title digest. If it doesn’t display, set Set  
Preview to Normal. See Set Preview on page 160.  
ENTER  
4
Play the highlighted title.  
• You can also select Play from the command menu  
options.  
106  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
07  
• Proceed to step 4 when playing back an Audio CD.  
Using the Disc Navigator with  
playback-only discs  
Disc Navigator (DVD/CD)  
Track List  
10 Tracks  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TRACK1  
Use the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc  
and start playback.  
TRACK2  
TRACK3  
TRACK4  
TRACK5  
TRACK6  
TRACK7  
TRACK8  
CD  
MENU  
DVD-Video Video CD Super VCD  
HDD/  
DVD  
TRACK1  
650MB  
HDD  
0.04.30 / 1.14.00  
classical  
1
2
3
Select DVD.  
TRACK3  
Track Repeat  
0.05.30  
10.00.00  
Remain  
100.0  
G
Stereo  
3
HOME  
MENU  
SETUP  
Display the Home Menu.  
ENTER  
3
Select a folder that contains the tracks or  
titles you want to play back.  
ENTER  
Select ‘Disc Navigator’.  
Alternatively, for a Video CD or Super VCD, you can press  
DISC NAVIGATOR, which takes you straight to the Disc  
Navigator screen.  
ENTER  
4
Select what you want to play.  
Playback starts after you press ENTER.  
• Use the  
/
(LCD page 3) buttons to display the  
ENTER  
previous/next page of folders/tracks/titles.  
4
Select what you want to play.  
• You can also select Play from the command menu  
options.  
Depending on the type of disc you have loaded, the Disc  
Navigator looks slightly different, but they are all  
navigated in the same way.  
• For discs that contain CD audio tracks and WMA/  
MP3 tracks or DivX titles, you can switch the playback  
area between CD, WMA/MP3 and DivX. Playback  
stops if you switch the playback area during  
playback. See Changing the display style of the Disc  
Navigator on page 108.  
The screen below shows a Video CD. Navigate to the  
track/chapter/title that you want to play.  
Track01  
Total 0.50.50  
Disc Navigator  
Track (01-99)  
Track01  
Track02  
Track03  
Track04  
Track05  
Track06  
Track07  
Track08  
Video CD  
• In case of an Audio CD, press DISP (LCD page 3) to  
display the detailed information (album name and  
artist name) on the track currently selected with a  
cursor.  
About the automatic display of titles  
This unit has built-in information on titles extracted from  
the Gracenote database.  
Playback starts after you press ENTER.  
®
This unit automatically searches for titles when you press  
ꢊ (Play) (LCD page 1) after loading an Audio CD or when  
you display the Disc Navigator. The following screen is  
displayed.  
CD WMA/MP3 DivX  
HDD/  
DVD  
1
2
Select DVD.  
HDD/DVD RECORDER  
Accessing to Gracenote Database  
DISC  
Open the Disc Navigator.  
NAVIGATOR  
• The Disc Navigator is also accessible from the Home  
Menu.  
Upon completion of search, album name, artist name,  
track name, and genre are automatically displayed.  
107  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
07  
• When multiple titles have been found, use ꢄ/ꢁ to  
select a title and press ENTER. If you select ‘No  
Information’ and press ENTER, ‘Unknown’ is  
displayed.  
ENTER  
2
Choose ‘Data Format’ or ‘Display Mode’,  
then press ENTER to see the available view options.  
• Data Format  
• ‘Unknown’ is displayed when there are no titles found.  
CD – Displays tracks on an Audio CD.  
WMA/MP3 – Displays WMA/MP3 folders or tracks.  
DivX – Displays DivX folders or titles.  
• Display Mode  
• Depending on the title, a different title name may be  
displayed.  
• Information on new CDs on sale may not be  
registered in the Gracenote database installed in this  
unit. Use the Update Disc with the latest data  
downloaded from the Pioneer website to update the  
built-in Gracenote database (see Gracenote Database  
on page 160).  
Folder – Switches to the folder display for WMA/MP3  
or DivX files.  
Track – Switches to the track display for WMA/MP3  
files.  
• GUI displays may show the Gracenote database as  
‘Database’.  
Title – Switches to the title display for DivX files.  
ENTER  
Reloading files from a WMA/MP3 disc  
When this unit reloads a WMA/MP3 disc with over 1000  
files or over 100 folders, the files and folders are displayed  
in the Disc Navigator.  
3
Choose a view option, then press ENTER.  
The title list display is updated according to the new  
display preferences.  
1
Navigate to the last entry in the folder list  
Scanning discs  
(‘Read next: ...’).  
ALL  
ENTER  
You can scan discs at various speeds, forwards or  
backwards.  
2
Load the next batch of up to 999 files/99  
2
folders from the disc.  
1
It takes several minutes for files to be reloaded.  
ꢅ
ꢈ
1
(LCD page 1) During playback, start  
reverse or forward scanning.  
• The scanning speed is shown on-screen.  
Changing the display style of the Disc  
Navigator  
You can display titles by data format or by folder/track.  
ꢅ
ꢈ
2
Press repeatedly to change the  
scanning speed.  
There are four scanning speeds available when playing  
HDD video, a DVD or a DivX title. Reverse playback is also  
possible with HDD and DVD-Video.  
1
Display the view options panel.  
The view options panel  
3
There are two scanning speeds for other types of disc.  
Disc Navigator (DVD/CD)  
Track List  
10 Tracks  
ꢊ
TRACK1  
3
Resume normal playback.  
Data Format  
TRACK2  
TRACK3  
TRACK4  
TRACK5  
WMA/MP3  
Display Mode  
Track  
MENU  
TRACK6  
TRACK7  
TRACK8  
TRACK1  
HDD  
WMA 999MB  
TRACK3  
Track Repeat  
0.05.30  
10.00.00  
Remain  
100.0  
G
Stereo  
3
Note  
1 You can press HOME MENU to exit the Disc Navigator screen while the recorder is reloading files.  
2 • No subtitles are displayed when scanning DVDs and DivX titles.  
• No sound is output when scanning from the HDD, DVDs and DivX, except on forward SCAN 1.  
• Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached on a DVD disc.  
3 Reverse playback may not be smooth.  
108  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
07  
HOME  
MENU  
Playing in slow motion  
•
SETUP Select ‘Play Mode’ from the Home Menu.  
DVD HDD Video CD Super VCD DivX  
Play Mode  
Time Search  
Title Search  
Chapter Search  
Search Mode  
A-B Repeat  
Repeat  
You can play video at various slow motion speeds. DVDs  
and video on the HDD can be played in slow motion in  
either direction, while Video CDs/Super VCDs and DivX  
titles can only be played forwards in slow motion.  
Programme  
There is no sound when playing in slow motion.  
• Select Play Mode from the command menu for  
Audio CDs, WMA/MP3 files, or DivX files by pressing  
ꢉ
2
1
(LCD page 1) Pause playback.  
ꢃ in the Disc Navigator.  
ꢃ/  
ꢄ ꢅ  
ꢆ/  
ꢇ ꢈ  
2
Press and hold to start slow motion  
reverse or forward play.  
Search Mode  
DVD HDD Video CD Super VCD DivX  
ꢃ/  
ꢄ ꢅ  
ꢆ/  
ꢇ ꢈ  
3
Press repeatedly to change the slow  
motion speed.  
The current playback speed is indicated on-screen.  
The Search Mode feature lets you start playback from a  
specified point in a disc by time or by title/chapter/track  
3
number.  
ꢊ
4
Resume normal playback.  
ENTER  
1
Select ‘Search Mode’ from the Play Mode  
menu, then choose a search option.  
The available search options depend on the type of disc.  
Frame advance/frame reverse  
DVD HDD Video CD Super VCD DivX  
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
1
You can advance or back up video on a DVD disc or the  
HDD frame-by-frame.  
2
(LCD page 2) Enter a title/chapter/track  
number or a search time.  
With Video CDs/Super VCDs and DivX titles, you can only  
use frame advance.  
Play Mode  
Time Search  
Title Search  
Chapter Search  
Input Time  
0.01.00  
Search Mode  
A-B Repeat  
Repeat  
ꢉ
1
(LCD page 1) Pause playback.  
Programme  
ꢃ/  
ꢄ ꢅ  
ꢆ/  
ꢇ ꢈ  
2
Back up or advance one frame with  
each press.  
Time Search (HDD, DVD): For example, for 25 minutes  
into the current title, press 2, 5, 0, 0. For 1 hour and 15  
minutes and 20 seconds into the title, press 1, 1, 5, 2, 0.  
ꢊ
3
Resume normal playback.  
Time Search (Video CD): For example, for 2 minutes and 30  
seconds into the current track, press 2, 3, 0.  
The Play Mode menu  
Title/Chapter/Track Search: For example, for track 6, press  
6.  
ALL  
The Play Mode menu gives you access to search  
functions, repeat and programme play functions.  
ENTER  
3
Start playback.  
Note  
1 Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached.  
2 For DivX files, select Play Mode in the Disc Navigator while playback is stopped and in the Home Menu during playback respectively.  
3 When using time search, playback may occasionally start slightly before or after the time you input.  
109  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
07  
A-B Repeat  
ENTER  
DVD HDD CD Video CD DivX  
•
Select ‘Repeat’ from the Play Mode menu,  
then choose a repeat play mode.  
The A-B Repeat function allows you to specify two points  
(A and B) within a track or title that form a loop which is  
played over and over.  
Play Mode  
1
Repeat Title  
Repeat Chapter  
Repeat Off  
Search Mode  
A-B Repeat  
Repeat  
Programme  
ENTER  
1
During playback, select ‘A-B Repeat’ from  
the Play Mode menu.  
• To resume normal playback, select Repeat Off from  
the Repeat Play menu, or press CLEAR (LCD page 2)  
if no menu OSD (such as the Play Mode menu) is  
displayed.  
ENTER  
2
With ‘A (Loop Start)’ highlighted, press at  
the point you want the loop to start.  
Play Mode  
A (Loop Start)  
B (Loop End)  
Off  
Search Mode  
A-B Repeat  
Repeat  
Programme play  
Programme  
HDD DVD-Video CD Video CD Super VCD WMA/MP3  
This feature lets you program the play order of titles/  
3
chapters /folders/tracks on a disc or the HDD.  
ENTER  
3
With ‘B (Loop End)’ highlighted, press at the  
ENTER  
point you want the loop to end.  
1
Select ‘Programme’ from the Play Mode  
Playback immediately jumps back to the start point and  
plays the loop round and round.  
menu, then ‘Input/Edit Programme’.  
The Input/Edit Programme screen varies according to the  
disc type. Below is the DVD input screen.  
•
When playing a DVD-Video, DVD-R/-RW (Video mode),  
DVD+R/+RW, or from the HDD, the start and end  
points of the loop must be in the same title.  
Programme  
• To resume normal playback, select Off from the A-B  
Repeat menu, or press CLEAR (LCD page 2) if no  
menu OSD (such as the Play Mode menu) is  
displayed.  
Step  
01.001  
02.  
03.  
04.  
05.  
06.  
07.  
08.  
Title (01-03)  
Title 01  
Title 02  
Chapter(001-015)  
Chapter 001  
Chapter 002  
Chapter 003  
Chapter 004  
Chapter 005  
Chapter 006  
Chapter 007  
Chapter 008  
Title 03  
Repeat play  
ALL  
There are various repeat play options, depending on the  
kind of disc loaded, or if you’re using the HDD for  
playback. It’s also possible to use repeat play together  
with programme play to repeat the tracks/chapters in the  
ENTER  
2
Select a title, chapter, folder or track for  
the current step in the programme list.  
After pressing ENTER to add the title/chapter/folder/  
track, the step number automatically moves down one.  
2
programme list (see Programme play below).  
• To insert a step into the programme list, highlight the  
step number where you want to insert another step,  
then select a chapter/title/folder/track as usual. After  
pressing ENTER, all the subsequent steps move  
down one.  
Note  
1 If you switch camera angles on a DVD during A-B repeat play, A-B repeat is cancelled.  
2 If you switch the camera angle during repeat play of a DVD-Video disc, repeat play is cancelled.  
3 When playing a programme list of DVD-Video chapters, chapters not included in the programme list may be sometimes be played, depending  
on the disc.  
110  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
07  
• To delete a step from the programme list, highlight  
the step you want to delete, then press CLEAR (LCD  
page 2).  
•
(LCD page 3) Select/change the subtitle  
language.  
The current subtitle language is shown on-screen and in  
the front panel display.  
3
Repeat step 2 to build up a programme list.  
A programme list can contain up to 24 titles/chapters/  
folders/tracks.  
• To switch off subtitles, press  
then CLEAR (LCD  
page 2).  
ꢊ
4
(LCD page 1) Play the programme list.  
Programme play remains active until you cancel  
programme play, erase the programme list, eject the disc  
or switch off the recorder.  
Switching DVD and DivX soundtracks  
DVD-Video DivX  
When playing a DVD disc or DivX title recorded with two  
or more soundtracks (often in different languages), you  
can switch the soundtrack during playback.  
Tip  
• To save your programme list and exit the programme  
edit screen without starting playback, press  
HOME MENU.  
2
Check the disc packaging for details of the soundtrack  
options.  
• During programme play, press ꢂ (Next) (LCD page  
1) to skip to the next programme step.  
•
(LCD page 3) Change the audio soundtrack.  
• To repeat play the programme list, select  
Programme Repeat from the Repeat Play Mode  
menu (see Repeat play on page 110).  
The current audio language is shown on-screen and in  
the front panel display.  
• The sound may drop out for a few seconds when  
switching soundtracks.  
• Except CD, WMA/MP3: Press CLEAR (LCD page 2)  
during playback to switch off programme play (if no  
menu OSD, such as the Disc Navigator, is displayed).  
Press while stopped to erase the programme list.  
• From the programme menu you can also:  
Start Programme Play – Starts playback of a saved  
programme list  
Switching audio channels  
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM HDD CD Video CD Super VCD WMA/MP3  
Cancel Programme Play – Turns off programme  
play, but does not erase the programme list  
Erase Programme List – Erases the programme list  
and turns off programme play  
3
For HDD and VR mode content recorded with bilingual  
audio, you can switch between left (L) channel, right (R)  
channel, or both (L+R).  
4
When playing Video CDs and Audio CDs you can switch  
between stereo, just the left channel or just the right  
channel.  
Displaying and switching subtitles  
Some Super VCDs have two soundtracks. With these  
discs you can switch between the two soundtracks as  
well as individual channels in each.  
DVD-Video DivX  
Some DVD and DivX discs have subtitles in one or more  
languages; the disc box will usually tell you which subtitle  
languages are available. You can switch subtitle  
•
(LCD page 3) Press repeatedly to display/  
1
switch the audio channel.  
language during playback.  
The audio channel(s) currently playing are indicated on-  
screen.  
Check the disc packaging for details of the subtitle  
options.  
Note  
1 • Some discs only allow you to change subtitle language from the disc menu. Press MENU or TOP MENU to access.  
• To set subtitle preferences, see Subtitle Language on page 156.  
2 • Some discs only allow you to change audio language from the disc menu. Press MENU or TOP MENU to access.  
• To set audio language preferences, see Audio Language on page 156.  
3 Only when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off (HDD Recording Format on page 158).  
4 • When playing a Bilingual recording on a VR mode disc, if you are listening to the Dolby Digital soundtrack via the digital output, you cannot  
switch the audio channel. Set Dolby Digital Out to Dolby Digital ꢅ PCM (see Dolby Digital Out on page 155) or listen via the analog outputs  
if you need to switch the audio channel.  
• When playing a Dolby Digital source, you can also switch channels from the Dual Mono menu of the receiver subwoofer — see Dual mono  
setting on page 38.  
111  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
07  
HDD and removable disc activity display  
Press DISP once to see the HDD and removable disc  
(DVD, etc.) activity. Use the HDD/DVD button (LCD page 1)  
to switch between the two kinds of display.  
HDD DVD (VR) DVD-RAM  
L+R – Both channels (default)  
L – Left channel only  
R – Right channel only  
The example displays below show high-speed copying  
from HDD to DVD, and HDD chase playback.  
WMA/MP3  
CD Video CD  
Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD)  
Stereo – Stereo (default)  
1/L – Left channel only  
2/R – Right channel only  
HDD  
Hi-Speed Copy  
HDD ꢅ DVD  
DVD-RW Video  
Remain 10h35m  
Stop  
Remain –h––m  
Stop  
0h08m left  
Super VCD  
1 Stereo – Soundtrack 1/Stereo (default)  
1 L – Soundtrack 1/Left channel  
1 R – Soundtrack 1/Right channel  
2 Stereo – Soundtrack 2/Stereo  
2 L – Soundtrack 2/Left channel  
2 R – Soundtrack 2/Right channel  
Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD)  
HDD  
DVD-RW Video  
Remain 10h35m  
Chase Play  
Rec  
Remain 0h52m  
Stop  
Recording time  
Switching camera angles  
Relative playback position  
DVD-Video  
Shows recording restrictions for  
the current channel programme  
Some DVD-Video discs feature scenes shot from two or  
more angles — check the disc box for details: it should be  
marked with a  
icon if it contains multi-angle scenes.  
ꢋStop  
DVD-RW VR  
Original  
ABC Pr 1  
Stereo  
Copy Once  
When a multi-angle scene is playing, the same icon  
appears on screen to let you know that other angles are  
available (this can be switched off if you prefer — see  
Angle Indicator on page 158).  
Resume  
XP (1h00m/DVD)  
Finalized  
Rem. 0h35m  
Disc Name  
:
Comedy shows  
DVD Mode  
•
(LCD page 3) Switch the camera angle.  
• The angle number is displayed on-screen.  
Indicates copy-protected material  
Indicates a multi-angle scene  
• If the disc was paused, playback starts again with the  
new angle.  
ꢊPlay  
3–2  
0. 00. 15  
!
DVD-R Video Chapter Time 0. 00. 21  
Chapter Total 0h01m52s  
ꢉꢉꢉꢉꢉꢉꢉ  
4.32Mbps  
Displaying disc information on-screen  
Title Name  
:
21/11 Football match  
You can display various on-screen information about the  
disc loaded or the HDD.  
Indicates the data transfer rate  
DISP  
•
(LCD page 3) Display/change the on-screen  
information.  
Tip  
• Press once to show the HDD and removable disc  
(DVD, etc.) activity together. Press again to show the  
status of just the currently selected playback/  
recording device (HDD or removable disc).  
• See Switching camera angles above for more on  
multi-angle scene switching.  
• When using the simultaneous play and record  
feature, the display shows information for playback  
only.  
• To hide the information display, press DISP  
repeatedly until it disappears.  
112  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
07  
• During real-time copy, the copy source playback  
information is displayed.  
• The Video mode DVD-R/-RW displays become the  
same as a DVD-Video disc once the disc is finalized.  
• The total recording time figure shown in parenthesis  
is calculated based on a 12 cm/4.7 GB disc at the  
displayed record setting.  
• Recording and playback times for TV recordings are  
approximately 0.1 % shorter than the actual time.  
This is because of the slightly different frame rates of  
TV broadcasts versus DVD.  
• The frame number is shown next to the elapsed time  
display when the disc is paused.  
• Copy Once or Can’t Record messages may appear  
in the stop or recording displays. These indicate that  
the broadcast TV programme contains copy control  
information.  
113  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing and recording from a DV camcorder  
08  
CPhlaapteyr i8ng and recording from a DV  
camcorder  
You can play back and record video from a DV camcorder  
connected to the DV IN jack on the front panel of this  
recorder.  
Recording from a DV camcorder  
• The source signal must be DVC-SD format.  
• You can’t record date and time information from DV  
cassette.  
Important  
• If you connect a second recorder using a DV cable,  
you cannot control the second unit from this one.  
• During DV recording, if a part of the tape is blank, or  
has copy-protected material on it, this recorder will  
pause recording. Recording will restart automatically  
when there is a recordable signal. However, if there is  
more than two minutes of blank tape, this recorder  
will stop recording and the camcorder should stop  
(depending on the camcorder).  
• You can’t control this recorder remotely from a  
component connected to the DV IN jack.  
Playing from a DV camcorder  
Copying from a DV source  
Using the recorder’s remote, you can control both the  
camcorder and this recorder.  
1
Make sure your DV camcorder is connected to the  
front panel DV IN jack.  
2
From the Initial Setup menu, check that the DV  
audio input is setup as you would like.  
See DV Input on page 155 for more on this.  
Important  
• Check also that the Audio In settings for External  
Audio and Bilingual Recording are as you want  
them (see Audio In on page 155).  
• Some camcorders cannot be controlled using this  
recorder’s remote.  
• For best results when recording from a DV camcorder  
to this recorder, we recommend cueing the  
camcorder to the place you want to start recording  
from and setting the camcorder to play-pause.  
HOME  
MENU  
SETUP  
3
Select ‘DV’, then ‘DV Video Playback’ from  
the Home Menu.  
1
Make sure your DV camcorder is connected to the  
front panel DV IN jack.  
Also, set the camcorder to VTR mode.  
4
Start playback on the camcorder.  
Images from the camcorder should appear on your TV.  
• To record the incoming video, press HDD/DVD (LCD  
page 1) to select the HDD or a DVD for recording,  
then press ì REC (LCD page 1). Press STOP REC  
(LCD page 1) to finish recording.  
If there is no signal from the device connected to the  
DV jack, or the signal is copy-protected, recording  
will pause. It will automatically restart once there is a  
recordable signal.  
REC  
MODE  
2
(LCD page 1) Set the recording quality.  
• See Setting the picture quality/recording time on  
page 95 for detailed information.  
3
From the Initial Setup menu, check that the DV  
audio input is setup as you would like.  
See DV Input on page 155 for more on this.  
• Check also that the Audio In settings for External  
Audio and Bilingual Recording are as you want  
them (see Audio In on page 155).  
• The recorder will only start recording from the DV IN  
jack if there is a valid signal. Recording will pause if  
the signal is interrupted during recording.  
• If your source is copy-protected using Copy Guard,  
you will not be able to record it. See Restrictions on  
video recording on page 92 for more details.  
HOME  
MENU  
SETUP  
4
Select ‘DV’, then ‘Copy from a DV Source’  
from the Home Menu.  
• DV recording only works when the DV camcorder is  
in VTR mode with a tape loaded.  
114  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing and recording from a DV camcorder  
08  
DV Auto Copy  
ENTER  
DV Auto Copy allows you to make an exact copy of the  
contents of a DV source to the HDD or a DVD.  
5
Select ‘Record to Hard Disk Drive’ or  
‘Record to DVD’.  
1
Make sure your DV camcorder is connected to the  
6
Find the place on the camcorder tape that you  
front panel DV IN jack.  
Also, set the camcorder to VTR mode.  
want to start recording from.  
For best results, pause playback at the point from which  
you want to record.  
REC  
MODE  
2
(LCD page 1) Set the recording quality.  
• See Setting the picture quality/recording time on  
page 95 for detailed information.  
• Depending on your camcorder, you can use this  
recorder’s remote to control the camcorder using the  
ꢋ, ꢊ, ꢉ, ꢅ , ꢈ , ꢃ and ꢆ buttons (LCD page 1).  
3
From the Initial Setup menu, check that the DV  
audio input is setup as you require.  
ENTER  
7
Select ‘Start Rec’.  
See DV Input on page 155 for more on this.  
• Check also that the Audio In settings for External  
Audio and Bilingual Recording are as you want  
them (see Audio In on page 155).  
ꢋStop  
1.02.22  
ꢋStop  
Control with these  
Start Rec  
Pause Rec  
Stop Rec  
HOME  
MENU  
buttons  
ꢅ
ꢉ
ꢊ
ꢋ
ꢈ
ꢃ
SETUP  
ꢆ
4
Select ‘DV’, then ‘DV Auto Copy’ from the  
Home Menu.  
• DV recording only works when the DV camcorder is  
in VTR mode with a tape loaded.  
HDD  
Rem.  
SP (2h00m/DVD)  
32h45m  
• You can pause or stop the recording by selecting  
Pause Rec or Stop Rec from the on-screen display.  
You cannot control the camcorder from this remote  
control during recording.  
ENTER  
5
Select ‘Record to Hard Disk Drive’ or  
‘Record to DVD’.  
The DV tape is rewound to the beginning. Once it is  
rewound, the DV tape is played from the beginning and  
copied to either the HDD or a DVD.  
• If you restart recording after stopping the camcorder,  
the first few seconds of the camcorder tape will not be  
recorded. Use the pause button on your camcorder  
instead and recording will start immediately.  
• If there is a gap of two minutes or more between  
recorded contents, the copying process is  
automatically stopped.  
• HDD, DVD (VR Mode) and DVD-RAM only: A chapter  
marker is inserted every time there is a break in the  
timecode on the DV tape. This happens when the  
recording is stopped or paused then restarted, for  
example.  
• Once copying is finished, the DV tape is automatically  
rewound.  
• To cancel the copying process, press STOP REC (LCD  
page 1) for more than three seconds.  
• If you don’t want to see the DV recording screen  
during recording, press DISP (LCD page 3) to hide it  
(press again to display).  
• While recording, you cannot exit the DV recording  
screen using the HOME MENU or RETURN button.  
115  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing and recording from a DV camcorder  
08  
About automatic finalization  
If you use a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW  
disc for copying, it will automatically be finalized after  
copying is complete.  
About DV  
Using DV, also known as i.LINK or IEEE 1394-1995, you  
can connect a DV camcorder to this recorder using a DV  
cable for input of audio, video, data and control signals.  
• You can’t customize the background for DVD-R/-RW  
or DVD+R/+RW disc finalization.  
“i.LINK” and the “i.LINK” logo are trademarks.  
• No title names are assigned.  
• This recorder is only compatible with DV-format  
(DVC-SD) camcorders. Digital satellite receivers and  
Digital VHS video recorders are not compatible.  
• If you want to give the disc a name, please do so  
before you start the copy (see Input Disc Name on  
page 147).  
• You cannot connect more than one DV camcorder at  
a time to this recorder.  
• If a timer recording is scheduled to start, and in some  
other instances, the disc will not be finalized.  
• You cannot control this recorder from external  
equipment connected via the DV IN jack.  
• It may not always be possible to control the  
connected camcorder via the DV IN jack.  
Frequently Asked Questions  
• I can’t get my DV camcorder to work with the recorder!  
• DV camcorders can usually record audio as stereo  
16-bit/48 kHz, or twin stereo tracks of 12-bit/32 kHz.  
This recorder can only record one stereo audio track.  
Set the DV Input setting as required (see DV Input on  
page 155).  
Check that the DV cable is properly connected. Also  
make sure that what you’re trying to record is not  
copy-protected.  
If it still doesn’t work, try switching off the camcorder  
then switch back on.  
• Audio input to the DV IN jack should be 32 kHz or 48  
kHz (not 44.1 kHz).  
• There’s a picture, but no sound!  
• Picture disturbance in the recording may occur if the  
source component pauses playback or plays an  
unrecorded section of tape, or if the power fails in the  
source component, or the DV cable is disconnected.  
Try switching the DV Input setting (see DV Input on  
page 155) between Stereo 1 and Stereo 2.  
1
• The DV IN jack is an input only. There is no output  
functionality.  
Note  
1 If the audio subcode on the DV tape cannot be read correctly, the audio type will not switch automatically. You can switch the audio manually  
from the External Audio setting (page 155).  
116  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
09  
CEhdapitetri9ng  
Editing options  
The table below shows which commands you can use with the HDD and different disc types.  
DVD-R/-RW  
(Video mode),  
DVD+R/+RW  
DVD-R/-RW, DVD-RAM  
(VR mode)  
HDD  
Original  
Play List  
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
Create (page 119)  
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
Play (page 119)  
Erase (page 119)  
Edit > Title Name (page 120)  
Edit > Set Thumbnail (page 121)  
Edit > Erase Section (page 121)  
Edit > Divide (page 122)  
Edit > Chapter Edit (page 122)  
Edit > Set Genre (page 123)  
Edit > Lock (page 124)  
Edit > Move (page 124)  
Edit > Combine (page 125)  
Genre Name (page 125)  
Multi-Mode (page 126)  
Undo (page 126)  
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì *1  
ì *1  
*1 DVD-R/-RW only  
117  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
09  
HDD/  
DVD  
•
Press to switch between the HDD and DVD Disc  
The Disc Navigator screen  
Navigator screens.  
The Disc Navigator screen is where you can edit video  
content on unfinalized Video mode and DVD-R/-RW (VR  
mode) discs, DVD+R/+RW and DVD-RAM, as well as  
video content on the hard disk drive.  
• If you are editing a DVD-R/-RW (VR mode) or DVD  
-RAM disc you can display the Play List by selecting  
Play List from the view options panel (press ꢂ, then  
select Play List from the view options, then Play List).  
Important  
Disc Navigator (DVD)  
10Titles  
23:00 FRI 3/12  
Style  
• Titles that have been recorded with a Input Line  
System setting different to the current setting of the  
recorder are shown in the Disc Navigator with a blank  
thumbnail image. See also Additional information  
about the TV system settings on page 161.  
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
4
SP  
2h00m(1.0G)
4
Titles  
7
20:00 FRI 3/12  
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
PlayList  
9
SP  
2h00m(1.0G)  
Original  
MENU  
22:00 THU 2/12 Pr  
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr  
7
7
SP  
SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
19:00 MON 29/11 Pr  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
2
2
SP  
SP  
HDD  
SP  
• During recording, if you display the Disc Navigator  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Remain  
0h30m  
for the HDD, some of the titles may appear with a  
mark. These titles were recorded with a Input Line  
System setting different to the current setting of the  
recorder. During recording, these titles cannot be  
played.  
• Titles on the HDD marked with a  
recently recorded titles that haven’t yet been played.  
icon are  
DISC  
3
Press to exit the Disc Navigator.  
NAVIGATOR  
HDD/  
DVD  
1
2
(LCD page 1) Select the HDD or DVD.  
Editing accuracy  
Some editing commands ask you whether you want to  
keep Video mode compatibility or frame accuracy (Video  
Mode Compatible Editing or Frame Accurate Editing).  
DISC  
NAVIGATOR  
Display the Disc Navigator screen.  
Playback will automatically stop when you do this.  
• The Disc Navigator is also accessible from the Home  
Menu.  
Frame Accurate Editing is very precise. The edit point is  
accurate to the exact frame you choose. However, this  
accuracy is not preserved in any copy you make if you use  
the high-speed copy function to make a DVD-R/-RW  
(Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW.  
View options panel  
Title list  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10Titles  
10
23:00 FRI 3/12 Pr  
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
4
4
SP  
SP  
h00m(1.0G)
Video Mode Compatible Editing is less precise. The edit  
point you choose will only be accurate to within one-half  
to one second. On the other hand, these edit points will  
be preserved if you use high-speed copy to make a DVD  
-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW.  
Selected  
title  
2
4
Titles  
9
8
7
20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr  
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
9
9
SP  
SP  
Recent first  
All Genres  
MENU  
2h00m(1.0G)  
22:00 THU 2/12 Pr  
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr  
7
7
SP  
SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
19:00 MON 29/11 Pr  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
2
2
SP  
SP  
HDD  
SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Remain  
30h30m  
Available  
recording time  
Title thumbnail Title information Command  
menu panel  
HDD genres  
The large capacity of the HDD means that there may be  
many hours of video in the recorder. To help you organize  
your HDD video content you can assign different genres  
to titles. There are 20 genres in total, including five user-  
definable ones that you can name as you like.  
•
Press to display the command menu panel.  
Use the ꢄ/ꢁ and ENTER buttons to navigate the  
menus.  
ꢁ
ꢂ
•
•
(LCD page 1) When in the title list, press to  
display the previous/next page if there are more titles  
than can be displayed.  
DISP  
(LCD page 3) Press to change the title  
information displayed in the title list.  
118  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
09  
Create  
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘Play’ from the command menu  
Play List only  
panel.  
Use this function to create a Play List and add titles to it.  
Playback of the title you selected starts.  
Before you can use this command, make sure that the  
Play List is switched on in the view options panel on the  
left.  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10Titles  
10  
23:00 FRI 3/12 Pr SP  
4
Play  
SP  
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
4
Erase  
2
Edit  
4
Titles  
ENTER  
9
8
7
20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr  
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
9
9
S
S
1
Select ‘Create’ from the command menu  
Recent first  
All Genres  
panel.  
Genre Name  
S
22:00 THU 2/12 Pr  
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr  
7
7
S
Multi-Mode
Disc Navigator (DVD)  
0Titles  
19:00 MON 29/11 Pr  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
2
2
SP  
SP  
HDD  
SP  
Play  
No title  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Remain  
30h30m  
Erase  
2
Edit  
4
Titles  
Play List  
Create  
Erase  
DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD  
Undo  
DVD  
Use this function to erase unwanted titles.  
VR Mode  
Remain  
0h30m  
When you erase titles from the HDD or Original titles  
from a VR mode DVD-RW, the available recording space  
increases accordingly. Erasing a title from a DVD-RW  
(Video mode) or DVD+RW disc increases the available  
ENTER  
2
Select an original title to add to the Play  
1
recording time only if it is the last title on the disc.  
List.  
Erasing Play List titles, or titles from a DVD-R (VR mode  
or Video mode) or DVD+R, will not result in any more free  
space on the disc.  
Repeat these two steps to add as many titles as  
necessary to the Play List.  
Play  
1
2
Highlight the title you want to erase.  
Select ‘Erase’ from the command menu  
DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD  
Use this function to start playback of a title.  
ENTER  
panel.  
1
Highlight the title you want to play.  
ENTER  
3
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel.  
Tip  
• You can erase a title quickly by pressing CLEAR (LCD  
page 2) when the title is highlighted. Confirm the edit  
by pressing ENTER.  
Note  
1 There may be cases where erasing a title from a DVD+R/+RW disc will result in incontiguous title numbers.  
119  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
09  
• You can also use the CLEAR button (LCD page 2) to  
delete characters directly (press and hold for two  
seconds to delete the whole name).  
Title Name  
DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD  
• For discs formatted on a different DVD recorder, you  
will see only a limited character set.  
You can give titles new names of up to 64 characters long  
for VR mode, DVD-RAM and HDD recordings, and up to  
40 characters for Video mode recordings and DVD+R/  
+RW discs.  
ENTER  
4
Select ‘OK’ to enter the name and return  
to the main Disc Navigator screen.  
• To return to the main Disc Navigator screen without  
1
Highlight the title you want to name (or  
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Title Name’ from the  
saving changes to the title name, press RETURN  
.
rename).  
Using a USB keyboard to enter a name  
ENTER  
Using a USB keyboard connected to this recorder makes  
2
1
entering names very quick and convenient. When in  
command menu panel.  
USB keyboard input mode, a USB icon ( ) appears in  
2
the lower-left of the screen.  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10Titles  
Other than the standard alpha-numeric keys, use the  
following keys when entering names:  
10  
23:00 FRI 3/12 Pr SP  
4
Title Name  
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
4
Set Thumbnail  
4
Titles  
Erase Section  
9
8
7
20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr  
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
9
9
Key  
Function  
Divide  
Chapter Edit  
Recent first  
All Genres  
Set Genre  
Change the cursor position  
22:00 THU 2/12 Pr  
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr  
Lock
ꢂ ꢃ  
Cancel  
19:00 MON 29/11 Pr  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
2
2
SP  
SP  
Select CAPS  
HDD  
SP  
F1  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Remain  
30h30m  
Select small  
F2  
ENTER  
Delete character at the current cursor  
position  
3
Input a name for the selected title.  
delete  
Input Title Name  
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP  
Delete the character at the previous  
cursor position  
back  
space  
A B C D E  
F
G H  
I
J
K L M  
.
(
I
,
)
I
ß
_
}
˚
`
?
:
!
;
CAPS  
small  
N
A
D
0
O
A
N
1
P
A
O
2
Q
A
O
3
R
A
O
4
S T U V WX Y  
Z
I
Enter the name  
ç
enter  
A
O
5
[
§
·
Æ
O
6
E
U
8
ˆ
E
U
9
÷
<<  
E
U
<
x
E
U
=
I
#
%
ø
7
]
Y
>
{
$
&
~
+
–
/
@
¥
|
¡
_
¿
Exit the input screen  
a
–
c
£
\
µ
¨
¸
©
¬
–
/2  
®
/4  
esc  
< < 14  
/
o
–
1
3
2
3
1
´
OK  
Clear  
Space  
• A name generated automatically by the recorder will  
already be in the name input section of the screen.  
Use the ꢅ/ꢈ buttons (LCD page 1) to change the  
cursor position.  
• Select CAPS or small to change to upper or lower-  
case, or use the CASE SELECTION buttons  
(ꢁ/ꢂ (LCD page 1)).  
Note  
1 • It’s possible that some USB keyboards will not work exactly as expected when connected to this recorder. See also Connecting a USB device  
on page 67 for more connection information.  
• Certain keyboards may not be able to correctly input all characters.  
2 If you use the remote control to enter a name when in the USB keyboard input mode, the recorder will automatically switch to remote control  
input mode. Press any key on the USB keyboard to return to USB keyboard input mode.  
120  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
09  
Set Thumbnail  
Erase Section  
HDD DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM  
HDD DVD (VR) DVD-RAM  
You can change the thumbnail picture that appears in  
the Disc Navigator for a title to any frame that appears in  
that title.  
Using this command you can delete a part of a title, ideal  
for cutting out the commercial breaks in a recording  
made from the TV.  
1
Highlight the title you want to change the  
1
Highlight the title containing the section  
thumbnail picture for.  
you want to erase.  
ENTER  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Set Thumbnail’ from the  
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Erase Section’ from the  
command menu panel.  
command menu panel.  
The thumbnail setting screen appears from which you  
can find the frame you want.  
ENTER  
3
HDD only: Select the type of edit.  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10Titles  
10  
HDD/DVD RECORDER  
Please select the type of editing.  
23:00 FRI 3/12 Pr SP  
4
4
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
Title Name  
Set Thumbnail  
4
Titles  
Video Mode Compatible Editing is  
recommended for compatibility with  
high-speed copying.  
Erase Section  
9
8
7
20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr  
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
9
9
Divide  
Chapter Edit  
Recent first  
All Genres  
Set Genre  
22:00 THU 2/12 Pr  
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr  
Lock
Cancel
Video Mode Compatible Editing  
Frame Accurate Editing  
19:00 MON 29/11 Pr  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
2
2
SP  
SP  
HDD  
SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Remain  
30h30m  
• For more information about these options, see  
Editing accuracy on page 118.  
3
Use the playback controls (ꢊ, ꢉ, ꢅ, ꢈ, etc.  
(LCD page 1)) to find a suitable frame, then press  
ENTER to set.  
4
Highlight ‘From’ then use the playback controls  
(ꢊ, ꢉ, ꢅ, ꢈ, etc. (LCD page 1)) to find the start of  
the section to erase, then press ENTER.  
Set Thumbnail (HDD)  
The bar at the bottom of the screen indicates the current  
play position in the title. After pressing ENTER, a marker  
shows the start of the section.  
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP  
2h00m  
Rec. time  
10-1 00.00.09.15  
Play Pause  
Erase Section (HDD)  
ꢉ
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP  
OK  
Exit  
2h00m  
Rec. time  
You can also use the chapter and time search features  
(press the YELLOW button), and the CM SKIP/CM BACK  
(LCD page 1)).  
10-1 00.00.09.15  
ꢉ
Play Pause  
From  
To  
Exit  
4
Select ‘Exit’ to return to the Edit screen.  
121  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
09  
4
Use the playback controls (ꢊ, ꢉ, ꢅ, ꢈ, etc.  
ENTER  
(LCD page 1)) to find the place you want to divide the  
title.  
5
Highlight ‘To’ then, in the same way, find  
the end of the section to erase, then press ENTER.  
After pressing ENTER, another marker indicates the end  
of the section, with the section itself marked in red.  
Divide Title (HDD)  
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP  
2h00m  
Rec. time  
ENTER  
6
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel.  
In the thumbnail viewer you can see a few seconds of  
video either side of the marked section to see how the  
edit will look.  
10–1 00.00.09.15  
ꢉ
Play Pause  
Divide  
Cancel  
• When editing VR mode Original content, you may not  
be able to erase very short sections (less than five  
seconds).  
ENTER  
5
Press to divide the title at the current  
playback position.  
Divide  
ENTER  
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM  
HDD  
Play List only  
6
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel.  
Use this command to divide a title into two. Note that  
once divided, the two new HDD titles cannot be  
recombined into one again.  
Divided titles cannot  
be combined.  
OK?  
Yes  
No  
1
Highlight the title you want to divide.  
Chapter Edit  
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM HDD  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Divide’ from the command  
When editing a VR mode DVD or video on the HDD you  
can edit individual chapters within a title, with  
commands for erasing, combining and dividing.  
menu panel.  
HDD only: Select the type of edit.  
3
1
Highlight the title that contains the chapters you  
HDD/DVD RECORDER  
Please select the type of editing.  
want to edit.  
Video Mode Compatible Editing is  
recommended for compatibility with  
high-speed copying.  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Chapter Edit’ from the  
command menu panel.  
Video Mode Compatible Editing  
Frame Accurate Editing  
ENTER  
3
HDD only: Select the type of edit.  
• For more information about these options, see  
Editing accuracy on page 118.  
HDD/DVD RECORDER  
Please select the type of editing.  
Video Mode Compatible Editing is  
recommended for compatibility with  
high-speed copying.  
Video Mode Compatible Editing  
Frame Accurate Editing  
• For more information about these options, see  
Editing accuracy on page 118.  
122  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
09  
4
Select the command you want:  
ENTER  
• Divide – Divide a chapter into two or more parts: Use  
the playback controls (ꢊ, ꢉ, ꢅ, ꢈ, etc. (LCD page  
1)) to find the point at which you want to divide the  
chapter, then press ENTER.  
5
Select ‘Exit’ to get back to the main Disc  
Navigator screen.  
Set Genre  
Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List)  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP  
HDD  
1h00m  
5
Rec. time  
Chapters  
Use this command to assign a genre to a title.  
1–1  
Play  
0.00.00  
ꢊ
1
Highlight the title you want to assign a  
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Set Genre’ from the  
Exit  
Divide  
genre to.  
Erase/Move  
Combine  
ENTER  
You can keep dividing the chapter as many times as  
you wish (up to 999 chapters per DVD-R/-RW/-RAM  
disc or 99 chapters per HDD title).  
2
command menu panel.  
1
2
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
• Erase /Move – Erase or move chapters: Select the  
chapter you want to erase/move and press ENTER.  
Select whether you want to erase or move the  
chapter.  
10Titles  
10  
23:00 FRI 3/12 Pr SP  
4
4
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
Title Name  
Set Thumbnail  
4
Titles  
Erase Section  
9
8
7
20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr  
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
9
9
Divide  
Move command only: Select the destination for the  
chapter, and press ENTER.  
Chapter Edit  
Recent first  
All Genres  
Set Genre  
22:00 THU 2/12 Pr  
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr  
Lock  
Cancel
Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List)  
19:00 MON 29/11 Pr  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
2
2
SP  
SP  
HDD  
SP  
19:00 Mon 29/11 P
Erase  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Remain  
30h30m  
1
Move  
Rec. time  
0
Cancel  
Chapter  
ENTER  
001  
002  
003  
004  
005  
3
Select a genre for the title.  
Exit  
Divide  
Erase/Move  
Combine  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10  
10Titles  
23:00 FRI 3/12 Pr S
4
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
No Category  
3
Movies  
4
Titles  
• Combine – Combine two adjacent chapters into  
one: Highlight the bar divider between two adjacent  
chapters and press ENTER.  
9
20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr  
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
Drama  
Entertainmt.  
Recent first  
All Genres  
News  
Sport  
Comedy  
8
7
22:00 THU 2/12 P
22:00 Thu 2/12 P
Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List)  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP  
19:00 MON 29/11 Pr  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
2
2
SP  
SP  
HDD  
SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Remain  
30h30m  
1h00m  
Rec. time  
1
2
3
4
5
Exit  
Divide  
Erase/Move  
Combine  
Note  
1 When editing VR mode Original content, it may not be possible to erase chapters less than five seconds long.  
2 VR mode Play List only.  
3 It may not always be possible to combine two chapters, even though they are adjacent. If a chapter has been divided into three, then the middle  
chapter erased, it is not possible to combine the two remaining chapters into one.  
123  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
09  
Lock  
Move  
HDD DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM  
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM  
Play List only  
Original only  
Use this function to re-arrange the playing order of Play  
List titles.  
You can lock a title so that it can’t be edited or erased  
accidently. If you do need to edit it, you can always unlock  
it later.  
1
2
Highlight the title you want to move.  
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Move’ from the command  
Important  
ENTER  
• You can’t undo any edits made before changing the  
lock status. You also can’t undo a lock/unlock  
command using the Undo option from the Disc  
Navigator menu.  
menu panel.  
Disc Navigator (DVD)  
10Titles  
1
2
Highlight the title you want to lock (or unlock).  
1
2
3
4
23:00 FRI 3/12  
23:00Fri 3/12Pr
Title Name  
SetThumbnail
EraseSection  
Divide  
4
Titles  
ENTER  
20:00 FRI 3/12  
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Lock’ from the command  
Chapter Edit  
Play List  
menu panel.  
Move  
Combine  
22:00 THU 2/12  
22:00 Thu 2/12 P
Cancel  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10  
10Titles  
19:00 MON 29/11  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
DVD  
VR Mode  
Remain  
0h30m  
2
SP  
23:00 FRI 3/12 Pr SP  
4
4
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
Title Name  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Set Thumbnail  
4
Titles  
Erase Section  
9
20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr  
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
9
9
Divide  
Chapter Edit  
Recent first  
All Genres  
ENTER  
Set Genre  
8
7
22:00 THU 2/12 Pr  
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr  
Lock  
3
Select a new position for the title.  
Cancel
Title to move  
19:00 MON 29/11 Pr  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
2
2
SP  
SP  
HDD  
SP  
Remain  
30h30m  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Disc Navigator (DVD)  
10Titles  
1
23:00 FRI 3/12  
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
4
SP  
2h00m(1.0G)
An unlocked title will become locked; a locked title will be  
unlocked. Locked titles are shown in the Disc Navigator  
with a padlock icon.  
4
Titles  
2
3
4
20:00 FRI 3/12  
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
9
SP  
Play List  
MENU  
2h00m(1.0G)  
22:00 THU 2/12  
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr  
7
SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
19:00 MON 29/11  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
DVD  
VR Mode  
2
SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Remain  
0h30m  
Insert position  
After pressing ENTER, the new, updated Play List is  
displayed.  
124  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
09  
Combine  
Genre Name  
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM  
HDD  
Play List only  
Use this function to combine two Play List titles into one.  
Use this command to rename one of the five user-  
definable genres (Free 1 to Free 5).  
ENTER  
1
Highlight the title you want to combine.  
1
Select ‘Genre Name’ from the command  
This title will remain in the same place after combining  
with another title.  
menu panel.  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10  
ENTER  
10Titles  
23:00 FRI 3/12 Pr SP  
Play  
4
4
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Combine’ from the  
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
SP  
Erase  
command menu panel.  
2
Edit  
4
Titles  
9
8
7
20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr  
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
9
9
S
S
Recent first  
All Genres  
Disc Navigator (DVD)  
10Titles  
Genre Name  
S
S
22:00 THU 2/12 Pr  
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr  
7
7
1
2
23:00 FRI 3/12  
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
7
Title Name  
Multi-Mode  
SetThumbnail
EraseSection  
4
Titles  
19:00 MON 29/11 Pr  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
2 SP  
20:00 FRI 3/12  
HDD  
SP  
Divide  
Chapter Edit  
2
SP  
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Play List  
Remain  
30h30m  
Move  
3
Combine  
22:00 THU 2/12  
22:00 Thu 2/12 P
Cancel  
ENTER  
4
19:00 MON 29/11  
DVD  
2
Select one of the user-definable genre  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
2
SP  
VR Mode  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Remain  
names.  
0h30m  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10Titles  
ENTER  
10  
23:00 FRI 3/12 Pr SP  
4
4
3
first.  
Select another title to combine with the  
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
Free1  
Free2  
4
Titles  
Free3  
9
8
7
20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr  
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
9
9
This title will be appended to the first title selected.  
Free4  
Free5  
Recent first  
All Genres  
The screen below shows title 3 selected to be appended  
to title 1.  
22:00 THU 2/12 Pr  
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr  
Cancel  
19:00 MON 29/11 Pr  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
2 SP  
HDD  
SP  
Disc Navigator (DVD)  
10Titles  
2
SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Remain  
1
2
23:00 FRI 3/12  
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
30h30m  
4
SP  
2h00m(1.0G)  
4
Titles  
20:00 FRI 3/12  
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
ENTER  
9
SP  
2h00m(1.0G)  
Play List  
MENU  
3
Input a name for the genre.  
• The name can be up to 12 characters long.  
3
22:00 THU 2/12  
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr  
7
SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
4
19:00 MON 29/11  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
Input Genre Name  
DVD  
2
SP  
VR Mode  
Free  
1
1h00m(1.0G)  
Remain  
0h30m  
A B C D E  
F
G H  
I
J
K L M  
.
(
I
,
)
I
ß
_
}
˚
`
?
:
!
;
CAPS  
small  
N
A
D
0
O
A
N
1
P
A
O
2
Q
A
O
3
R
A
O
4
S T U V WX Y  
Z
I
ç
A
O
5
[
§
·
Æ
O
6
E
U
8
ˆ
E
U
9
÷
<<  
E
U
<
x
E
U
=
I
#
%
ø
7
]
Y
>
{
$
&
ENTER  
~
+
–
/
@
¥
|
¡
_
¿
a
–
4
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel.  
c
£
\
µ
¨
¸
©
¬
–
/2  
®
/4  
< < 14  
/
o
–
1
3
2
3
1
´
Space  
OK  
Clear  
OK to combine titles  
1
and  
3
?
Yes  
No  
ENTER  
4
Select ‘OK’ to enter the name and exit.  
125  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
09  
Multi-Mode  
Undo  
HDD  
DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW  
Multi-Mode allows you to select several titles, then select  
a command that will be applied to all of them. In this way  
you can select multiple titles and then erase them all at  
once, for example.  
If you make a mistake while editing, you can generally  
undo it. There is one level of undo (in other words, you  
can only undo the last edit you made).  
ENTER  
•
Select ‘Undo’ from the command menu  
ENTER  
panel.  
1
Select ‘Multi-Mode’ from the command  
• You can’t undo anything after exiting the Disc  
Navigator screen.  
menu panel.  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10  
10Titles  
Disc Navigator (DVD)  
0Titles  
23:00 FRI 3/12 Pr SP  
Play  
4
4
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
SP  
Erase  
No title  
Play  
2
Edit  
4
Titles  
9
8
7
Erase  
20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr  
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
9
9
S
S
2
4
Titles  
Edit  
Recent first  
All Genres  
Genre Name  
S
Play List  
22:00 THU 2/12 Pr  
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr  
7
7
Create  
Multi-Mode  
Undo  
19:00 MON 29/11 Pr  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
2 SP  
HDD  
SP  
2
SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
DVD  
VR Mode  
Remain  
30h30m  
Remain  
0h30m  
ENTER  
2
Select titles from the title list.  
Frequently asked questions  
Selected titles are marked with a ꢆ.  
• Why doesn’t the available recording time increase  
when I erase titles from a VR mode DVD-R?  
ENTER  
When you erase titles from a DVD-R (or DVD+R), the  
titles are no longer displayed, but the content  
remains on the disc. DVD-R/+R are write-once  
media; they can’t be erased or rewritten.  
3
Select the command that you want  
applied to all the marked titles.  
For example, select Erase to erase all the marked titles.  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
Multi-Mode  
10Titles  
• I can’t edit my disc!  
23:00 FRI 3/12 Pr  
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
4
4
S
S
Erase  
Lock  
You may find that as the available recording time is  
reduced on a VR mode DVD-R disc, editing is no  
longer possible. This is because information about  
your edits requires a certain amount of disc space.  
As you edit, this information builds up, eventually  
preventing you from editing further.  
4
Titles  
Unlock  
9
Change Genre  
20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr  
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr  
9
9
S
S
Recent first  
All Genres  
22:00 THU 2/12 Pr  
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr  
7
7
Single Mode  
19:00 MON 29/11 Pr  
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr  
2
2
SP  
SP  
HDD  
SP  
Remain  
30h30m  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Once the command is completed, Multi-Mode is  
automatically exited.  
126  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and backup  
10  
CChaoptpery10ing and backup  
You can identify copy-once protected material during  
playback by displaying disc information on-screen. If the  
current title is copy-once protected, an exclamation mark  
( ! ) is shown.  
Introduction  
Use the copying features of this recorder to:  
• Back up important recordings stored on the HDD to  
a DVD.  
Copyright  
• Make a DVD copy of a recording on the HDD to play  
in another player.  
Recording equipment should be used only for lawful  
copying and you are advised to check carefully what is  
lawful copying in the country in which you are making a  
copy. Copying of copyright material such as films or  
music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception  
or consented to by the rightowners.  
• Transfer video from a DVD to the HDD for editing.  
• Transfer edited video from the HDD to DVD.  
The simplest way to copy a title is to use the One Touch  
Copy feature. This copies the currently playing HDD title  
to DVD, or DVD title to the HDD. See One Touch Copy  
below for detailed instructions.  
For more sophisticated copying tasks you can build a  
Copy List of titles to copy, and edit titles so that you only  
copy the bits you want. See Using Copy Lists on page 128  
for detailed instructions.  
One Touch Copy  
* See also Copyright above.  
The One Touch Copy feature copies the currently playing  
or selected (in the Disc Navigator) HDD title to DVD, or  
DVD title to HDD. The whole title is copied, regardless of  
where in the title you start the copy.  
Where possible, the recorder will copy your recordings at  
high-speed. Depending on the recording mode, the kind  
of disc loaded and various other factors, copying can be  
as fast as one minute per hour of video. See Minimum  
copying times on page 163 for more on copying times.  
HDD to DVD copies are made in the same recording  
mode. When copying DVD to HDD, the copy is made in  
whatever recording mode is currently set.  
If you want to save disc space you can copy video at a  
lower recording quality (for example, an XP recording on  
the HDD copied to SP on a DVD). Copying in this way is  
always done in real-time.  
Make sure that a recordable DVD disc is loaded when  
trying to copy from the HDD.  
REC  
MODE  
1
(LCD page 1) If you’re copying from DVD to  
When real-time copying from the HDD to a DVD-R/-RW  
(Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW, the chapter markers in  
the original material are not copied. Chapter markers are  
put into the copy at intervals, according to the Auto  
Chapter settings (see also Auto Chapter (Video) on  
page 157 and Auto Chapter (DVD+R/+RW) on page 158).  
the HDD, select a recording mode.  
Note that selecting a recording mode higher than the title  
playing will not result in a better quality recording.  
O.T.  
2
COPY (LCD page 3) Press during playback to copy  
the current title.  
The front panel display indicates that the title is being  
copied.  
Restrictions on copying  
Commercial DVD-Video discs are protected using Copy  
Guard. These discs cannot be copied to the HDD.  
• High-speed copying is used when copying from the  
HDD to DVD. Playback continues while copying.  
Some video material is copy-once protected. This means  
that it can be recorded to HDD, but it can’t then be freely  
copied again. If you want to transfer copy-once protected  
material from HDD to DVD, you’ll need to a CPRM ver. 1.1  
or higher VR mode DVD-RW, ver. 2.0 or 2.1 VR mode  
DVD-R, or CPRM-compatible DVD-RAM disc (see CPRM  
on page 92 for more on this). Only one instance of a copy-  
once protected title can be added to the Copy List, and  
after it’s been copied, the title is erased from the HDD (it  
is therefore not possible to copy a locked title that is copy-  
once protected).  
• Real-time copying is used when copying from DVD to  
the HDD. Playback restarts from the beginning of the  
title.  
127  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and backup  
10  
Copying to the HDD  
Cancelling One Touch Copy  
You can cancel a One Touch Copy once it’s started.  
• The maximum title length for copying is 12 hours.  
• Title name and chapter markers are also copied,  
except when copying from a finalized Video mode  
DVD-R/-RW.  
O.T.  
COPY  
•
Press and hold for more than a second.  
Copying is cancelled and the video already copied is  
erased.  
• Thumbnail picture markers and chapter markers for  
the Disc Navigator are copied, but their position in  
the copy may be slightly changed from the original.  
• If you cancel a HDD to DVD-R/+R copy, the space  
available for recording does not return to the pre-copy  
figure.  
•
If some part of the title being copied is copy-protected,  
copying will start, but the copy-protected portions will  
not be copied.  
Notes on copying using One Touch Copy  
Copying to DVD  
• Title name, chapter markers, as well as thumbnail  
picture markers for the Disc Navigator, are also  
copied. However, if you copy to a DVD-R/-RW (Video  
mode) or DVD+R/+RW, only the first 40 characters  
of a name are copied.  
Using Copy Lists  
* See also Copyright on page 127.  
At its simplest, a Copy List is just a list of HDD or DVD  
titles that you want to copy. When copying HDD titles to  
DVD, you can, however, edit the titles in your copy list,  
erasing chapters you don’t need, or re-naming titles, for  
example. Edits you make to titles in the Copy List do not  
affect the actual video content; only the ‘virtual’ content  
of the Copy List. So you can freely erase and modify  
anything in your Copy List safe in the knowledge that the  
actual content is not being altered.  
• The chapter markers in the copy may not be in exactly  
the same positions as the original when recording on  
to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW.  
• You can’t use the One Touch Copy function to copy a  
title if any part of the title is copy-once protected.  
• A title that contains mixed aspect ratios can’t be  
copied to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/  
+RW. Use a DVD-R/-RW (VR mode) or DVD-RAM  
disc for this type of material.  
Copying from HDD to DVD  
1
• Low resolution (SEP through LP modes ) widescreen  
Important  
material can’t be copied to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode)  
or DVD+R/+RW. Use a DVD-R/-RW (VR mode) or  
DVD-RAM disc for this type of material.  
• The recorder can only store one Copy List at a time.  
• The Copy List is erased if the Input Line System  
setting is changed (see Additional information about  
the TV system settings on page 161).  
• When HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode  
Off, titles recorded in LP/MN9 to MN15 modes  
cannot be high-speed copied to a DVD-R/-RW (Video  
mode) or DVD+R/+RW. Please use a DVD-R/-RW  
(VR mode) or DVD-RAM.  
• Resetting the recorder to its factory settings (see  
Resetting the recorder on page 175) will erase the  
Copy List.  
• Recordings of bilingual broadcasts cannot be high-  
speed copied to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or  
DVD+R/+RW. Please use a DVD-R/-RW (VR mode)  
or DVD-RAM.  
1
Load a recordable DVD.  
• It is possible to complete the following steps without  
having a recordable DVD loaded (or having an  
uninitialized DVD loaded); however, the steps are  
slightly different.  
• XP+ titles cannot be copied to DVD via One Touch  
Copy.  
• If you want to use a DVD-RW (VR mode) disc for the  
copy, make sure it is initialized before you start.  
• Titles over eight hours cannot be copied to single-  
layer DVD+R/+RW discs using One Touch Copy.  
Use DVD+R DL discs for titles over eight hours.  
HOME  
MENU  
• Titles recorded in MN1 to MN6, SEP, SLP or EP mode  
cannot be copied to DVD+R/+RW using One Touch  
Copy.  
SETUP  
2
Select ‘Copy’ from the Home Menu.  
Note  
1 In manual recording mode these equate to MN1 to MN15 (Video Mode Off) or MN1 to MN8 (Video Mode On).  
128  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and backup  
10  
There are some restrictions on titles that can be added to  
the Copy List if you are copying to a DVD-R/-RW (Video  
mode) or DVD+R/+RW:  
ENTER  
3
Select ‘HDD ꢅ DVD’.  
• When adding titles that contain copy-once protected  
material, the copy-once parts will not be added.  
HDD DVD  
DVD/CD HDD  
Disc Back-up  
• When adding titles that contain material of more  
than one aspect ratio (screen size), each part with a  
different aspect ratio will be added as a separate title  
if high-speed copying is possible.  
1
Depending on the title , high-speed copying may not be  
possible to DVDs.  
• If this is the first time to create a Copy List, skip to  
step 5 below.  
6
Press ꢃ to display the command menu panel.  
4
If there is already a Copy List stored in the  
recorder, choose whether to ‘Create New Copy List’  
or ‘Continue Using Previous Copy List’.  
The command menu panel  
8
Title  
Copy  
Select Title  
HDD DVD (Video mode)  
1 > 2 > 3  
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
WED 29/03 20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP  
MON 27/03 21:00 Mon27/03 Pr 4 SP  
S AT 25/03 23:00 S a t 25/03 Pr 9 SP  
THU 23/03 22:00 Thu 23/03 Pr 6 SP  
WED 22/03 20:00 Wed22/03 Pr 2 SP  
MON 20/03 13:00 Mon20/03 Pr 9 SP  
F R I 17/03 21:00 F r i 17/03 Pr 4 SP  
WED 15/03 20:00 Wed15/03 Pr 2 SP  
Pr 2  
Pr 4  
Pr 9  
Pr 6  
Pr 2  
Pr 9  
Pr 4  
Pr 2  
Continue Using Previous Copy List  
Create New Copy List  
Back  
Next  
Recent first  
All Genres  
20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP  
• If you select Continue Using Previous Copy List,  
skip to step 10 below.  
20:00  
1h00m(2.0G)  
Pr 2  
Sports  
SP  
Copy List Total  
4.3G  
4.3G  
• Selecting Create New Copy List will erase any Copy  
Current DVD Remain  
List already stored in the recorder.  
7
Select ‘Next’ to move on to the Title Edit screen.  
ENTER  
5
Add titles to the Copy List (highlight a title  
2
Title  
Copy  
Title Edit  
HDD DVD (Video mode)  
1 > 2 > 3  
and press ENTER to add).  
1
2
20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP  
20:00 Wed22/03 Pr 2 SP  
Back  
Next  
8
Title  
Copy  
Select Title  
HDD DVD (Video mode)  
1 > 2 > 3  
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
WED 29/03 20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP  
MON 27/03 21:00 Mon27/03 Pr 4 SP  
S AT 25/03 23:00 S a t 25/03 Pr 9 SP  
THU 23/03 22:00 Thu 23/03 Pr 6 SP  
WED 22/03 20:00 Wed22/03 Pr 2 SP  
MON 20/03 13:00 Mon20/03 Pr 9 SP  
F R I 17/03 21:00 F r i 17/03 Pr 4 SP  
WED 15/03 20:00 Wed15/03 Pr 2 SP  
Pr 2  
Pr 4  
Pr 9  
Pr 6  
Pr 2  
Pr 9  
Pr 4  
Pr 2  
Back  
Next  
Recent first  
All Genres  
20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP  
1h00m(2.0G)  
Copy List Total  
4.3G  
4.3G  
Current DVD Remain  
20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP  
20:00  
1h00m(2.0G)  
Pr 2  
Sports  
SP  
Copy List Total  
Current DVD Remain  
0.0G  
4.3G  
Titles you’ve added to the Copy List are highlighted in  
pink.  
Note  
1 The following titles cannot be copied at high-speed for DVD+R/+RW:  
• Titles recorded in MN1 to MN6, SEP, SLP or EP mode.  
The following titles cannot be copied at high-speed for DVD-R/-RW (Video Mode) and DVD+R/+RW:  
• Widescreen titles recorded at low resolution (SEP through LP/MN1 to MN15 (Video Mode Off) or MN1 to MN8 (Video Mode On)).  
• LP/MN9 to MN15 recordings when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off.  
• Bilingual recordings.  
• Combined titles that were originally recorded using different recording modes.  
The following titles cannot be copied at high-speed for any types of DVD:  
• XP+ titles.  
129  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and backup  
10  
8
To edit a title, highlight it using the ꢄ/ꢁ buttons,  
ENTER  
then press ENTER  
.
10  
Select ‘Next’ to proceed.  
2
Title  
Copy  
Title Edit  
HDD DVD (Video mode)  
2
Title  
1 > 2 > 3  
Copy  
Title Edit  
HDD DVD (Video mode)  
1 > 2 > 3  
1
2
20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2
Erase  
20:00 Wed22/03 Pr 2
1
2
20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP  
20:00 Wed22/03 Pr 2 SP  
Title Name  
Back  
Next  
Erase Section  
Move  
Preview  
Back  
Next  
Cancel  
20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP  
20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP  
1h00m(2.0G)  
1h00m(2.0G)  
Copy List Total  
Current DVD Remain  
4.3G  
4.3G  
Copy List Total  
4.3G  
4.3G  
Current DVD Remain  
A menu of editing commands appears:  
There are several options available from the next screen:  
• Erase – Erase individual titles from the Copy List (see  
Erase on page 119).  
• Select Recording Mode if you want to change the  
recording quality (see Recording Mode on page 131).  
• Title Name – Name or rename a title in the Copy List  
(see Title Name on page 120).  
• Select Input Disc Name if you want to change the  
disc name. Input a name of up to 64 characters for a  
VR mode disc or 40 characters for a Video mode disc  
or DVD+R/+RW. (The input method is similar to that  
of naming titles; see Title Name on page 120.)  
• Erase Section – Erase part of a title (see Erase Section  
on page 121).  
• Move – Change the order of titles in the Copy List  
(see Move on page 124).  
• Select Finalize if you want to automatically finalize a  
• Preview – Check the content of a title in the Copy  
List.  
1
DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R after copying.  
Select a title menu style from the following screen.  
• Divide – Divide a title in the Copy List into two (see  
Divide on page 122).  
ENTER  
• Combine – Combine two titles in the Copy List into  
one (see Combine on page 125).  
11  
Select ‘Start Copy’ to start copying.  
• Chapter Edit – Edit chapters within a Copy List title  
(see Chapter Edit on page 122):  
• Divide – Divide a chapter into two.  
• Erase/Move – Erase a chapter/Change the  
chapter order.  
Copy  
Start Copy  
HDD  
HDD DVD (Video Mode)  
1 > 2 > 3  
DVD-RW  
Video Mode  
Back  
Recording Mode  
Input Disc Name  
Finalize  
Copy Time 0h 16m  
Recording Mode  
Disc Name  
High-Speed  
Off  
• Combine – Combine two chapters into one.  
Finalize  
Start Copy  
• Set Thumbnail – Set the thumbnail frame for a title  
(see Set Thumbnail on page 121).  
Copy List Total  
Current DVD Remain  
4.3G  
4.3G  
• Recording Mode – Set the picture quality of the copy  
(see Recording Mode on page 131).  
• If you’re using a DVD-R DL or DVD+R DL disc and the  
copy will span both layers, the Copy List Total bar  
will be purple.  
• Bilingual – Set how bilingual audio should be copied  
when copying from HDD to DVD-R/-RW (Video mode)  
and DVD+R/+RW (see Bilingual on page 132).  
• The Current DVD Remain bar will be half-length if  
the first layer of a DVD-R DL or DVD+R DL disc is  
already full.  
• Cancel – Exit the menu.  
Repeat this step for as many titles you have that need  
editing.  
9
Display the command menu panel.  
Note  
1 If a timer recording is scheduled to start during copying, the disc will not be finalized.  
130  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and backup  
10  
Copying from DVD to HDD  
Important  
ENTER  
6
Select a title to edit.  
A menu appears of Copy List editing commands:  
• Erase – Erase individual titles from the Copy List (see  
Erase on page 119).  
• The DVD to HDD Copy screen isn’t accessible when  
a finalized Video mode DVD-R/-RW or a DVD-Video is  
loaded. As long as the disc is not Copy Guard  
protected, you can still use the One Touch Copy  
function, however (see One Touch Copy on page 127).  
• Move – Change the order of titles in the Copy List  
(see Move on page 124).  
• Preview – Check the content of a title in the Copy  
List.  
• The recorder can only store one Copy List at a time.  
• The Copy List will be erased if:  
– any of the titles on the DVD disc are erased or  
edited.  
• Cancel – Exit the menu.  
Repeat this step for as many titles you have that need  
editing.  
– the disc tray is opened.  
– playback is switched between Play List and  
Original.  
– the DVD disc is re-initialized or finalized.  
– the recorder is reset to its factory settings (see  
Resetting the recorder on page 175).  
ENTER  
7
Select ‘Next’ from the command menu  
panel to proceed to the copy options screen.  
• Select Recording Mode if you want to change the  
recording quality (see Recording Mode below).  
• It may not be possible to copy from a DVD disc that  
was recorded on a different DVD recorder or a PC.  
ENTER  
HOME  
MENU  
8
Select ‘Start Copy’ to start copying.  
SETUP  
1
2
3
Select ‘Copy’ from the Home Menu.  
Select ‘DVD/CD ꢅ HDD’.  
Recording Mode  
ENTER  
ENTER  
1
Select ‘Recording Mode’ from the  
command menu panel.  
ENTER  
Select a Copy List type.  
• Selecting Create New Copy List will erase any Copy  
ENTER  
List already stored in the recorder.  
2
Select a recording mode for the copy.  
1
• High-Speed Copy – The Copy List is copied at the  
same recording quality as the original.  
ENTER  
4
Add titles to the Copy List (highlight a title  
2
• XP, SP, LP, EP, SLP, SEP, MN – The Copy List is  
and press ENTER to add).  
Titles you’ve added to the Copy List are highlighted in  
pink.  
copied at the specified recording quality in real-time.  
(Note that if you copy at a higher quality setting than  
the original, the copy will not be better quality than  
the original.)  
ENTER  
If you select MN above, you can also change the level  
setting (MN1 to MN32 , LPCM or XP+ ) from the  
Recording Quality box that appears.  
5
Select ‘Next’ from the command menu  
3
4
panel to proceed to the title edit screen.  
Note  
1 When copying to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW, the chapter markers in the copy may not be in exactly the same position as  
the original.  
2 When the copy mode is set to something other than High-Speed Copy for copying to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW, the chapter  
markers of the original are not copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at regular intervals, according to the Auto Chapter setting (see  
also Auto Chapter (Video) on page 157 and Auto Chapter (DVD+R/+RW) on page 158).  
3 When copying to a DVD+R/+RW, MN1 to MN3 and SEP modes are not available.  
4 XP+ mode available only when copying to HDD.  
131  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and backup  
10  
1,2  
• Optimized – The recording quality is automatically  
adjusted so that the Copy List fits on to the space  
available on the disc. Copying is carried out in real-  
time.  
Using disc backup  
* See also Copyright on page 127.  
This feature offers a simple way to make a backup copy of  
finalized DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) discs or DVD+R/  
+RW discs. The data is copied first to the hard disk  
When you change the recording mode setting, you can  
see how much disc space it will require. If this is more  
than is available, it shows up in red and you won’t be able  
to start copying. In this case, either change the recording  
quality, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List  
screen and erase one or more titles from the Copy List.  
3
drive , then on to another recordable DVD disc.  
HOME  
MENU  
SETUP  
1
Select ‘Copy’, then ‘Disc Back-up’ from the  
Home Menu.  
Bilingual  
ENTER  
2
Select a backup option.  
1
Select the title containing the audio you  
want to change.  
Disc Back-up  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘Bilingual’ from the command  
Start new disc back-up  
Resume writing data  
Erase back-up data  
menu panel.  
ENTER  
3
Select a bilingual audio option.  
There are three backup options:  
• Start new disc back-up – Start making a backup of  
a disc.  
• Resume writing data – Record the backup data  
already on the HDD to a recordable DVD.  
• Erase back-up data – Erase the backup data on the  
HDD.  
3
Load the disc you want to make a backup of.  
You can only make backup copies of finalized Video mode  
DVD-R/-RW discs, finalized DVD+R or DVD+RW discs  
(excluding DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs).  
Disc Back-up  
No disc.  
Please load a disc to be backed-up.  
Cancel  
Start  
Note  
1 When the copy mode is set to something other than High-Speed Copy for copying to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW, the chapter  
markers of the original are not copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at regular intervals, according to the Auto Chapter setting (see  
also Auto Chapter (Video) on page 157 and Auto Chapter (DVD+R/+RW) on page 158).  
2 Optimized mode only available when copying to DVD. Due to remaining space on the disc or the title that you copy, this mode does not always  
exactly fill a disc.  
3 It is not possible to play this material directly from the HDD.  
132  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and backup  
10  
• You can cancel the backup process by pressing  
O.T. COPY for more than one second. However, this  
will make the disc unusable (although if you are  
using a DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc you can re-  
initialize it in order to make it usable again — see  
Initializing recordable DVD discs on page 102.)  
ENTER  
4
Select ‘Start’.  
Disc Back-up  
Read from disc and save to HDD.  
Start reading?  
7
After the recorder has finished recording the  
backup disc, you can select whether to make another  
backup of the same data or exit.  
Cancel  
Start  
Disc Back-up  
• To see the progress of the backup, press DISP (LCD  
page 3).  
Disc back-up finished.  
To make another back-up copy, please load  
a recordable disc.  
• You can cancel the backup process by pressing  
O.T. COPY (LCD page 3) for more than one second.  
Cancel  
Start  
5
When the data has been copied, take out the disc  
and load a blank* recordable DVD.  
• Select Start to make another backup copy or Cancel  
to finish. If you want to make another backup copy,  
return to step 6 above.  
* If you’re using a DVD-RW or DVD+RW, the disc doesn’t  
have to be blank, although the previous contents of the  
disc will be erased in the backup process.  
8
If you don’t need to keep the backup data on the  
Disc Back-up  
HDD, you can delete it now.  
Select Yes to delete the data from the HDD; select No to  
keep it (you can delete it later if you want to).  
Disc content saved to Hard Disk Drive.  
Please eject the disc and load a  
recordable disc  
Disc Back-up  
Cancel  
Start  
The backed-up data is still on the HDD.  
Erasing it will increase the free space  
available. OK to Erase?  
You can use a DVD-R ver. 2.0, 2.1 or 2.2 disc, or DVD-RW  
ver. 1.1 or ver. 1.2 disc for the backup.  
No  
Yes  
• If you backup a DVD-R disc to DVD-RW, you cannot  
undo the finalization later.  
• If you decide to leave the backup data on the HDD,  
you can make backup copies to recordable DVD  
discs anytime from the Disc Back-up menu.  
• Actual recordable capacity of discs vary so there may  
be cases where the contents of the disc you’re  
backing-up will not fit on to a particular blank disc. If  
this happens, please try another brand of disc.  
• DVD-R/-RW discs can only be backed up to DVD-R/  
-RW discs; DVD+R/+RW discs can only be backed  
up to DVD+R/+RW discs.  
6
Select ‘Start’ to start writing the backed-up data  
to the blank disc.  
Disc Back-up  
Write back-up data from Hard Disk Drive.  
The disc contents will be overwritten.  
OK to start?  
Cancel  
Start  
• To see the progress of the backup, press DISP.  
133  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Jukebox  
11  
Chapter 11  
Using the Jukebox  
The Jukebox feature allows you to use the recorder’s  
HDD to store and playback music from your CDs. You  
can also transfer WMA/MP3 files stored on CD-R/-RW/  
-ROM, DVD, USB device or PC.  
4
Display the command menu.  
The command menu panel  
Disc Navigator (DVD/CD)  
Track List  
Copying music to the HDD  
10 Tracks  
Play  
The first step is to copy some music to the HDD. CD  
audio, WMA and MP3 files are copied at high speed.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TRACK1  
TRACK2  
TRACK3  
TRACK4  
TRACK5  
TRACK6  
TRACK7  
TRACK8  
Track Name  
CD  
Edit  
Usually, each track on a CD or DVD is categorized and  
copied onto the HDD on the basis of information on  
Play Mode  
1
artists and albums.  
Note that once copied to the HDD, audio tracks cannot  
be copied to a recordable DVD disc.  
TRACK1  
0.04.30 / 1.14.00  
650MB  
classical  
0.05.30  
10.00.00  
HDD  
TRACK3  
Track Repeat  
Remain  
100.0  
G
Stereo  
3
Important  
ENTER  
• While copying, no other recorder operation is  
possible.  
• When copying, scheduled timer recordings will not  
start until copying is complete.  
5
6
Select ‘Edit’ from the menu.  
ENTER  
• Copy protected CDs may not copy successfully.  
Select ‘Copy all to HDD’ from the menu.  
On pressing ENTER all tracks (or files) on the CD are  
copied to the HDD.  
• When a folder of WMA/MP3 files is selected, you can  
copy only the files contained in the folder by using  
Copy to HDD.  
1
2
Load the CD/DVD you want to copy to the HDD.  
HDD/  
DVD  
(LCD page 1) Select the DVD.  
• You can also copy tracks (or files) by selecting Copy  
> DVD/CD ꢅ HDD and pressing ENTER from the  
Home Menu. (For an Audio CD, a track check screen  
is displayed.)  
DISC  
NAVIGATOR  
3
Open the Disc Navigator.  
• This unit automatically searches for titles of an Audio  
CD (see About the automatic display of titles on  
page 107).  
• You can also start copying by starting playback of the  
CD/DVD and then pressing O.T. COPY (LCD page 3).  
• To cancel copying press ENTER.  
• If the CD loaded contains both CD audio tracks and  
WMA/MP3 files, the part currently selected will copy.  
Note  
1 • Up to 50 000 tracks can be created in the Jukebox. (You can create up to 50 000 artists/albums in total.)  
• Sound quality is not worsened when you copy data from another source.  
• When playing back an album copied from a source whose original audio track plays continuously (such as a live recording), there will be a  
brief pause in sound between tracks.  
• Audio CDs are classified according to the information in the Gracenote database.  
• WMA/MP3 files are classified according to the information included in the files. Track names may differ from the names of the original files.  
• Depending on the name of the original folder and track, the artist and album under which the folder or track is classified may differ.  
134  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Jukebox  
11  
Connect PC  
Using a USB connection, you can copy WMA and MP3  
files from a PC to the HDD of this device. Operations  
carried out on the PC require Windows Media Player 11.  
Copying files via USB  
Connecting a regular USB device  
You can copy WMA or MP3 files from a connected USB  
device, such as a USB drive, to the HDD.  
Important  
• If the PC you are using does not currently have  
Windows Media Player 11 installed, you must first  
install the program and make sure it functions  
correctly before connecting the USB cable and  
attempting to use the Connect PC function.  
• For more information on Connect PC, see Using a PC  
on page 67.  
• You cannot edit or delete albums from this device  
when it is connected to a PC via USB. If you wish to  
edit or delete albums via the Jukebox, you must first  
disconnect the USB cable.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Connect the USB device.  
HOME  
MENU  
SETUP  
Select ‘Jukebox’ from the Home Menu.  
ENTER  
Select ‘Listen to Music from USB device’.  
Display the command menu.  
1
Connect the PC via USB cable.  
The screen below is displayed. Press ‘ꢇ’ to close the  
screen.  
*Depending on the Windows OS version and the  
Windows Media Player settings, the screen shown below  
may not be displayed.  
ENTER  
ENTER  
Select ‘Edit’ from the menu.  
Select ‘Copy all to HDD’ from the menu.  
The folders on the USB device will be copied to the HDD.  
• Up to 99 folders/999 files on the USB device can be  
copied/displayed.  
• Only the files that have been read can be copied. To  
copy the files that have not been read, reload the files  
(see below).  
• To copy specific folders, select the desired folders  
and select Copy to HDD.  
Reloading files from a USB device  
If you have a USB device with more than 1000 files and/  
or 100 folders, you can still view all the tracks using the  
reload function.  
1
Navigate to the last entry in the folder list  
HOME  
MENU  
(‘Read next: ...’).  
SETUP  
2
3
4
Select ‘Jukebox’ from the Home Menu.  
Select ‘Connect PC’.  
ENTER  
2
Load the next batch of up to 999 files/99  
ENTER  
ENTER  
folders from the connected USB device.  
1
It takes several minutes to reload files.  
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel.  
Note  
1 You can press HOME MENU to exit the Jukebox screen while the recorder is reloading files.  
135  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Jukebox  
11  
5
Verify that the import screen is displayed on the  
This begins the synchronization process. When finished,  
the message ‘Synchronized to Device’ is displayed in  
Windows Media Player 11.  
device.  
If no actions are carried out for 20 minutes, the import  
screen is automatically closed. To reopen it, you will have  
to repeat steps 2 through 4.  
Number of copied  
folders  
Number of files  
unable to be copied  
Status  
Connect PC  
Standby  
00000 Folders  
000000 Files  
( 000 error  
( 000 error  
)
)
Exit  
‘Start Sync’  
For more information refer to the Help menu of Windows  
Media Player 11.  
Number of copied files  
Open Windows Media Player 11 on the PC.  
6
Progress Bar  
The device settings screen appears. Click ‘Cancel’.  
*Depending on the settings for Windows Media Player  
11, the screen shown below may not be displayed.  
Connect PC  
Copying  
00001 Folders  
000003 Files  
( 000 error  
( 000 error  
)
)
Exit  
• To cancel the synchronization process while it is  
underway, press ENTER on the remote control. The  
Connect PC screen is closed.  
• If synchronization fails, make sure that the Pioneer.  
HDD/DVD-Recorder device is selected at the  
synchronization screen of Windows Media Player 11,  
and try again.  
‘Cancel’  
From the PC, in Windows Media Player 11:  
1. Click ‘Sync’.  
7
When you have finished copying files, close  
Windows Media Player 11 on the PC.  
ENTER  
8
Close the import screen on this device.  
• If no actions are carried out for 20 minutes after  
copying, the import screen is automatically closed.  
2. Choose the artist, album or song you would  
like to copy, and press the right mouse button.  
3. Click ‘Add to Sync list’.  
4. Click ‘Start Sync’.  
136  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Jukebox  
11  
Note  
Playing music from the Jukebox  
• When using the sync function of Windows Media  
Player 11, music, artist and album folders are created  
as follows:  
You can select artists, albums or individual tracks from  
the Jukebox to play.  
HOME  
MENU  
Root  
SETUP  
1
2
Select ‘Jukebox’ from the Home Menu.  
Select a Jukebox option.  
music1.mp3  
music2.mp3  
Music  
Artist 1  
Album 1  
ENTER  
• Listen to Music/Edit – Listen to CDs or WMA/MP3  
files that have been copied to the HDD.  
You can also access this option directly by pressing  
JUKEBOX (LCD page 1).  
• Listen to Music from USB device – Listen to music  
from an external USB device. Proceed to step 4.  
music1.wma  
Album 2  
Album 1  
music1.mp3  
Artist 2  
• The above music folder is not displayed.  
ENTER  
• Up to 50 000 tracks can be included in one album.  
(The total number of tracks allowed in Jukebox is  
50 000.) Note that when there are many tracks  
contained in one album, it may take time to display  
and transfer these tracks.  
• Artists, albums and tracks with no set name that are  
transferred from CD/DVD/USB are displayed as  
‘Unknown Artist’, ‘Unknown Album’ and ‘Unknown  
File’ in Windows Media Player 11.  
• Artists, albums and track names that do not conform  
to the ISO8859-1 standard may display differently in  
Windows Media Player 11 and the Jukebox.  
• File whose extensions are not supported by the  
Jukebox (i.e. files that are not .mp3 or .wma) cannot  
be transferred.  
3
Select the artist you want to play back.  
The screen below shows artists stored on the HDD:  
Jukebox HDD  
Artist List  
ALL  
10 Artists  
1
2
3
4
Artist1  
Artist2  
Artist3  
Artist4  
Artist  
MENU  
Original  
5
6
7
Artist5  
Artist6  
Artist7  
Artist1  
HDD  
Total 10  
Remain  
100.0  
G
The album display changes for the selected artist when  
you press ENTER.  
• Files imported to this recorder via Connect PC cannot  
be exported from this recorder.  
• Note that no recording functions, including timer  
recordings, will be carried out when you are using the  
Connect PC function.  
• This step is for the display mode set to Artist. The  
operation varies when the display mode is set to other  
settings.  
• To play back all artists, select All and proceed to step 6.  
• Press  
or  
(LCD page 3) to change the page.  
ENTER  
4
Select the album you want to play back.  
Press ENTER to change the track display for the selected  
album.  
• To play back all albums, select All and proceed to  
step 6.  
5
Select the track you want to play back.  
• To play back all tracks, select All.  
137  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Jukebox  
11  
ENTER  
ENTER  
6
Display the command menu.  
3
4
Select ‘Add to Play List’ from the menu.  
Select a play list (‘Play List 1’ to ‘Play List  
Jukebox HDD  
Track List  
10 Tracks  
ALL  
Play  
4’) where you want to add the selected track.  
• You can add up to 25 songs to a play list.  
• You can rename a play list (see Editing the HDD  
Jukebox on page 139).  
1
2
3
4
Track1  
Track2  
Track3  
Track4  
Erase  
Edit  
Track  
Repeat  
Add to Play List  
Original  
5
Track5  
Track6  
Track7  
Play List Name  
6
7
Track1  
Playing a play list  
HDD  
MP3  
8GB  
classical  
Remain  
100.0  
G
1
Display the view options panel.  
The view options panel  
ENTER  
7
Select ‘Play’ from the menu.  
Jukebox HDD  
Artist List  
Repeat play  
10 Artists  
Display Mode  
Artist1  
Artist2  
Artist3  
Artist4  
Artist  
Play List  
Original  
1
Display the command menu during  
Select ‘Repeat’ from the menu.  
• Select Play Mode when audio files stored on a USB  
device are being played back (see The Play Mode  
menu on page 109).  
MENU  
playback.  
Artist5  
Artist6  
Artist7  
ENTER  
Artist1  
HDD  
Total 10  
2
Remain  
100.0  
G
ENTER  
2
3
Select ‘Play List’.  
ENTER  
3
Select a repeat function from the  
ENTER  
command menu panel.  
• Artist Repeat – Repeats all tracks of an artist being  
played back.  
Select a play list (‘Play List 1’ to ‘Play List  
4’) you want to play back.  
• Album Repeat – Repeats all tracks of an album  
being played back.  
• Track Repeat – Repeats the track being played back.  
Cancel – Cancels repeat playback.  
4
5
Display the command menu.  
•
ENTER  
Select ‘Play’ from the menu.  
Playing your favourite music (Play List)  
You can collect and play back only your favourite songs  
stored on the HDD.  
Creating a play list  
ENTER  
1
list.  
Select a track you want to add to a play  
Display the command menu.  
2
138  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Jukebox  
11  
ENTER  
ENTER  
Changing the display style of the  
Jukebox  
2
3
Select an album/track you want to copy.  
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Copy Album’ or ‘Copy  
ENTER  
Track’ from the command menu.  
1
Select an artist/album you want to  
change the display for.  
ENTER  
4
Select an artist/album you want to copy  
2
Display the view options panel.  
the selected album/track to.  
Select New Artist or New Album if you want to create a  
new artist/album. The name of an artist/album becomes  
A_number/A_number_F_number.  
Jukebox HDD  
Artist List  
10 Artists  
Display Mode  
Artist1  
Artist2  
Artist3  
Artist4  
Artist  
ENTER  
Play List  
Original  
5
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel.  
MENU  
Artist5  
Artist6  
Artist7  
Editing the HDD Jukebox  
Artist1  
HDD  
Total 10  
A number of commands are available for editing and  
changing the playback behavior of albums.  
Remain  
100.0  
G
JUKE  
ENTER  
1
BOX (LCD page 1) Press to display the Jukebox  
3
Select a view option.  
screen.  
• Display Mode  
By artist – Displays the artists copied onto this unit  
ENTER  
from the earliest date.  
2
3
Select what you want to edit.  
By album – Displays the albums of the selected  
artist. When you select All, albums of all artist are  
displayed.  
By track – Displays the tracks of the selected artist/  
album. When you select All, tracks of the all artist/  
album are displayed.  
ENTER  
Select an edit function from the command  
menu panel.  
1
• Erase – Deletes the selected artist/album/track.  
• Edit > Artist name – Enter a name of up to 64  
characters for the artist. See Title Name on page 120  
• Play List  
Original – Displays the settings of Display Mode  
(By artist).  
Play List 1 to Play List 4 – Displays the tracks added  
to each play list.  
Favourites – Displays up to 25 tracks you listen to  
most frequently.  
for how to enter names.  
• Edit > Album name – Enter a name of up to 64  
characters for the album. See Title Name on page 120  
for how to enter names.  
• Edit > Track name – Enter a name of up to 64  
characters for the track. See Title Name on page 120  
for how to enter names.  
• Play List name – Enter a name of up to 12 characters  
for the Play List. See Title Name on page 120 for how  
to enter names.  
Copying albums/tracks  
You can copy the albums stored on the HDD to other  
folders of a different artist on the HDD. Also, you can copy  
the tracks stored on the HDD to other albums on the HDD.  
• You cannot copy the albums/tracks stored on the  
HDD to a DVD or a USB device.  
JUKE  
1
BOX (LCD page 1) Press to display the Jukebox  
screen.  
Note  
1 Some time may be required to erase artists or albums if they include many tracks.  
139  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The PhotoViewer  
12  
Chapter 12  
The PhotoViewer  
From the PhotoViewer you can view JPEG photos and  
picture files stored on the HDD, recordable DVD or CD-R/  
Information column, you can change thumbnails via the  
ꢅ/ꢈ buttons (LCD page 1).  
1
-RW/-ROM, or on a USB-equipped digital camera. You  
Currently selected  
folder in folder list  
can also import files and save them to the recorder’s  
HDD or a DVD-R/-RW disc.  
PhotoViewer HDD  
Select Folder  
001 Folder1  
002  
003  
004  
005  
Folder2  
Folder3  
Folder4  
Folder5  
Locating JPEG picture files  
Folder  
FOLDER  
MENU  
HOME  
MENU  
006 Folder6  
007  
008  
Folder7  
Folder8  
SETUP  
1
Select ‘PhotoViewer’ from the Home Menu.  
HDD  
002 Folder2  
Files  
999  
999 MB  
Remain  
100.0  
Folder  
ENTER  
1/3  
G
2
Select the location of the files you want to  
Pages in  
folder list  
view or edit.  
Folder information  
View/Edit Photos on the HDD  
View Photos on a CD/DVD  
4
Select the file you want to view, copy or  
edit.  
View Photos on a USB Device  
Copy Files from a Digital Camera  
Currently selected  
thumbnail  
• View/Edit Photos on the HDD – View or edit photos  
already stored on the recorder’s HDD.  
PhotoViewer HDD  
Folder2  
Folder Size 999 MB  
001 PIOR0000  
• View Photos on a CD/DVD – View photos on a  
Fujicolor CD, CD-ROM, CD-R/RW, or DVD-R/-RW.  
002 PIOR0001  
003 PIOR0002  
004 PIOR0003  
005 PIOR0004  
006 PIOR0005  
007 PIOR0006  
008 PIOR0007  
009 PIOR0008  
010 PIOR0009  
011 PIOR0010  
012 PIOR0011  
File  
FILE  
MENU  
• View Photos on a USB Device – View photos on a  
digital camera (or other USB device) connected to  
the USB port.  
12 Files  
HDD  
• Copy Files from a Digital Camera – Copy all DCF  
files directly from a connected digital camera to a  
recordable DVD-R/-RW.  
Remain  
100.0  
1/84  
G
Pages in  
file list  
ENTER  
• The larger the file size, the longer it takes the recorder  
to load the file.  
3
Select the folder containing the files you  
want to view, copy or edit.  
The first image from the selected folder is displayed as  
thumbnail at the bottom of the screen. From the Folder  
• You can change folders via the ꢅ/ꢈ buttons.  
• If you encounter a disc that will not play, check that  
the disc and file formats are compatible with this  
recorder (see JPEG file compatibility and PC-created  
disc compatibility on page 60).  
• The thumbnail of files that cannot be played is  
displayed as the  
logo.  
Note  
1 Up to 999 files or 99 folders are viewable, but if there are more files/folders than this on the disc or connected USB camera it is still possible  
to view them all using the Reload function (see Reloading files from a disc or USB device on page 142).  
140  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The PhotoViewer  
12  
Changing the display style of the  
PhotoViewer  
Playing a slideshow  
ENTER  
You can choose to display photos by grouping them by  
folder, file, or number of thumbnails.  
1
Select a folder from the folder list.  
To start the slideshow from the first file in the folder, skip to  
step  
3
after choosing the desired folder and pressing  
ꢃ.  
1
Display the view options panel.  
The view options panel  
2
Select a thumbnail.  
• Use ꢁ/ꢂ (LCD page 1) to display the previous/  
next page of thumbnails.  
PhotoViewer HDD  
Folder2  
Folder Size 999 MB  
PIOR0000  
ENTER  
Display Mode  
PIOR0001  
PIOR0002  
PIOR0003  
PIOR0004  
PIOR0005  
PIOR0006  
PIOR0007  
PIOR0008  
010 PIOR0009  
011 PIOR0010  
012 PIOR0011  
File  
3
Select ‘Start Slideshow’ or ‘Start Audio  
Style  
Slideshow’ from the menu.  
12 Files  
FILE  
MENU  
When Start Audio Slideshow is selected, you can enjoy  
the slideshow while playing back music in Jukebox.  
Press ꢂ/ꢃ to select the desired play list or Favourites  
that contains the songs you want to play back and then  
press ENTER.  
HDD  
Remain  
100.0  
1/84  
G
For more information on adding music to the HDD, see  
Using the Jukebox on page 134.  
ENTER  
• You can also select a file or folder then press ꢊ  
(Play)(LCD page 1) to start playing the slideshow.  
• Use ꢁ/ꢂ to display the previous/next picture, or  
ꢉ (Pause)(LCD page 1) to pause the slideshow.  
2
Choose ‘Display Mode’ or ‘Style’ then  
press ENTER to see the available view options.  
• Display Mode – Choose between folder and file  
display modes.  
• Depending on the aspect ratio, some pictures may be  
displayed with black bars top and bottom, or left and  
right.  
• Style – Choose between displays of 1, 4 and 12  
thumbnails.  
• Large picture files may take a few seconds to display.  
This is normal.  
ENTER  
3
Choose a view option, then press ENTER.  
The display mode will change to that which you have  
chosen.  
ꢋ
4
5
(LCD page 1) Press to return to the thumbnail.  
• You can also use the RETURN button.  
HOME  
MENU  
SETUP  
Press to exit the PhotoViewer.  
141  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The PhotoViewer  
12  
Zooming an image  
During a slideshow you can zoom in to enlarge a portion  
of the picture by a factor of two or four. You can also move  
the area of the picture displayed.  
Importing files to the HDD  
2
You can import files and save them to the HDD from a  
CD, DVD or a connected USB camera. Once on the HDD  
you can edit and organize your pictures and print them  
out if you’ve connected a PictBridge-compatible printer.  
ENTER  
1
Press during the slideshow to zoom the  
picture.  
Repeated presses cycle between zoom off, 2x zoom and  
4x zoom. The zoom factor is displayed on-screen.  
ENTER  
1
Select the location of folders/files you  
want to import.  
To import a whole folder, select the desired folder, press  
ꢃ, and skip to step 3 below.  
2
Use to move the zoomed area.  
• To import multiple folders, use the Multi-Mode; see  
Selecting multiple files or folders on page 143.  
Rotating an image  
You can rotate the displayed picture during a slideshow  
so you can always view pictures the right way up,  
whichever way they were taken.  
2
3
Select a file to import, then press ꢃ.  
• To import multiple files, use the Multi-Mode; see  
Selecting multiple files or folders on page 143.  
•
(LCD page 3) Press during the slideshow to  
rotate the displayed picture clockwise by 90º.  
Press repeatedly to continue rotating the picture in  
increments of 90º.  
ENTER  
Select ‘Copy to HDD’ from the menu.  
PhotoViewer CD/DVD  
Folder2  
Folder Size 999 MB  
Start Slideshow  
001 PIOR0000  
002 PIOR0001  
003 PIOR0002  
004 PIOR0003  
005 PIOR0004  
006 PIOR0005  
007 PIOR0006  
008 PIOR0007  
009 PIOR0008  
010 PIOR0009  
011 PIOR0010  
012 PIOR0011  
Copy all to HDD  
Copy to HDD  
Reloading files from a disc or USB  
device  
File  
Print  
Detailed Information
12 Files  
Multi-Mode  
If you have a disc with more than 1000 files and/or 100  
folders, you can still view all the images using the reload  
function.  
HDD  
Remain  
100.0  
1/84  
G
1
Navigate to the last entry in the folder list  
(‘Read next: ...’).  
ENTER  
4
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm and copy the  
ENTER  
2
Load the next batch of up to 999 files/99  
folder(s)/file(s), or ‘No’ to cancel.  
folders from the disc or connected USB device.  
It will take a moment (at most a few minutes) to load in  
the images.  
• The files will be copied to the HDD with the same  
folder structure as the original.  
1
• Importing to the HDD will not work if there is  
insufficient space on the HDD, or if there are already  
the maximum number of files and/or folders on the  
HDD (999 folders/999 files per folder).  
Note  
1 You can press HOME MENU to exit the PhotoViewer screen while the recorder is reloading images. (If you enter the PhotoViewer again, it will  
resume reloading.)  
2 For files you want to keep permanently, we recommend backing up to DVD-R/-RW.  
142  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The PhotoViewer  
12  
Selecting multiple files or folders  
Copying files to a DVD-R/-RW  
Using this feature you can copy all the files (including  
audio and movie files) stored on a connected USB  
camera to a recordable DVD disc.  
1
The Multi-Mode allows you to select multiple folders/files  
at once for importing or editing.  
ENTER  
A slideshow of the files is also recorded on the disc as a  
Video mode title, making it possible to view the photos on  
other DVD players/recorders that may not be compatible  
with JPEG file playback.  
1
Select the folder containing the files you  
want to import.  
Once the files have been copied, the disc is automatically  
finalized.  
2
3
Display the command menu.  
ENTER  
Important  
Select ‘Multi-Mode’ from the menu.  
• Use a blank DVD-R/-RW disc, or one that has already  
been initialized for Video mode recording but has  
nothing yet recorded on it. Discs that have already  
been recorded on (as well as CD-R/-RW discs) cannot  
be used.  
PhotoViewer HDD  
Select Folder  
001 Folder1  
Start Slideshow  
002  
003  
004  
005  
Folder2  
Folder3  
Folder4  
Folder5  
Start Audio Slideshow  
New Folder  
Folder  
Folder Options  
Copy to DVD  
• After backing up the pictures in your digital camera  
to DVD, we recommend verifying that they have been  
recorded properly before deleting anything from the  
camera.  
Multi-Mode  
006 Folder6  
007  
008  
Folder7  
Folder8  
HDD  
002 Folder2  
Files  
999  
Remain  
100.0  
Folder  
999 MB  
1/3  
G
1
Press HOME MENU and select ‘PhotoViewer’ to  
display the PhotoViewer screen.  
ENTER  
2
Load a blank (or unrecorded Video mode) DVD-R  
4
Select files/folders from the list.  
or DVD-RW disc.  
An orange check mark box (ꢆ) is shown by the item you  
selected. A blue check mark box (ꢆ) appears on the folder  
select screen when files from that folder are selected.  
ENTER  
3
Select ‘Copy Files from a Digital Camera’  
from the menu.  
PhotoViewer HDD  
Multi-Mode  
Select Folder  
001 Folder1  
002  
003  
004  
005  
Folder2  
Folder3  
Folder4  
Folder5  
View/Edit Photos on the HDD  
View Photos on a CD/DVD  
Folder  
FOLDER  
MENU  
006 Folder6  
View Photos on a USB Device  
Copy Files from a Digital Camera  
007  
008  
Folder7  
Folder8  
HDD  
002 Folder2  
Files  
Folder  
999  
999 MB  
Remain  
100.0  
1/3  
G
ENTER  
4
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel.  
• Note that during copying, any timer programmes set  
to start will not begin, and no other operations are  
possible.  
5
6
Display the command menu.  
ENTER  
Select the command you want to apply to  
all the selected items.  
Note  
1 • There is a limit to the number of files/amount of data that you can copy at one time.  
• Only DCF format files in DCIM folders can be copied to a recordable DVD-R/-RW.  
143  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The PhotoViewer  
12  
Copying selected files to a DVD-R/-RW Editing files on the HDD  
This feature allows you just to copy some of the files  
stored on HDD to a DVD.  
There are a number of commands you can use to edit and  
organize your pictures stored on the HDD.  
A slideshow of the files is also recorded on the disc as a  
Video mode title, making it possible to view the photos on  
other DVD players/recorders that may not be compatible  
with JPEG file playback. Note however that you may need  
to finalize the disc before it will play on another DVD  
player (copying selected files doesn’t automatically  
finalize the disc).  
Creating a new folder  
1
From the folder list, display the menu.  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘New Folder’.  
Important  
The folder appears at the bottom of the folder list with the  
• A maximum of 99 slideshow titles can be recorded.  
name F_number.  
• One slideshow title can contain up to 99 files. If there  
are more files than this in the slideshow, multiple  
slideshows are created on the disc.  
PhotoViewer HDD  
Select Folder  
001 Folder1  
Start Slideshow  
• If you erase a slideshow title from a DVD the  
slideshow will become unplayable but the free space  
will not increase.  
002 Folder2  
Start Audio Slideshow  
Folder  
003  
004  
005  
Folder3  
Folder4  
Folder5  
New Folder  
Folder Options  
Copy to DVD  
Multi-Mode  
006 Folder6  
1
Load a blank (or unfinalized Video mode) DVD-R  
007  
008  
Folder7  
Folder8  
or DVD-RW disc.  
HDD  
G
002 Folder2  
Files  
Folder  
999  
999 MB  
Remain  
100.0  
1/3  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘View/Edit Photos on the HDD’  
• There can be up to 999 folders on the HDD.  
from the menu.  
Erasing a file or folder  
ENTER  
3
Select the file(s) or folder(s) you want to  
copy.  
• Copying a folder will copy all the files contained in it.  
1
Select the file(s) or folder(s) you want to  
erase.  
• To copy multiple folders, use the Multi-Mode; see  
• To erase multiple files or folders, use the Multi-Mode;  
see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 143.  
Selecting multiple files or folders on page 143.  
• Erasing a folder will erase all the files contained in it.  
Please be careful!  
ENTER  
4
5
Select ‘Copy to DVD’ from the menu.  
• You can’t erase files that have been locked.  
• Folders containing locked files can’t be erased.  
Unlocked files in the folder, however, will be erased.  
ENTER  
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel.  
• Folder names on the disc will be number PIONR. File  
names will be PHOT number.  
2
Display the command menu.  
• Note that during copying, any timer programmes set  
to start will not begin, and no other operation is  
possible.  
• While ‘Cancel’ is displayed, you can press ENTER to  
cancel.  
144  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The PhotoViewer  
12  
ENTER  
ENTER  
3
Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder Options’.  
4
Select ‘Copy’ or ‘Copy Folder Contents’.  
PhotoViewer HDD  
Folder2  
PhotoViewer HDD  
Folder Size 999 MB  
Start Slideshow  
Folder2  
Folder Size 999 MB  
001 PIOR0000  
001 PIOR0000  
002 PIOR0001  
003 PIOR0002  
004 PIOR0003  
005 PIOR0004  
006 PIOR0005  
007 PIOR0006  
008 PIOR0007  
009 PIOR0008  
010 PIOR0009  
011 PIOR0010  
012 PIOR0011  
Erase  
Copy  
002 PIOR0001  
003 PIOR0002  
004 PIOR0003  
005 PIOR0004  
006 PIOR0005  
007 PIOR0006  
008 PIOR0007  
009 PIOR0008  
010 PIOR0009  
011 PIOR0010  
012 PIOR0011  
Start Audio Slideshow  
File Options  
Print  
File  
File  
Rename File  
Lock  
Copy to DVD  
12 Files  
12 Files  
Detailed Information  
Multi-Mode  
Cancel  
HDD  
HDD  
Remain  
100.0  
Remain  
100.0  
1/84  
G
1/84  
G
ENTER  
ENTER  
4
Select ‘Erase’ or ‘Erase Folder’.  
5
to.  
Select a folder to copy the folder(s)/file(s)  
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel.  
• Copying to the HDD will not work if there is  
insufficient space on the HDD; if there are already the  
maximum number of files and/or folders on the HDD.  
PhotoViewer HDD  
Folder2  
Folder Size 999 MB  
ENTER  
001 PIOR0000  
002 PIOR0001  
003 PIOR0002  
004 PIOR0003  
005 PIOR0004  
006 PIOR0005  
007 PIOR0006  
008 PIOR0007  
009 PIOR0008  
010 PIOR0009  
011 PIOR0010  
012 PIOR0011  
Stlihw  
Erase  
Copy  
6
File  
Rename File  
Lock  
12 Files  
Cancel  
HDD  
Naming files and folders  
Remain  
100.0  
1/84  
G
1
Select the file or folder you want to  
ENTER  
rename.  
5
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel.  
You can’t rename files that have been locked.  
• You can also erase a file or folder by pressing CLEAR  
(LCD page 2) when the file or folder is highlighted.  
Press ENTER to confirm.  
2
3
4
Display the command menu.  
Copying files  
ENTER  
ENTER  
Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder Options’.  
1
Select the file(s) or folder(s) you want to  
copy.  
Select ‘Rename File’ or ‘Rename Folder’.  
• Copying a folder will copy all the files contained in it.  
• To copy multiple files or folders, use the Multi-Mode;  
see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 143.  
PhotoViewer HDD  
Folder2  
Folder Size 999 MB  
001 PIOR0000  
002 PIOR0001  
003 PIOR0002  
004 PIOR0003  
005 PIOR0004  
006 PIOR0005  
007 PIOR0006  
008 PIOR0007  
009 PIOR0008  
010 PIOR0009  
011 PIOR0010  
012 PIOR0011  
Erase  
Copy  
File  
2
3
Display the command menu.  
Rename File  
Lock  
12 Files  
ENTER  
Cancel  
Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder Options’.  
HDD  
Remain  
100.0  
1/84  
G
145  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The PhotoViewer  
12  
5
Enter a new name for the file/folder.  
1
Choose the file for which you would like to see  
File names or Folder names can be up to 64 characters  
long.  
detailed information.  
2
Choose ‘Detailed Information’.  
See Using a USB keyboard to enter a name on page 120  
for how to enter a name.  
When no detailed information is available, nothing is  
displayed.  
Locking/Unlocking files  
Locking files will protect them from accidental erasure  
and prevent them from being renamed.  
Printing files  
Connecting a PictBridge-compatible printer to the USB  
Use the same process to both lock and unlock files.  
Locked files are displayed in the PhotoViewer with a  
padlock icon.  
1
port will enable you to print out picture files stored on  
the HDD, a CD/DVD or directly from a digital camera.  
Make sure that the printer (and your digital camera if you  
are using that as a source) is connected to the recorder  
before starting.  
1
Select the file(s) you want to lock (or  
unlock).  
• To lock/unlock multiple files or folders, use the Multi-  
Mode; see Selecting multiple files or folders on  
page 143.  
1
Select the file(s) you want to print.  
• To print multiple files, use the Multi-Mode; see  
Selecting multiple files or folders on page 143.  
2
3
4
Display the command menu.  
2
3
Display the command menu.  
ENTER  
ENTER  
Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder Options’.  
Select ‘Print’ from the menu.  
ENTER  
PhotoViewer HDD  
Select ‘Lock’ or ‘Lock Folder Contents’.  
Folder2  
Folder Size 999 MB  
Start Slideshow  
001 PIOR0000  
002 PIOR0001  
003 PIOR0002  
004 PIOR0003  
005 PIOR0004  
006 PIOR0005  
007 PIOR0006  
008 PIOR0007  
009 PIOR0008  
010 PIOR0009  
011 PIOR0010  
012 PIOR0011  
Start Audio Slideshow  
File Options  
Print  
File  
PhotoViewer HDD  
Folder2  
Folder Size 999 MB  
Copy to DVD  
12 Files  
001 PIOR0000  
002 PIOR0001  
003 PIOR0002  
004 PIOR0003  
005 PIOR0004  
006 PIOR0005  
007 PIOR0006  
008 PIOR0007  
009 PIOR0008  
010 PIOR0009  
011 PIOR0010  
012 PIOR0011  
Erase  
Copy  
Detailed Information  
Multi-Mode  
File  
Rename File  
Lock  
HDD  
12 Files  
Remain  
100.0  
1/84  
G
Cancel  
HDD  
ENTER  
Remain  
100.0  
1/84  
G
4
Select ‘Start’ to confirm or ‘Cancel’ to  
cancel.  
Locked files are shown with a padlock icon next to them.  
To remove all locks within a given folder, choose ‘Folder  
Option’ > ‘Unlock Folder Contents’.  
• Once printing has started, you can cancel by  
pressing ENTER.  
To view detailed information  
Tip  
This feature allows you to check the settings of the  
camera from which you imported the photos.  
• Paper size and layout can be set; the options  
available depend on your printer — check the printer  
manual for details.  
• This recorder may not work correctly with all printers.  
Note  
1 Picture files should be standard DCF format. Non-standard files may not print properly.  
146  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Disc Setup menu  
13  
Chapter 13  
The Disc Setup menu  
From the Disc Setup menu you can name discs, lock the  
contents to prevent accidental recording and erasure,  
initialize and finalize discs. The Disc Setup menu is  
accessed from the Home menu.  
Important  
• A locked disc can still be initialized (which will  
completely erase the disc).  
HOME  
MENU  
SETUP  
1
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home Menu.  
Basic settings  
ENTER  
Input Disc Name  
2
Select ‘Basic’ > ‘Lock Disc’ then ‘On’ or ‘Off’.  
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM  
Disc Setup  
When you initialize a disc for recording, the recorder  
automatically assigns a name for the disc ranging from  
DISC 1 to DISC 99. You can use the Input Disc Name  
function to change the default disc name to something  
more descriptive. This name appears when you load the  
disc and when you display disc information on-screen.  
Basic  
Input Disc Name  
Lock Disc  
On  
Off  
Initialize  
Finalize  
DVD-RW Auto Init.  
Optimize HDD  
HOME  
MENU  
Set to On to prevent accidental recording, editing or  
erasing of the disc loaded. If you need to unlock the disc  
to make edits, select Off.  
SETUP  
1
2
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home Menu.  
DVD-RW Auto Initialize  
ENTER  
Select ‘Basic’ > ‘Input Disc Name’ > ‘Next  
DVD-RW  
Screen’.  
• Default setting: VR Mode  
Disc Setup  
Initialization mode is automatically carried out when you  
insert a blank DVD-RW. You must set the desired  
initialization mode before inserting a disc.  
Input Disc Name  
Lock Disc  
Next Screen  
Basic  
Initialize  
Finalize  
DVD-RW Auto Init.  
Optimize HDD  
See DVD-RW Auto Initialize on page 102 for detailed  
instructions.  
Initialize settings  
ENTER  
3
Input a name for the disc.  
DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+RW DVD-RAM  
The disc name can be up to 64 characters long for a VR  
mode disc, or 40 for a Video mode discs and DVD+R/+RW.  
You can initialize a recordable DVD-R/-RW disc for either  
VR mode or Video mode recording.  
The first time you load a new DVD-RW disc, it will be  
automatically initialized for recording according to the  
DVD-RW Auto Init. setting in the Disc Setup menu (see  
page 102).  
New DVD-R discs are ready for Video mode recording  
when you load them, but it is also possible to initialize  
them for VR mode recording.  
• See Title Name on page 120 for more on navigating  
the input screen.  
Lock Disc  
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM  
• Default setting: Off  
1
Locking the disc will prevent accidental recording,  
editing or erasing of the disc.  
Note  
1
Once initialized for VR mode recording it is not possible to re-initialize the disc for Video mode recording. Also, once recorded in Video mode,  
the disc cannot be re-initialized for VR mode recording.  
147  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Disc Setup menu  
13  
DVD+RW and DVD-RAM discs can also be initialized as  
a way of erasing the entire disc. When initializing a DVD  
-RAM disc, select VR mode.  
See Initializing recordable DVD discs on page 102 for  
detailed instructions.  
Important  
• Optimizing the HDD can take as long as eight hours.  
During optimization, playback and recording are not  
possible.  
• Cancelling optimization mid-way does not undo the  
optimization already done, so the HDD will be partly  
optimized.  
Finalize settings  
HOME  
MENU  
Finalize  
SETUP  
1
2
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home Menu.  
DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+R DVD+RW  
ENTER  
Finalizing ‘fixes’ the recordings in place so that the disc  
can be played on a regular DVD player or computer  
equipped with a suitable DVD-ROM drive.  
Select ‘Optimize HDD’ then ‘Start’.  
Disc Setup  
It is also possible to finalize DVD+RW discs. This is only  
necessary if you want to a player to display a title menu  
for the disc.  
Start  
Basic  
Optimize HDD  
Initialize  
Finalize  
Optimize HDD  
See Playing your recordings on other DVD players on  
page 101 for detailed instructions.  
Undo Finalize  
A progress bar indicates how long there is left to go. If no  
actions are carried out for more than 20 minutes after the  
optimization process is completed, the unit turns itself  
off.  
DVD-RW  
You can undo the finalization on DVD-RW discs recorded  
on this recorder in Video mode. You need to do this if you  
want to record more material or edit material already on  
the disc.  
You can also undo the finalization of VR mode discs  
which have been finalized on other DVD recorders. If  
when you load a disc the message This disc cannot be  
recorded. Undo the finalization. is displayed, use this  
command to be able to record on the disc using this  
recorder.  
Initialize HDD  
HDD  
When your HDD/DVD recorder is working without a  
problem this option is not visible in the Disc Setup menu.  
However, if the HDD file system becomes corrupted for  
some reason, you can initialize the HDD to fix the  
problem. Note that initializing the HDD will erase all the  
data on it.  
HOME  
MENU  
SETUP  
1
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home Menu.  
Select ‘Finalize’ > ‘Undo Finalize’ then  
HOME  
MENU  
ENTER  
2
SETUP  
1
2
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home Menu.  
‘Start’.  
ENTER  
Select ‘Initialize HDD’ then ‘Start’.  
Optimize HDD  
Disc Setup  
HDD  
Basic  
Initialize HDD  
Start  
Initialize  
Finalize  
As you record, erase and edit recordings, the HDD file  
system gradually becomes fragmented. Periodically, the  
HDD will need optimizing to ‘clean up’ all the fragmented  
files.  
InitializeHDD
When the HDD needs optimizing the recorder will  
automatically display a message recommending  
optimization.  
148  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Video Adjust menu  
14  
Chapter 14  
The Video Adjust menu  
Using the Video Adjust menu you can set up the picture  
quality for the built-in tuner and external input, for disc  
playback, and for recording.  
Creating your own set  
There are three user presets in which you can save your  
own set of picture quality settings.  
1
Follow Choosing a preset above and select one of  
the user presets (Memory 1, 2 or 3).  
Setting the picture quality for TV and  
ENTER  
external input  
2
3
Select ‘Detailed Settings’.  
Picture Creation lets you choose a set of picture quality  
1
settings for the built-in TV tuner and for the external  
Pr 1  
input. There are several preset settings that suit various  
sources, or you can create up to three of your own sets.  
Memory1  
Detailed Settings  
Choosing a preset  
ENTER  
HOME  
MENU  
Select the setting you want to adjust.  
SETUP  
1
With the recorder stopped, press to display  
the Home Menu.  
Memory1  
Pr  
1
Prog. Motion  
PureCinma  
3-D Y/C  
YNR  
Motion  
Still  
ENTER  
Auto  
2
3
Select ‘Video Adjust’.  
Motion  
Off  
Still  
Max  
Max  
Max  
ENTER  
CNR  
Off  
Select a preset.  
Detail  
Off  
Pr 1  
White AGC  
Off  
Tuner  
Detailed Settings  
You can adjust the following settings:  
• Prog. Motion – Adjusts the motion and still picture  
quality when video output is set to progressive.  
• Use the INPUT button (LCD page 2) to switch between  
the built-in TV tuner and the external input.  
• PureCinema – This setting optimizes the picture for  
film material when the video output is set to  
progressive. Usually set to Auto; but try switching to  
Off if the picture appears unnatural.  
• Use the CH +/– buttons (LCD page 2) to change the  
channel of the built-in TV tuner.  
There are six presets available:  
• Tuner – suitable for general TV broadcasts  
• VCR – suitable for video cassettes  
• 3-D Y/C – Adjusts the brightness/colour separation.  
• YNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)  
applied to the Y (brightness) component.  
• DTV/LDP – suitable for digital broadcasts and  
Laserdiscs  
• CNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)  
applied to the C (colour) component.  
• Memory1 – user preset 1  
• Memory2 – user preset 2  
• Memory3 – user preset 3  
• Detail – Adjusts how sharp edges appear.  
• White AGC – Turn on for automatic white level  
adjustment.  
You can press DISP (LCD page 3) to see the individual  
settings for the current preset (Tuner, VCR or DTV/LDP).  
• White Level – Adjusts the intensity of white.  
• Black Level – Adjusts the intensity of black.  
Note  
1 When an HDMI component is not connected, the settings for the digital tuner cannot be changed.  
149  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Video Adjust menu  
14  
• Black Setup – Corrects the standard reference black  
level (525 Input Line System only).  
Setting the picture quality for disc  
playback  
• Hue – Adjusts overall balance between red and green.  
• Chroma Level – Adjusts how rich the colours appear.  
This setting determines how the picture will look when  
playing discs.  
ENTER  
4
5
Adjust the currently selected setting.  
Choosing a preset  
HOME  
MENU  
HOME  
MENU  
SETUP  
Press to exit.  
SETUP  
1
With a disc playing (or paused), press to  
You can now use the preset for any other input or the  
built-in TV tuner.  
display the Home Menu.  
ENTER  
Tip  
2
3
Select ‘Video Adjust’.  
• To see more of the picture as you adjust different  
settings, press ENTER after selecting the setting you  
want to adjust.  
ENTER  
Select a setting.  
TV  
Detailed Settings  
There are six presets available:  
• TV – suitable for LCD and cathode-ray tube TVs  
• PDP – suitable for plasma television screens  
• Professional – suitable for professional monitors  
• Memory1 – user preset 1  
• Memory2 – user preset 2  
• Memory3 – user preset 3  
You can press DISP (LCD page 3) to see the individual  
settings for the current preset (TV, PDP or Professional).  
Creating your own set  
There are three user presets in which you can save your  
own set of picture quality settings for disc playback.  
1
Follow Choosing a preset above and select one of  
the user presets (Memory 1, 2 or 3).  
2
Move the cursor down and select ‘Detailed  
Settings’.  
Memory1  
Detailed Settings  
150  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Video Adjust menu  
14  
3
Select the picture quality setting you want to  
Tip  
adjust.  
• To see more of the picture as you adjust different  
settings, press ENTER after selecting the setting you  
want to adjust.  
Memory1  
Prog. Motion  
PureCinma  
Motion  
Still  
Auto1  
YNR  
Off  
Off  
Max  
Max  
Max  
Fine  
Fine  
BNR  
MNR  
Off  
Sharpness  
Detail  
Soft  
Soft  
You can adjust the following settings:  
• Prog. Motion – Adjusts the motion and still picture  
quality when video output is set to progressive. (Prog.  
Motion is ineffective when PureCinema is On.)  
• PureCinema – This setting optimizes the picture for  
film material when the video output is set to  
progressive. Usually set to Auto 1 but try switching to  
Auto 2, On or Off if the picture appears unnatural.  
• YNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)  
applied to the Y (brightness) component.  
• BNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)  
applied to the block noise (artefacts visible in areas of  
flat colour, caused by MPEG compression).  
• MNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)  
applied to the mosquito noise (artefacts visible  
around the edges of an image, caused by MPEG  
compression).  
• Sharpness – Adjusts the sharpness of the high-  
frequency (detailed) elements in the picture.  
Sharpness is ineffective for HDMI output.  
• Detail – Adjusts how sharp edges appear.  
• White Level – Adjusts the intensity of white. White  
Level is ineffective for HDMI output.  
• Black Level – Adjusts the intensity of black. Black  
Level is ineffective for HDMI output.  
• Black Setup – Corrects the standard reference black  
level. Black Setup is ineffective for HDMI output.  
• Gamma Correction – Adjusts the brightness of  
darker images. Gamma Correction is ineffective for  
HDMI output.  
• Hue – Adjusts overall balance between red and  
green. Hue is ineffective for HDMI output.  
• Chroma Level – Adjusts how rich the colours  
appear. Chroma Level is ineffective for HDMI output.  
4
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to adjust the currently  
selected picture quality setting.  
5
When you have all the settings as you want  
them, press HOME MENU to exit.  
151  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
15  
Chapter 15  
The Initial Setup menu  
Using the Initial Setup menu  
The Initial Setup menu is where you can set various recorder options for sound, picture, language and so on.  
Some settings can only be changed when the recorder is stopped. During playback and recording these settings are  
grayed out in the Initial Setup menu.  
Except for the Setup Navigator, menu screens are exited automatically after 20 minutes of inactivity.  
•
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Initial Setup’.  
In the table below, the default option is marked with a •.  
Setting  
Options  
Explanation  
Basic  
Clock Setting  
Auto  
Set the channel that broadcasts a clock signal and the clock will be set  
automatically.  
Manual •  
If there is no channel that broadcasts a clock signal in your area, you can set  
the time and date manually.  
• If any digital TV channels are set then the clock will automatically be set.  
• The clock must be set in order to use timer recording.  
Input Line System  
525 System  
Use for NTSC or PAL-60 recording from an external input.  
Use for standard PAL or SECAM recording.  
625 System •  
• This setting is applicable only when recording from an external input. Note that you cannot select an external input when AV2/L1 In is set to  
Decoder (page 155).  
• See also About the input line system on page 161 for more information on this setting.  
Power Save  
Mode 1  
Mode 2  
Off •  
Only signals arriving at the antenna input are passed through to the antenna  
output when the recorder is in standby.  
No input signals are passed through to the outputs when the recorder is in  
standby.  
When the recorder is in standby, all signals arriving at the SCART and  
antenna inputs are passed along to the outputs.  
HELP Setting  
On •  
Off  
Switches on the automatic Help screens for GUI displays.  
Switches off the automatic Help screens for GUI displays. (Press HELP on  
the remote to manually display the Help screen.)  
EPG Type Select  
Setup Navigator  
GUIDE Plus+  
Digital EPG  
Start  
Use the Gemstar GUIDE Plus+ EPG.  
Use the EPG based on information provided by D.TV broadcasts.  
Select to start the Setup Navigator. See also Switching on and setting up on  
page 68.  
152  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
15  
Setting  
Options  
Explanation  
Digital Tuner  
Replace Channels  
Next Screen  
Scans for digital channels and replaces all the channel presets with the  
results. Before the scan starts you will need to select your country.  
After the scan is complete the recorder tells you whether any new channels  
were found, and if so, how many.  
(You can cancel the scan before it has finished by pressing HOME MENU or  
RETURN. In this case, no channels are set.)  
If you execute a Replace Channels command, any timer recordings set for D.TV channels will be erased.  
Add New Channels  
Next Screen  
Automatically scans for new digital channels.  
After the scan is complete the recorder tells you whether any new channels  
were found, and if so, how many.  
(You can cancel the scan before it has finished by pressing HOME MENU or  
RETURN. In this case, no new channels are set.)  
Channel Sort  
Next Screen  
Use this screen to sort channel presets into your prefered order. Use the  
ꢄ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to highlight the channel you want to move, press  
ENTER. Use the cursor buttons again to highlight the position you want to  
move the channel preset to, then press ENTER again.  
(If there are more channel presets than will fit on one screen, you can select  
the next/previous page by highlighting the small triangular marks and  
pressing ENTER.)  
Channel Options  
Next Screen  
From this screen you can skip or lock channels. Locked channels will require  
the correct password to be entered before the channel can be watched. Use  
the ꢄ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to highlight a preference box and press ENTER to  
toggle the preference.  
To enter this screen, input the parental lock password when prompted (if one  
has not yet been set then the password you enter becomes the parental lock  
password).  
Auto Skip  
Off •  
No channels are automatically skipped.  
Radio  
Radio channels are skipped when selecting channels.  
Data channels are skipped when selecting channels.  
Radio and data channels are skipped when selecting channels.  
Data  
Radio & Data  
Next Screen  
Signal Check  
Aerial Power  
Use this screen to check the signal level and quality of digital channels. Use  
the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to change the RF channel; select Add New Channels  
then press ENTER to scan for new channels; press HOME MENU to exit.  
On  
Power is supplied to the connected aerial (antenna) when this recorder is on  
or in standby.  
Auto  
Off •  
Power is supplied to the connected aerial (antenna) only when this recorder  
is on.  
This recorder does not supply power to the connected aerial (antenna).  
If the setting keeps reverting to Off when you try to set to On or Auto, the aerial may not be connected properly, or it may be shorted. In either  
case, check the connection and try making the setting again.  
D.TV Language  
Next Screen  
From this screen you can set your Primary and Secondary Audio preference  
for multilingual digital broadcasts, your Primary and Secondary Subtitle  
preference for programmes that are broadcast with subtitles, and your  
Teletext language preference. Use the ꢄ/ꢁ buttons to highlight a field then  
use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to change it.  
153  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
15  
Setting  
Options  
Explanation  
Analog Tuner  
Auto Channel Setting Auto Scan  
Select your country and then wait for the recorder to auto tune into channels  
in your area. After auto scan has finished, the channel mapping screen  
appears showing which channels have been assigned to which programme  
numbers. You can skip unwanted channels using the Manual CH Setting  
option below.  
Press HOME MENU to exit the channel mapping screen.  
Download from TV If your TV supports this feature you can download all the channels that your  
TV is tuned to via the SCART input. Select your country and then wait for the  
download to complete. After the download is complete, the channel  
mapping screen appears, as above.  
See also the operating instructions that came with your TV for more  
information.  
Manual CH Setting  
Next Screen  
Proceed to the next screen if you need to adjust any of the settings made by  
auto tuning. Select your country, then proceed to the manual channel  
setting screen:  
• Change channel presets using the CH +/– buttons (LCD page 2).  
• To skip the displayed channel (because there is no station assigned to that  
channel), change the Skip setting to On.  
• Set the CH SYSTEM setting to match the channel system of your country  
or region.  
• Set the CHANNEL setting to the channel you want to assign to the current  
channel preset.  
• To manually fine tune the channel, change the AFT setting to Off then  
adjust the Level setting.  
• Set the Sound System setting to match the sound system of your region.  
• The Name field allows you to input a name of up to five characters for the  
current channel preset.  
• If the currently selected channel is scrambled requiring a decoder  
connected to the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER), set the Decoder setting to On.  
Channel Swapping  
Video In/Out  
Next Screen  
Proceed to the next screen to swap channel assignments of different presets  
so that you can group together presets that naturally go together. Select two  
presets to swap then press ENTER.  
Input Colour System Next Screen  
Proceed to the next screen to set the input colour system for the external  
input and the built-in TV tuner. Use the CH +/– or INPUT buttons (LCD page  
2) to change the preset or external input. On the default Auto setting the  
recorder can generally correctly detect whether the input signal is PAL,  
SECAM, 3.58 NTSC or PAL-60, but in some cases you may have to set it  
manually if the picture is displayed incorrectly.  
• Input Colour System cannot be set when the recorder is in D.TV mode.  
• See also About the input colour system on page 161 for more information on this setting.  
AV1 Out  
Video •  
S-Video  
RGB  
Sets the AV1 (RGB)-TV SCART output to standard composite video  
(compatible with all TVs).  
Sets the AV1 (RGB)-TV SCART output to S-Video. Recommended if you are  
using a long SCART cable.  
Sets the AV1 (RGB)-TV SCART output to RGB. Good quality but check your  
TV for compatibility. Note that on this setting signals from the built-in tuner  
and from external input is not output when the recorder is in TV mode.  
If you choose a setting that is incompatible with your TV you may not be able to see any picture at all. In this case either switch off and reconnect  
using the supplied video cable, or reset the recorder (see Resetting the recorder on page 175).  
154  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
15  
Setting  
Options  
Video •  
Explanation  
AV2/L1 In  
Sets the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART input to standard composite  
video.  
S-Video  
RGB  
Sets the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART input to S-Video.  
Sets the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART input to RGB.  
Decoder  
Use this setting if you connected a decoder to the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)  
SCART connector. For scrambled channels, make sure that the channel  
Decoder setting is set to On. (See Manual CH Setting on page 154.)  
NTSC on PAL TV  
On •  
Off  
NTSC discs will play correctly on PAL-only TVs.  
Use if your TV is already NTSC-compatible.  
Many recent PAL TVs are compatible with NTSC input and so this setting can be switched off. Check the operating instructions that came with  
your TV. See also About NTSC on PAL TV on page 161 for related information.  
Audio In  
NICAM Select  
NICAM •  
Record the NICAM audio in a NICAM broadcast.  
Regular Audio  
Record the non-NICAM audio in a NICAM broadcast. (You can still switch the  
audio to record using the  
button (LCD page 3) before recording.)  
Analog Tuner Level  
External Audio  
Normal •  
Standard setting.  
Compression  
Stereo •  
Use if the audio level from the built-in tuner is excessive, causing distortion.  
Select if the audio from the currently selected external input is standard  
stereo.  
Bilingual  
Select if each channel carries a separate soundtrack.  
When the external audio is from the DV input, an audio subcode channel within the DV audio tells the recorder whether the audio is stereo or  
bilingual. This has priority over the setting you make here.  
Bilingual Recording  
A/L •  
Record the left (A) channel of a bilingual source when recording to HDD  
with HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode On, to DVD-R/-RW (Video  
mode) or DVD+R/+RW or in LPCM mode, from an external source.  
B/R  
As above, but for right (B) channel recording.  
When recording bilingual audio to DVD in VR mode (except in LPCM mode), or to HDD with HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode Off (except  
in LPCM mode), both audio channels are recorded and you can switch to the one you want on playback.  
DV Input  
Stereo 1 •  
Stereo 2  
Mix  
Select to use the ‘live’ audio track (recorded during the video shoot) from a  
camcorder that supports two stereo audio tracks.  
Select to use the overdubbed audio track from a camcorder that supports  
two stereo audio tracks.  
Select one of the three settings to use a mix of the two stereo audio tracks.  
Audio Out  
Dolby Digital Out  
Dolby Digital •  
Output a Dolby Digital signal when a Dolby Digital source is being played.  
Dolby Digital ꢅ  
PCM  
Convert Dolby Digital sources to Linear PCM output. Use if your connected  
equipment doesn’t have a Dolby Digital decoder.  
DTS Out  
On •  
Off  
Output a DTS signal when a DTS source is being played.  
Switch off the digital output when a DTS source is being played. Use when  
your connected equipment doesn’t have a DTS decoder. In this case, use the  
analog audio outputs.  
155  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
15  
Setting  
Options  
Explanation  
96 kHz PCM Out  
96 kHz ꢅ 48 kHz • Convert 96 kHz digital audio sources to 48 kHz output. Use if your connected  
equipment doesn’t support 96 kHz sampling rate.  
96 kHz  
MPEG  
Output 96 kHz digital audio when a 96 kHz source is being played.  
MPEG Out  
Audio DRC  
Output an MPEG audio signal when a source using MPEG audio is being  
played.  
MPEG ꢅ PCM •  
Convert sources with MPEG audio to Linear PCM output. Use if your  
connected equipment doesn’t have an MPEG audio decoder.  
On  
Switches on Audio DRC (Dynamic Range Control). Use when listening to  
Dolby Digital material at low volume.  
Off •  
Switches off Audio DRC.  
Audio DRC is not effective when listening via the digital output when the Dolby Digital Out setting is set to Dolby Digital. In this case adjust the  
dynamic range from the receiver subwoofer — see Dynamic Range Control on page 38.  
Language  
OSD Language  
English •  
available languages Choose from the languages displayed for the on-screen displays.  
On Screen Display and D.TV Language will both reflect this setting.  
Audio Language English • Sets the default audio language for DVD-Video playback to English.  
Sets the language of the on-screen displays to English.  
available languages Choose from the languages displayed to set the default audio language for  
DVD-Video playback.  
Other  
Select to set the default audio language to something other than the ones  
listed. See Selecting other languages for language options on page 162.  
Discs do not necessarily have audio in your selected language. Also, some discs override the Audio Language preference.  
Subtitle Language English • Sets the default subtitle language for DVD-Video playback to English.  
available languages Choose from the languages displayed to set the default subtitle language for  
DVD-Video playback.  
Other  
Select to set the default subtitle language to something other than the ones  
listed. See Selecting other languages for language options on page 162.  
Discs do not necessarily have subtitles in your selected menu language. Also, some discs override the Subtitle Language preference.  
Auto Language  
On •  
On this setting:  
• DVD-Video discs whose main audio track is in your default language will  
play using that language, without subtitles.  
• Discs whose main audio track is not in your default language but that have  
a subtitle track in your default language will play the original audio track with  
subtitles.  
Off  
Select to play DVD-Video discs according to your audio and subtitle  
language preferences.  
For Auto Language to be effective, the Audio Language and Subtitle Language options must be set to the same language.  
156  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
15  
Setting  
Options  
Explanation  
DVD Menu Language w/Subtitle  
Sets the language of DVD-Video menus to the same as that set for the  
subtitle language.  
Language •  
English  
Sets the language of DVD-Video menus to English.  
available languages Choose from the displayed languages to set the default language for DVD  
-Video menus.  
Other  
Select to set the DVD menu language to something other than the ones  
listed. See Selecting other languages for language options on page 162.  
Discs do not necessarily have menus in your selected menu language.  
Subtitle Display  
On •  
Select to have discs display subtitles according to your Subtitle Language  
and Auto Language preferences.  
Off  
Select to switch off subtitle display.  
Assist Subtitle  
Select to display special additional assistive subtitles, where available.  
Some discs may override these settings.  
Recording  
Manual Recording  
On (go to setup)  
Off •  
All the standard recording modes, plus MN1 to MN32, LPCM and XP+  
modes can be set.  
Just the standard recording modes (XP, SP, LP, EP, SLP and SEP) can be set.  
See also Manual recording modes on page 164 for detailed information on manual recording levels.  
Optimized Rec  
On  
The recording quality of timer recordings is automatically adjusted to fit on  
to the selected media if it will not fit at the selected quality setting. If the  
recording will not fit even at MN1 (MN4 for DVD+R/+RW), then the  
recording will be made to the HDD in the original quality selected.  
Off •  
When a timer recording is set that won’t fit on to the selected media, the  
recording starts but is cut off when no more recording is possible.  
Optimized Rec will only compensate for the next scheduled timer recording if more than one is set. It cannot be used together with VPS/PDC.  
Subtitle Recording  
On  
The selected subtitle language is recorded with the D.TV timer recording.  
No subtitles are recorded with D.TV timer recordings.  
Off •  
Set Thumbnail  
0 seconds •  
Sets the default thumbnail picture in the Disc Navigator to the first frame of  
the title.  
30 seconds  
3 minutes  
On •  
Sets the default thumbnail picture to 30 seconds into the title.  
Sets the default thumbnail picture to three minutes into the title.  
Auto Chapter  
(HDD/VR)  
When recording to the HDD or in VR mode to a DVD, chapter marks are  
added at the black screen between commercials and main programming.  
When recording in DV, chapter marks can be changed by date/time.  
Off  
Automatic chapter marking is switched off.  
Automatic chapter marking is switched off.  
Auto Chapter (Video) No Separation  
10 minutes •  
When recording in Video mode, chapter markers are inserted every 10  
minutes.  
15 minutes  
Chapter markers are inserted every 15 minutes.  
This settings applies to recording or real-time copying to Video mode DVD-R/-RW discs.  
157  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
15  
Setting  
Options  
Explanation  
Auto Chapter  
(DVD+R/+RW)  
No Separation  
10 minutes •  
Automatic chapter marking is switched off.  
When recording in DVD+R/+RW, chapter markers are inserted every 10  
minutes.  
15 minutes  
Chapter markers are inserted every 15 minutes.  
This settings applies to recording or real-time copying to DVD+R/+RW discs.  
HDD Recording  
Format  
Video Mode Off  
Recordings made to the HDD are made in VR mode. Use this setting if you  
don’t need to transfer the recording later to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or  
DVD+R/+RW.  
Video Mode On • Recordings made to the HDD are compatible with Video mode recordings.  
This setting is convenient if you want to transfer the recording to a DVD-R/  
-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW as high-speed copy can be used.  
When Video Mode On is used, you must select the audio channel you want to record when recording a bilingual broadcast. On the Video Mode Off  
setting, both channels will be recorded and you can switch between them on playback. See also Bilingual Recording on page 155.  
When the recording mode is set to XP+, you cannot change HDD Recording Format.  
Playback  
TV Screen Size  
4:3 (Letter Box)  
4:3 (Pan & Scan)  
16:9 •  
Select if you have a standard 4:3 TV and prefer the letter box format  
presentation for widescreen material.  
Select if you have a standard 4:3 TV and prefer the pan and scan  
presentation for widescreen material.  
Select if you have a widescreen 16:9 TV. Your TV settings determine how 4:3  
material will look.  
Selecting 4:3 (Letter Box) or 4:3 (Pan & Scan) does not guarantee that all video material will be presented in that format as some discs override  
this setting.  
Still Picture  
Field  
Frame  
Auto •  
On  
Produces a stable, generally shake-free image.  
Produces sharp image, but may be prone to shake.  
Generates a generally less sharp but more stable still image.  
Seamless Playback  
Playback is smooth, but with a trade-off against the accuracy of the edit  
points.  
Off •  
You may notice momentary interruption at edited points during playback of a  
VR mode Play List.  
This setting applies to HDD, DVD-R/-RW (VR) and DVD-RAM playback.  
Angle Indicator  
On •  
A camera icon appears on-screen during multi-angle scenes on a DVD-Video  
disc.  
Off  
Nothing is indicated on-screen when a multi-angle scene is showing.  
Parental Lock  
Set Password/  
Change Password  
Next Screen  
Next Screen  
If no password has yet been set, enter a four digit number to become your  
password. If you want to change the password, first enter your old password,  
then enter a new one.  
DVD Playback  
From this screen, first enter your password and then set a parental lock level  
for playback of DVDs with parental level coding.  
158  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
15  
Setting  
Options  
Explanation  
D.TV Age Limit  
Next Screen  
Use this screen to enter an age limit for D.TV programmes. Programmes that  
are broadcast with age suitability guidelines that fall above the age set here  
will require the correct password to be entered before the channel can be  
viewed.  
You must also enter your password in order to change the age limit setting.  
This setting is only applicable when the country is set to France, Denmark, Finland or Sweden.  
HDMI Output (only available when an HDMI device is connected)  
Screen Resolution  
1920 x 1080p  
1920 x 1080i  
1280 x 720p  
Constant 1920 x 1080p output.  
Constant 1920 x 1080i output.  
Constant 1280 x 720p output.  
720 x 576p  
Constant 720 x 576p output (when setting the Input Line System to  
(720 x 480p)  
525 System, video is output in 720 x 480p).  
720 x 576i  
Constant 720 x 576i output (when setting the Input Line System to  
(720 x 480i)  
525 System, video is output in 720 x 480i).  
If you choose a setting that is incompatible with your TV you may not be able to see any picture at all. In this case, press ꢌ OPEN/CLOSE while  
holding down the ꢋ (Stop) button on the front panel to switch the setting.  
4:3 Video Output  
Full  
Select if your HDMI TV allows you to change the aspect ratio.  
Normal  
Select if your HDMI TV does not allow you to change the aspect ratio. 4:3  
video will be shown with bars on each side.  
Colour  
RGB (0–255)  
RGB (16–235)  
YCbCr 4:2:2  
YCbCr 4:4:4  
Use if colours are weak and black appears to ‘float’ on the RGB (16–235)  
setting.  
Use this setting if colours appear overly rich and the black too deep on the  
RGB (0–255) setting.  
The video signal is output as a YCbCr 4:2:2 component signal. This is the  
standard setting for HDMI-compatible devices.  
The video signal is output as a YCbCr 4:4:4 component signal.  
• Depending on the connected device some settings may not be available.  
• When a DVI device is connected, the YCbCr 4:2:2 and YCbCr 4:4:4 options are not available.  
Audio Output  
Auto •  
Dolby Digital, MPEG and DTS sources are output as a bitstream signal.  
However, depending on the Audio Out setting, number of audio channels,  
and the HDMI-connected device, Linear PCM audio may be output.  
PCM  
All audio signals are converted to Linear PCM (except DTS).  
Bitstream Priority Select if the connected device is compatible with bitstream audio.  
This setting is not available when a DVI device is connected.  
HDMI Control  
On •  
Enable the HDMI Control function. Select this option when using to an  
HDMI Control-compatible Pioneer plasma television.  
Off  
Disable the HDMI Control function. Select this option when not connected to  
an HDMI Control-compatible component, or when connected to a  
component manufactured by a company other than Pioneer.  
• For more information about HDMI Control, see HDMI Control on page 66.  
• This setting is available even if you are not connected to an HDMI device.  
• For more information, see Troubleshooting on page 168.  
159  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
15  
Setting  
Options  
Explanation  
Options  
On Screen Display  
On •  
Off  
The recorder displays operation displays (Stop, Play, etc.) on-screen.  
Switches off the on-screen operation displays.  
Front Panel Display  
AV. Link  
On •  
Off  
The time is shown in the front panel display when the recorder is in standby.  
The front panel display is switched off in standby.  
This Recorder Only • Signals received through the AV input when the recorder is in standby are  
not passed through to the AV output.  
Pass Through  
Signals received when in standby are passed though to the output for  
connected devices. (Note that during EPG data download, the EPG data is  
not passed through.)  
When set to Pass Through, make sure to set Power Save (page 152) to Off.  
DivX VOD  
Registration Code Use to display the recorder’s DivX registration code. See DivX video  
compatibility and DivX® VOD content on page 60.  
Set Preview  
(HDD only)  
Quick Preview •  
When in the Disc Navigator, the thumbnail video plays short excerpts from  
throughout the selected title. (Note that edited titles that will play normally  
from the beginning.)  
Normal  
The thumbnail video plays from the beginning of the title.  
CI Information  
Next Screen  
This option displays a menu of CI card functions. Consult your service  
provider for more information on the functions available.  
Software Update  
Next Screen  
The Software Update function can check for and download updated system  
software for the digital tuner. See Using Software Update (Digital tuner) on  
page 162.  
Options 2  
USB  
Restart USB Device If the connected USB device does not respond to the recorder, try using this  
option to restart it. If the device still does not work properly try switching it off  
then back on, and/or disconnecting then reconnecting the USB cable.  
Confirm Printer  
Use this option to confirm the make and model of the printer connected to  
the recorder (does not work with all printers).  
Pause Live TV  
TV’s Tuner  
Allows you to use the Pause Live TV feature with an AV Link-compatible TV  
connected by SCART cable.  
Recorder’s Tuner • Allows you to use Pause Live TV with this recorder’s internal TV tuner.  
See also Pause Live TV on page 96 for more information on this setting.  
HDD Sleep Mode Proceed  
Puts the HDD to sleep. Using this feature when playing DVDs or CDs allows  
you to reduce noise produced by the unit, resulting in improved sound quality.  
When you wake the HDD back up it will take a few seconds to load. The HDD  
can be taken out of Sleep Mode by any number of actions, including:  
• Turning the power off and on again.  
• Pressing the HDD/DVD button (LCD page 1) and choosing the HDD.  
• When a timer recording begins.  
• When you try and make any changes to system settings.  
Gracenote Database Database Update Updates the Gracenote database installed in this unit. Load the Update Disc  
created with the latest data downloaded from the Pioneer website. For  
details, visit the Pioneer website. (http://www.pioneer.eu)  
Version  
Shows the current version of the Gracenote database installed in this unit.  
Information  
160  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
15  
About NTSC on PAL TV  
Additional information about the TV system  
settings  
Depending on the Input Line System setting and the  
NTSC on PAL TV setting, the signal format output when  
the recorder is stopped varies as shown in the table  
below.  
About the input line system  
This recorder is compatible with PAL, SECAM, 3.58 NTSC  
and PAL-60 TV systems. The Input Line System and Input  
Colour System settings determine how the recorder  
treats incoming video signals from an external input.  
Output when  
Input Line System NTSC on PAL TV  
stopped  
625 System  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
PAL  
Please note the following points when changing the  
input line system:  
PAL  
• If, when the Input Line System setting is changed, the  
screen goes blank (due to incompatibility with your  
TV), you can switch back by pressing and holding the  
front panel ꢋ (Stop) button then pressing  
ꢊ (Play)(also front panel) while the recorder is  
stopped.  
525 System  
NTSC  
PAL–60  
About the input colour system  
The available options of the Input Colour System setting  
depend on the Input Line System setting. The table below  
shows the different options available.  
• When you switch the Input Line System setting the  
Copy List is erased. If you switch the setting using the  
ꢋ (Stop) button and ꢊ (Play) buttons as described  
above, there is no confirmation, so please use with  
care.  
Built-in analog  
Input Line System  
625 System  
External input  
tuner  
Auto  
PAL  
Auto  
• You can’t mix recordings of different TV line systems  
on the same disc.  
PAL  
• When you change this setting, the Input Colour  
System setting also changes (see below).  
SECAM  
n/a  
SECAM  
Auto  
525 System  
3.58 NTSC  
PAL–60  
161  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
15  
Selecting other languages for  
language options  
Using Software Update (Digital tuner)  
The Software Update function can keep the built-in digital  
tuner up to date with the latest system software. You can  
either check for updates manually, or have the recorder  
do it automatically at regular intervals.  
ENTER  
1
Select ‘Other’ from the language list.  
Access the Software Update screen from the Options  
menu.  
This option appears in the settings for DVD Menu  
Language, Audio Language, and Subtitle Language.  
There are three options available: Manual Update, Auto  
Update and Technical Information.  
ENTER  
2
Select the language you want.  
Manual Update  
Select Manual Update to check for updated software  
immediately. If new software is found then it is  
automatically downloaded and installed. The new  
software will take effect the next time the recorder is  
powered on.  
Initial Setup  
Basic  
OSD DVD Menu Language  
Digital Tuner  
Analogue Tuner  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audi
Language  
English  
Subt
Number  
Auto
0
1
4
5
DVD
Subt
Audio Out  
If for some reason the new software could not be  
downloaded successfully, a dialog box informs you of the  
error. Press HOME MENU to exit or RETURN to return to  
the previous screen.  
Language
Recording  
• Select by language name: Use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to  
change the language.  
Note that channel information may be erased when  
software update is used, and that timer recording will not  
work during the update.  
• Select by code number: Press  
buttons to enter the four-digit language code.  
ꢁ
then use the number  
To cancel manual update before it has completed, press  
HOME MENU.  
See Language code list on page 172 for a list of available  
languages and corresponding codes.  
Auto Update  
By default, the Auto Update option is On, which means  
that periodically the recorder will check for and update  
the digital tuner software if it’s available. We recommend  
that you leave this option On.  
If new software is found and successfully downloaded,  
the recorder automatically scans for new digital  
channels, informing you if any are found (this is the  
equivalent of using the Add New Channel option, found  
in the Digital Tuner section of the Initial Setup menu).  
Technical Information  
This displays the current hardware and software version  
numbers of the digital tuner.  
162  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
16  
Chapter 16  
Additional information  
Minimum copying times  
The table below shows the minimum HDD to DVD copying time for one hour of video.  
1
Please note that not all discs are compatible with high-speed copying. Check with the disc manufacturer for  
compatibility.  
Rec mode  
SEP  
SLP  
EP  
LP  
SP  
XP  
DVD disc type  
10 h  
8 h  
6 h  
4 h  
2 h  
1 h  
DVD-R/1x  
DVD-RW/1x  
1x  
2x  
6 mins.  
3 mins.  
7.5 mins.  
4 mins.  
10 mins.  
5 mins.  
15 mins.  
7.5 mins.  
30 mins.  
15 mins.  
60 mins.  
30 mins.  
DVD-RW/2x  
DVD-R DL  
DVD-RAM/2x  
DVD+R/2.4x  
DVD+RW/2.4x  
DVD+R DL  
2.4x  
3x  
*1  
*1  
*1  
6.3 mins.  
5 mins.  
12.5 mins.  
10 mins.  
25 mins.  
20 mins.  
DVD-RAM/3x  
DVD-RAM/5x  
2 mins.  
2.5 mins.  
3.5 mins.  
DVD-R/4x  
DVD-RW/4x  
DVD+R/4x  
4x  
6x  
1.5 mins.*1  
2 mins.*1  
2.5 mins.*1  
4 mins.  
3 mins.  
7.5 mins.  
5.5 mins.  
15 mins.  
11 mins.  
DVD+RW/4x  
DVD-R/8x/16x  
DVD+R/8x/16x  
DVD-RW/6x  
1.25 mins.*1  
1.6 mins.*1  
2.2 mins.*1  
DVD+RW/8x  
Note that all times in the above table are approximate. Also that actual copy speed varies with the part of the disc being recorded.  
*1 Titles recorded on DVD+R/+RW in SEP, SLP or EP modes cannot be high-speed copied.  
Note  
1 Depending on the disc, the copy speed may be reduced (for example, although a 6x disc is used, the copy may be made at 2x speed).  
163  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
Manual recording modes  
16  
The table below shows the approximate recording times for different DVD types in each manual recording mode, as  
well as the standard recording mode equivalents. For recording time on the HDD, see Specifications (SDVR-LX70D) on  
page 176.  
Rec. time*1  
Resolution*2  
Single-Layer  
DVD:  
DVD-R/-RW  
DVD+R/+RW  
DVD-RAM  
Video mode On (HDD)  
Video mode (DVD-R/-RW)  
DVD+R/+RW  
Video mode (DVD-R DL)  
DVD+R DL  
Dual-Layer  
DVD:  
DVD-R DL  
DVD+R DL  
Video mode Off (HDD)  
VR mode (DVD-R/-RW)  
DVD-RAM  
VR mode (DVD-R DL)  
Level  
MN 1 *3,4  
MN 2 *3,4  
MN 3 *3,4  
MN 4 *4  
MN 5 *4  
MN 6 *4  
MN 7  
802 mins.  
720 mins.  
600 mins.  
480 mins.  
420 mins.  
360 mins.  
1440 mins.  
1292 mins.  
1077 mins.  
861 mins.  
754 mins.  
646 mins.  
SEP  
SLP  
352 x 240/  
352 x 288  
352 x 240/  
352 x 288  
EP  
LP  
300 mins.  
270 mins.  
240 mins.  
230 mins.  
220 mins.  
210 mins.  
200 mins.  
190 mins.  
180 mins.  
170 mins.  
160 mins.  
150 mins.  
140 mins.  
130 mins.  
120 mins.  
110 mins.  
105 mins.  
100 mins.  
95 mins.  
90 mins.  
85 mins.  
80 mins.  
75 mins.  
70 mins.  
65 mins.  
61 mins.  
61 mins.  
--- mins.  
538 mins.  
484 mins.  
431 mins.  
413 mins.  
395 mins.  
377 mins.  
359 mins.  
341 mins.  
323 mins.  
305 mins.  
287 mins.  
269 mins.  
251 mins.  
233 mins.  
215 mins.  
197 mins.  
188 mins.  
179 mins.  
170 mins.  
161 mins.  
153 mins.  
144 mins.  
135 mins.  
126 mins.  
117 mins.  
111 mins.  
111 mins.  
--- mins.  
352 x 480/  
352 x 576  
352 x 480/  
352 x 576  
MN 8  
MN 9  
480 x 480/  
480 x 576  
MN 10  
MN 11  
MN 12  
MN 13  
MN 14  
MN 15  
MN 16  
MN 17  
MN 18  
MN 19  
MN 20  
MN 21  
MN 22  
MN 23  
MN 24  
MN 25  
MN 26  
MN 27  
MN 28  
MN 29  
MN 30  
MN 31  
MN 32  
LPCM  
544 x 480/  
544 x 576  
720 x 480/  
720 x 576  
SP  
720 x 480/  
720 x 576  
XP  
XP+*5  
*1 Recording time may be slightly shorter for certain disc types or recording modes.  
*2 The first figure refers to when the Input Line System is set to 525 System; the second when set to 625 System.  
*3 Modes MN1 to MN3 not available when using DVD+R/+RW.  
*4 Titles recorded at MN6 or lower cannot be high-speed copied to DVD+R/+RW.  
*5 XP+ mode is available for HDD recordings only. If set for a DVD recording, the DVD will be automatically recorded in MN32 mode.  
•
•
•
Levels separated by a bold line show where there is a noticeable change in picture quality.  
Audio recording in all manual recording modes is in Dolby Digital 2 ch format, except for LPCM mode, which is in Linear PCM format.  
See also Recording on page 91.  
164  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
Troubleshooting  
16  
Incorrect operation is often mistaken for trouble and malfunction. If you think there is something wrong with this  
component, please check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other  
components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after checking the points  
below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work.  
General  
Problem  
Remedy  
Can’t eject a disc  
• Turn off the power to this device and press and hold ꢌ OPEN/CLOSE on the front of the  
recorder for more than three seconds.  
Can’t play a disc  
• Check that the disc is a compatible format disc (page 58).  
• Take out the disc and clean it (page 174).  
• Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up).  
• Check that the disc has a region code compatible with the recorder.  
• Press HDD/DVD (LCD page 1) to select the DVD.  
• There may be condensation in the recorder. Leave the recorder for an hour or so for the  
condensation to evaporate.  
• During HDD recording, you can’t play discs that are recorded with a Line System different  
to the current recorder setting.  
• DVD+R/+RW discs recorded using another recorder with copy-once protected recordings  
will not play in this recorder.  
Can’t record a disc  
• Check that the disc is not an incompatible format disc (page 58).  
• Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned with the disc tray with the label side facing  
up).  
• Remove the disc from the disc tray and clean it (page 174).  
• Some DVD-RAM discs are not recordable until they have been initialized (page 102). This  
can take up to an hour.  
Remote control does not  
work  
• If you connected this recorder to the receiver subwoofer using the CONTROL IN jack, point  
the remote control at the display unit of the receiver subwoofer to use (page 26).  
• Use the remote within its operating range (page 26).  
• Replace the batteries (page 26).  
All settings are reset  
No picture  
• If the recorder is unplugged (or there is a power failure) while the recorder is on, all the  
settings will be lost.  
• Make sure that you switch the recorder into standby before unplugging the power cord.  
• Check that everything is connected properly (page 8).  
• Check that the connected TV and/or the AV amp/receiver is set to the correct input.  
• If you are using an indoor antenna that requires power, make sure that Aerial Power in the  
Initial Setup menu is set to On or Auto (page 153).  
• If the aerial/antenna is not connected properly, or if it is shorted, the Aerial Power setting  
will revert to Off automatically. Check the aerial connection and try making the setting again.  
No sound or sound is  
distorted  
• Make sure that the amp/receiver or TV is set to the correct input and the volume turned up.  
• There is no sound when the picture is paused, or during scanning or slow motion play.  
Press ꢊ (Play)(LCD page 1) to resume regular playback.  
• If the sound is distorted, try cleaning the cable plugs.  
Cannot switch a bilingual • During real-time copying it is not possible to switch audio channels. The main and sub  
programme  
channels are both output.  
The picture from the  
• If the video signal from the external component is copy-protected, you cannot connect via  
external input is distorted this recorder. Connect the component directly to your TV.  
The picture is distorted • Change the Input Line System setting (page 161). (You can also change it by pressing the  
ꢋ (Stop) button and ꢊ (Play) on the front panel simultaneously with the recorder stopped.)  
165  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
16  
Problem  
Remedy  
Screen is stretched  
vertically or horizontally  
• Make sure that the TV Screen Size setting (page 158) is correct for the kind of TV you have  
(see also page 173).  
• If you have a widescreen TV, check its aspect ratio settings.  
• This recorder’s input switches into wide mode automatically according to the input signal.  
When the unit connected is not compatible with VIDEO ID-1 (widescreen signalling), set the  
connected component to output 4:3 aspect ratio (standard) video.  
Audio/subtitle language  
cannot be changed  
• Note that audio and subtitle languages cannot be changed during the recording of a digital  
broadcast.  
• You can only use the audio track and subtitles for the language that were selected at the  
time of recording a digital broadcast. The audio track and subtitles cannot be changed to  
other languages.  
Can’t play a disc recorded • If the disc was recorded in DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R, make sure that it’s  
using this recorder on  
another player  
finalized (page 101).  
• Some players will not play recordable DVD discs, even when recorded in DVD-R/-RW (Video  
mode) or DVD+R and finalized.  
• If the disc was recorded in VR mode, the other player must be specifically RW compatible  
in order to play it (page 57).  
• Discs recorded with copy-once material cannot be played on non-CPRM compatible  
players (page 92).  
• DVD+RW discs containing only a small amount of recorded material may not play on other  
players. Finalize the disc and try again.  
During playback the  
• When a copy-protected disc is played via a VCR, the picture will not display correctly.  
picture is dark or distorted Connect the recorder directly to your TV.  
Recorded contents are not • Change the recording mode to XP/SP.  
clear or artefacts appear in  
areas of flat colour (due to  
MPEG compression; also  
known as block noise)  
Can’t record or does not  
record successfully  
• Check that there is some remaining blank space on the DVD/HDD.  
• For a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R, check that the disc isn’t already finalized.  
• Check the limits on the number of titles and chapters on a disc:  
– HDD: 999 titles  
– VR mode: 99 titles, 999 chapters per disc  
– Video mode disc: 99 titles per disc, 99 chapters per title  
– DVD+R/+RW: 49 titles per disc, 99 chapters per title (max 254 chapters per disc)  
• Check that the source you are trying to record is not copy protected.  
• For a VR formatted disc, check that the disc isn’t locked (page 147).  
• Check that you are recording with the same TV system (PAL, NTSC, etc.) as the disc has  
already been recorded in. All recordings on a disc must be in the same TV system. When  
recording to the HDD, it is also necessary to set the Input Line System setting to match what  
you want to record (page 161).  
• The power may have failed during recording.  
Timer programme doesn’t • When setting the recording channel, make sure you set the recorder’s built-in TV tuner, not  
record successfully  
the TV’s built-in tuner.  
• When recording to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW, programmes that are  
copy-once protected cannot be recorded. Use a VR mode formatted disc for copy-once  
material (page 92).  
• Two timer programmes may have overlapped, in which case only the earlier one will record  
completely.  
• The power may have failed during recording.  
166  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
16  
Problem  
Remedy  
After briefly unplugging  
or after a power failure  
the front panel display  
shows ‘--:--’  
• A backup battery inside the recorder keeps the clock and other settings from being reset  
when there is no power to the recorder. After unplugging or a power failure, the battery keeps  
all settings for a period of several minutes. Reset the clock and other recorder settings to use  
the recorder again.  
• To have the battery replaced, please ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or  
your dealer to carry out repairs.  
Front panel display shows • The child lock is on; turn off in order to use the recorder (page 99).  
‘LOCKED’ when a button is  
pressed  
Can’t use One Touch Copy • Make sure that there is a recordable DVD-R/-RW loaded with some free space for recording  
(HDD to DVD)  
and fewer than 99 titles already on the disc. Also make sure that for a DVD-R/-RW (Video  
mode) or a DVD+R, the disc isn’t finalized.  
• Make sure there is a recordable DVD+R/+RW loaded with some free space for recording  
and fewer than 49 titles already on the disc.  
• If you delete a title from a DVD+R/+RW disc, the number of remaining recordable titles  
may not decrease.  
• Further recording is not possible on a finalized DVD+R. Check that there isn’t a disc menu  
on the disc you’re trying to use.  
• If the title currently playing contains material that is copy-once protected, One Touch Copy  
will not work.  
• If the currently playing HDD content was recorded in XP+ mode, the One Touch Copy  
feature can’t be used.  
• One Touch Copy can’t be used for titles over eight hours long when copying to DVD+R/  
+RW (though you can use a DVD+R DL).  
• One Touch Copy can’t be used for MN1 to MN6, SEP, SLP or EP titles when copying to  
DVD+R/+RW.  
• One Touch Copy doesn’t work if the recorder is already recording to DVD.  
Can’t use One Touch Copy • Make sure that there is space available on the HDD and that there are fewer than 999 titles  
(DVD to HDD)  
on the HDD.  
• One Touch Copy doesn’t work if the recorder is already recording to the HDD.  
The device connected to  
the USB port is not  
recognized  
• Check that the device is compatible with this recorder (page 67).  
• Use a USB cable less than 5 m in length.  
• Check that the USB cable is inserted fully.  
• Check that the USB device is powered on.  
• Try switching this recorder into standby mode and then back on.  
• Try using the Restart USB Device option from the Initial Setup menu (page 160).  
• If several USB devices (camera, USB memory, card reader, etc.) are connected at the same  
time, it’s possible that only the first device connected to this recorder will be recognized.  
File names are not  
displayed properly.  
• Files names that do not conform to the ISO8859-1 standard may not display correctly on  
this recorder.  
167  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
16  
HDMI  
Problem  
Remedy  
The connected HDMI or  
DVI device does not  
• Try disconnecting then reconnecting the HDMI cable (while the power of both components  
is on).  
• Try switching the power of the HDMI/DVI device off then back on.  
• Try switching off the HDMI/DVI device and this recorder. Next, switch on the HDMI/DVI  
device and leave it for around 30 seconds, then switch on this recorder.  
• When you connect an HDMI-compatible device make sure of the following:  
– The connected device’s video input is set correctly for this recorder.  
– The cable you’re using is fully HDMI-compliant. Using a non-standard cable may result in  
no picture being output.  
display any picture (and  
the front panel HDMI  
indicator does not light)  
– Don’t use several HDMI cables connected together. Use a single cable to connect devices  
together.  
• When you connect a DVI-compatible device make sure of the following:  
– The connected device’s video input is set correctly for this recorder.  
– The DVI terminal on the connected device is HDCP-compatible.  
– The connected device is compatible with NTSC (720 x 480i/p, 1280 x 720p, 1920 x 1080i/p)  
and PAL (720 x 576i/p, 1280 x 720p, 1920 x 1080i/p) video input.  
• If the recorder’s internal HDD is damaged or broken, there will be no HDMI output.  
• Not all HDCP-compatible DVI devices will work with this recorder.  
No video from the HDMI  
output  
• If you choose a setting that is incompatible with your TV you may not be able to see any  
picture at all. In this case, press ꢌ OPEN/CLOSE while holding down the ꢋ (Stop) button on  
the front panel to switch the setting.  
There’s no sound from the • There is no sound when using a DVI terminal.  
connected HDMI or DVI  
device  
• Some HDMI-compatible devices do not output sound (check with the manual that came  
with the connected device).  
The power automatically • This recorder’s power may be turned on each time you turn on the power for a connected  
turns on  
plasma television. If you do not want this unit to be turned on in this way, set this recorder’s  
HDMI Control to Off (page 159).  
Can’t record video  
• When using HDMI Control to record, you must make sure that the channel information for  
the plasma television matches that of this recorder. If the channel information does not  
match you cannot make recordings. Use the Auto Channel Setting function to set this  
recorder’s channel information (page 154).  
168  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
16  
Problem  
Remedy  
HDMI Control does not  
respond  
• Verify that the HDMI cable is firmly connected (page 65).  
• Check whether HDMI Control is set to On for this recorder, the receiver subwoofer and the  
device connected to this recorder. For more information, refer to the operating instructions of  
your plasma television and HDMI Control on page 44.  
• Depending on the type of plasma television, some HDMI input terminals do not support the  
HDMI Control function. For details, see the operating instructions supplied with your plasma  
television.  
• If you want to use an HDMI cable other than the supplied HDMI cable, use the one that  
supports the HDMI 1.3 specification. The HDMI Control functions may not operate properly if  
you do not use an HDMI cable that supports the HDMI 1.3 specification.  
• This function may not work properly if you have multiple recorders connected to a single  
plasma television or the receiver subwoofer. For more information refer to the operating  
instructions of your plasma television and HDMI Control on page 44.  
• Controls may not function properly in certain situations, such as immediately after you  
have connect an HDMI cable, turn this recorder’s power off or remove the power cable for  
this recorder or the connected component. If you experience any problems, set HDMI Control  
to On for all connected units, and then display the pictures stored on this recorder on your  
plasma television to improve the situations.  
• Check whether the connected component supports HDMI Control or not.  
• Certain functions are not supported on with plasma televisions.  
• We cannot guarantee this recorder will work with HDMI Control-compatible components  
other than those made by Pioneer. When using HDMI Control-compatible components  
manufactured by companies other than Pioneer, set the HDMI Control to Off (page 159).  
If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity, disconnect the power plug from the  
outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.  
If the picture freezes and the front panel and remote control buttons stop working  
• Press ꢋ (Stop) then try restarting playback.  
STANDBY/ON  
• Press the front panel ꢀ STANDBY/ON button to  
STOP  
switch the power off, then switch back on and restart  
playback. If the power fails to switch off, press and  
STANDBY/ON  
hold ꢀ STANDBY/ON for five seconds until the  
DV IN  
USB  
OPEN/  
CLOSE  
PLAY  
STOP  
REC  
STOP REC  
power switches off.  
169  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
On-screen displays  
16  
The table below shows a list of error messages that you may encounter when using the recorder and an explanation  
of their meaning.  
Message  
Explanation/Action  
• Initializing disc. Please wait a moment.  
When you load a blank DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc, the recorder  
automatically initializes it.  
• Incompatible region number.  
The disc loaded has an incompatible region number for the recorder  
and so will not play.  
• Cannot record any more titles.  
• No more space for file management data.  
The disc control data limit has been reached, or the maximum  
number of chapters and/or titles has been reached. Erase titles/  
chapters or combine chapters.  
• This disc cannot be recorded. Undo the  
finalization.  
The disc was finalized on a non-Pioneer DVD recorder. Undo the  
finalization in order to recording/editing.  
• Cannot play this disc.  
• This disc cannot be recorded.  
• Cannot read the CPRM information.  
The disc may be dirty or damaged. Take out the disc, clean it and  
retry. If the error persists, use a new disc. If the error appears even  
with a new disc, please ask your nearest Pioneer-authorized service  
• Could not record the information to the disc. center or your dealer to carry out repairs.  
• Cannot edit.  
• Could not initialize disc.  
• Could not complete finalization successfully.  
• Could not undo finalization successfully.  
• Could not successfully unlock the disc.  
• Incompatible or unreadable disc.  
The disc loaded is a playback-only disc type. This display may also  
appear if the disc is dirty or damaged.  
• Cannot record to a disc that is not CPRM  
compatible.  
The video source is copy-once protected. Use a VR mode DVD-R/-RW  
disc with CPRM for recording.  
• Cannot record this content using Video  
mode recording.  
• This video cannot be recorded to DVD+R/  
+RW.  
• This content is copy protected.  
• Incorrect CPRM information.  
The video source is copy-protected and cannot be recorded.  
The recorder could not read the CPRM information. The recorder  
may be damaged — please ask your nearest Pioneer-authorized  
service center or your dealer to carry out repairs.  
• Repairing disc.  
• Repairing the HDD.  
During recording, the power was cut. This display appears when the  
power is restored.  
• Could not repair the disc.  
The recorder was unable to repair the disc after a power cut. The  
contents of the recording will be lost.  
• Overheating has stopped operation. Press  
DISPLAY to clear message.  
The internal temperature of the recorder has exceeded the operating  
limit. If this message reappears, please ask your nearest Pioneer-  
authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repairs.  
• HDD optimization is recommended. This can The HDD should be optimized (basically, HDD housekeeping) to  
be done using Disc Setup.  
maintain playback and recording performance.  
• Please perform HDD optimization. This can  
be done using Disc Setup.  
The HDD is in more urgent need of optimization in order to maintain  
performance.  
170  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
16  
Message  
Explanation/Action  
• The HDD has not been sufficiently  
optimized. Please optimize again.  
If this message appears repeatedly after optimizing the HDD it is  
likely that there is not enough free space on the HDD for optimization  
to complete properly. Please erase some titles from the HDD and  
optimize again.  
• An error occurred. Please consult the service This message is displayed when information from the HDD cannot  
center. Note that contents on the HDD may be be read. The HDD may be damaged or broken. Please ask your  
erased when servicing this unit.  
nearest Pioneer-authorized service center or your dealer to carry out  
repairs.  
• The Hard Disk Drive info is incorrect. Use the As the HDD info cannot be properly read, no new recordings can be  
Disc Setup menu to reinitialize.  
made. Reinitializing the HDD (page 148) may result in your being  
able to make recording again. Note that reinitializing the HDD will  
erase all recorded contents, including protected files.  
• This signal’s TV system is different from the The TV system (PAL, NTSC, etc.) of the current channel is different  
recorder’s setting.  
from the TV system settings of this recorder.  
• Recording failed due to a TV system  
mismatch. Press DISPLAY to clear message.  
The timer recording failed because the TV system of the channel set  
for recording was different from the setting of the recorder.  
• Playback has stopped because the TV system During recording or timer recording standby, the TV System (PAL,  
is different than the recording.  
NTSC, etc.) of the playback video changed, causing playback to stop  
automatically.  
• You are not allowed to watch this  
Conditional Access Programme.  
A CA module or smart card (obtained from your service provider) is  
required to watch the selected programme. Insert the supplied  
module or card into the Common Interface card slot on the front of  
the recorder (page 17).  
• There is no DV input or the input signal is  
unrecordable.  
No signal was detected at the DV IN jack. This may appear if a blank  
section of DV tape is playing in the connected camcorder.  
• No DV camcorder connected.  
The camcorder is not connected properly, or the camcorder is  
switched off.  
• You cannot connect more than one DV  
camcorder at a time.  
This recorder’s DV jack supports connection to just one camcorder.  
• Cannot operate the DV camcorder.  
This recorder cannot operate the DV camcorder. Try switching off the  
camcorder then turn it back on again.  
• Could not operate the DV camcorder.  
This recorder was not able to operate the DV camcorder.  
• The DV camcorder is not set for playback.  
Please select playback mode on the DV  
camcorder.  
The camcorder is in camera mode. Switch it to playback mode.  
• The printer is not ready or is not connected. This message is displayed when communication could not be  
Please check the printer.  
established with the printer. See the Troubleshooting section if you  
do not know the cause.  
• Printing has been cancelled because ...  
This message is displayed when there is a printer error during  
printing. After checking the printer for the cause of the error, either  
reconnect the printer and start the printing job again, or select “Yes”  
to resume printing (select “No” to cancel the print job). See also the  
operating instructions that came with your printer for possible  
causes of print errors.  
171  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
Front panel displays  
16  
The table below shows a list of error messages that you may encounter when using the recorder and an explanation  
of their meaning.  
Message  
• E01  
Explanation/Action  
The HDD may be damaged or broken. Please ask your nearest  
Pioneer-authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repairs.  
• E02  
As the HDD info cannot be properly read, no new recordings can be  
made. Reinitializing the HDD (page 148) may result in your being  
able to make recording again. Note that reinitializing the HDD will  
erase all recorded contents, including protected files.  
Language code list  
Language (Language code letter), Language code  
Japanese (ja), 1001  
English (en), 0514  
French (fr), 0618  
German (de), 0405  
Italian (it), 0920  
Spanish (es), 0519  
Chinese (zh), 2608  
Dutch (nl), 1412  
Portuguese (pt), 1620  
Swedish (sv), 1922  
Russian (ru), 1821  
Greek (el), 0512  
Bhutani (dz), 0426  
Esperanto (eo), 0515  
Estonian (et), 0520  
Basque (eu), 0521  
Persian (fa), 0601  
Finnish (fi), 0609  
Fiji (fj), 0610  
Faroese (fo), 0615  
Frisian (fy), 0625  
Kirghiz (ky), 1125  
Latin (la), 1201  
Lingala (ln), 1214  
Laotian (lo), 1215  
Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908  
Sinhalese (si), 1909  
Slovak (sk), 1911  
Slovenian (sl), 1912  
Samoan (sm), 1913  
Shona (sn), 1914  
Somali (so), 1915  
Albanian (sq), 1917  
Serbian (sr), 1918  
Siswati (ss), 1919  
Sesotho (st), 1920  
Sundanese (su), 1921  
Swahili (sw), 1923  
Tamil (ta), 2001  
Lithuanian (lt), 1220  
Latvian (lv), 1222  
Malagasy (mg), 1307  
Maori (mi), 1309  
Macedonian (mk), 1311  
Malayalam (ml), 1312  
Mongolian (mn), 1314  
Moldavian (mo), 1315  
Marathi (mr), 1318  
Malay (ms), 1319  
Maltese (mt), 1320  
Burmese (my), 1325  
Nauru (na), 1401  
Irish (ga), 0701  
Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704  
Galician (gl), 0712  
Guarani (gn), 0714  
Gujarati (gu), 0721  
Hausa (ha), 0801  
Hindi (hi), 0809  
Croatian (hr), 0818  
Hungarian (hu), 0821  
Armenian (hy), 0825  
Interlingua (ia), 0901  
Interlingue (ie), 0905  
Inupiak (ik), 0911  
Indonesian (in), 0914  
Icelandic (is), 0919  
Hebrew (iw), 0923  
Yiddish (ji), 1009  
Javanese (jw), 1023  
Georgian (ka), 1101  
Kazakh (kk), 1111  
Greenlandic (kl), 1112  
Cambodian (km), 1113  
Kannada (kn), 1114  
Korean (ko), 1115  
Kashmiri (ks), 1119  
Kurdish (ku), 1121  
Polish (pl), 1612  
Czech (cs), 0319  
Norwegian (no), 1415  
Afar (aa), 0101  
Abkhazian (ab), 0102  
Afrikaans (af), 0106  
Amharic (am), 0113  
Arabic (ar), 0118  
Assamese (as), 0119  
Aymara (ay), 0125  
Azerbaijani (az), 0126  
Bashkir (ba), 0201  
Byelorussian (be), 0205  
Bulgarian (bg), 0207  
Bihari (bh), 0208  
Bislama (bi), 0209  
Bengali (bn), 0214  
Tibetan (bo), 0215  
Breton (br), 0218  
Catalan (ca), 0301  
Corsican (co), 0315  
Welsh (cy), 0325  
Telugu (te), 2005  
Tajik (tg), 2007  
Thai (th), 2008  
Nepali (ne), 1405  
Tigrinya (ti), 2009  
Turkmen (tk), 2011  
Tagalog (tl), 2012  
Setswana (tn), 2014  
Tonga (to), 2015  
Turkish (tr), 2018  
Tsonga (ts), 2019  
Tatar (tt), 2020  
Twi (tw), 2023  
Ukrainian (uk), 2111  
Urdu (ur), 2118  
Uzbek (uz), 2126  
Vietnamese (vi), 2209  
Volapük (vo), 2215  
Wolof (wo), 2315  
Xhosa (xh), 2408  
Yoruba (yo), 2515  
Zulu (zu), 2621  
Occitan (oc), 1503  
Oromo (om), 1513  
Oriya (or), 1518  
Panjabi (pa), 1601  
Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619  
Quechua (qu), 1721  
Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813  
Kirundi (rn), 1814  
Romanian (ro), 1815  
Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823  
Sanskrit (sa), 1901  
Sindhi (sd), 1904  
Sangho (sg), 1907  
Danish (da), 0401  
172  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
16  
Country/Area code list  
Country/Area, Country/Area code, Code letter  
Argentina, 0118, ar  
Australia, 0121, au  
Austria, 0120, at  
Belgium, 0205, be  
Brazil, 0218, br  
Canada, 0301, ca  
Chile, 0312, cl  
Finland, 0609, fi  
France, 0618, fr  
Germany, 0405, de  
Hong Kong, 0811, hk  
India, 0914, in  
Indonesia, 0904, id  
Italy, 0920, it  
Japan, 1016, jp  
Malaysia, 1325, my  
Mexico, 1324, mx  
Netherlands, 1412, nl  
New Zealand, 1426, nz  
Norway, 1415, no  
Pakistan, 1611, pk  
Philippines, 1608, ph  
Portugal, 1620, pt  
Singapore, 1907, sg  
Spain, 0519, es  
Sweden, 1905, se  
Switzerland, 0308, ch  
Taiwan, 2023, tw  
Thailand, 2008, th  
United Kingdom, 0702, gb  
USA, 2119, us  
China, 0314, cn  
Denmark, 0411, dk  
Republic of Korea, 1118, kr  
Russian Federation, 1821, ru  
Screen sizes and disc formats  
When viewing on a standard TV or monitor  
Screen format of disc  
16:9  
Setting  
Appearance  
4:3 (Letter Box)  
The programme is shown in widescreen with black bars  
at the top and bottom of the screen.  
4:3 (Pan & Scan)  
The sides of the programme are cropped so that the  
picture fills the whole screen.  
4:3  
4:3 (Letter Box)  
4:3 (Pan & Scan)  
The programme is presented correctly on either setting.  
When viewing on a widescreen TV or monitor  
Screen format of disc  
16:9  
Setting  
16:9  
Appearance  
The programme is presented in widescreen.  
4:3  
16:9  
Your TV will determine how the picture is presented —  
check the manual that came with the TV for details.  
173  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
Handling discs  
16  
Damaged discs  
Discs spin at high speed inside the recorder. If you can  
see that a disc is cracked, chipped, warped, or otherwise  
damaged, don’t risk using it; you could end up damaging  
the recorder.  
When holding discs of any type, take care not to leave  
fingerprints, dirt or scratches on the disc surface. Hold  
the disc by its edge or by the center hole and edge.  
This recorder is designed for use with conventional, fully  
circular discs only. Use of shaped discs is not  
recommended for this product. Pioneer disclaims all  
liability arising in connection with the use of shaped discs.  
Damaged or dirty discs can affect playback and  
recording performance. Take care also not to scratch the  
label side of the disc. Although not as fragile as the  
recorded side, scratches can still result in a disc  
becoming unusable.  
Should a disc become marked with fingerprints, dust,  
etc., clean using a soft, dry cloth, wiping the disc lightly  
from the center to the outside edge. Do not wipe with a  
circular motion.  
Cleaning the pickup lens  
If necessary, use a cloth soaked in alcohol, or a  
commercially available CD/DVD cleaning kit to clean a  
disc more thoroughly. Never use benzine, thinner or  
other cleaning agents, including products designed for  
cleaning vinyl records.  
The HDD/DVD recorder’s lens should not become dirty in  
normal use, but if for some reason it should malfunction  
due to dust or dirt, consult your nearest Pioneer-  
authorized service center. Although lens cleaners are  
commercially available, we do not recommend using  
them since some may damage the lens.  
Storing discs  
Although CDs and DVD discs are more durable than vinyl  
records, you should still take care to handle and store  
discs correctly. When you’re not using a disc, return it to  
its case and store upright. Avoid leaving discs in  
excessively cold, humid, or hot environments (including  
under direct sunlight).  
Cleaning the recorder’s exterior  
When cleaning the glossy surface of the cabinet, gently  
wipe it with the provided cleaning cloth.  
If you use a dusty or hard cloth or if you rub the cabinet  
hard, the surface of the product will be scratched.  
Don’t glue paper or put stickers onto the disc, or use a  
pencil, ball-point pen or other sharp-tipped writing  
instrument. These could all damage the disc.  
If you clean the surface of the cabinet with a wet cloth,  
water droplets on the surface may enter into the product,  
resulting in malfunction.  
Condensation  
For more detailed care information see the instructions  
that come with discs.  
Condensation may form inside the recorder if it is  
brought into a warm room from outside, or if the  
temperature of the room rises quickly. Although the  
condensation won’t damage the recorder, it may  
temporarily impair its performance. For this reason you  
should leave it to adjust to the warmer temperature for  
about an hour before switching on and using.  
Do not load more than one disc into the recorder.  
174  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
Hints on installation  
16  
Moving the recorder  
We want you to enjoy using this recorder for years to  
come, so please bear in mind the following points when  
choosing a suitable location for it:  
If you need to move the recorder, first remove the disc, if  
loaded, and close the disc tray. Next, press ꢀ STANDBY/  
ON to switch the power to standby, checking that the  
POWER OFF indication in the display goes off. Wait at  
least two minutes. Lastly, disconnect the power cord.  
Never lift or move the recorder during playback or  
recording — discs rotate at a high speed and may be  
damaged.  
Do...  
ꢈ
Use in a well-ventilated room.  
ꢈ
Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such as a table,  
shelf or stereo rack.  
Don’t...  
ꢉ
Use in a place exposed to high temperatures or  
Resetting the recorder  
humidity, including near radiators and other heat-  
generating appliances.  
If you need to, you can reset the recorder to all its factory  
settings.  
ꢉ
Place on a window sill or other place where the  
recorder will be exposed to direct sunlight.  
Use in a dusty or damp environment or in a room  
where it will be exposed to excessive cigarette smoke.  
Place directly on top of an amplifier, or other  
1
Make sure that the recorder is on.  
2
Using the front panel controls, press and hold  
ꢉ
ꢋ (Stop) and press ꢀ STANDBY/ON.  
The recorder turns off with all settings reset.  
ꢉ
component in your stereo system that becomes hot in  
use.  
ꢉ
Use near a television or monitor as you may  
experience interference — especially if the television  
uses an indoor antenna.  
ꢉ
Use in a kitchen or other room where the recorder  
may be exposed to smoke or steam.  
Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover with cloth —  
this may prevent proper cooling of the unit.  
Place on an unstable surface, or one that is not large  
enough to support all four of the unit’s feet.  
ꢉ
ꢉ
175  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
16  
DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL  
Fine (XP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 1 h 51 m  
Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 3 h 35 m  
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 7 h 11 m  
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 10 h 46 m  
Super Long Play (SLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 14 h 21 m  
Super Extended Play (SEP). . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 17 h 57 m  
(DVD-R DL only)  
Manual Mode (MN)  
DVD-R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h 51 m to 24 h  
DVD+R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 1 h 51 m to 14 h 21 m  
Specifications (SDVR-LX70D)  
General  
Power requirements. . . . . . . . . .220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz  
Power consumption. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 W  
Power consumption in standby mode . . . . . . . . . . . .0.69 W  
(Front panel display: off)  
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5 kg  
Dimensions. . . . . . 420 mm (W) x 80 mm (H) x 286 mm (D)  
Operating temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +5 °C to +35 °C  
Operating humidity . . . . . . .5 % to 85 % (no condensation)  
TV system . . . . . . . NTSC (external input only)/PAL/SECAM  
Timer  
Programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 month/32 programmes  
Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quartz lock (24-hour digital display)  
Readable discs  
DVD-Video, DVD-RW, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD+RW, DVD-RAM,  
Video CD, Super VCD, CD, CD-R/-RW (WMA, MP3, JPEG,  
CD-DA, DivX)  
Tuner (analog)  
Receivable channels  
SECAM B/G  
Recording discs and formats  
DVD-R/-RW: VR mode and Video mode  
DVD+R/+RW: +VR mode  
DVD-RAM: VR mode  
DVD-R DL: VR mode and Video mode  
DVD+R DL: +VR mode  
PAL I  
PAL B/G  
Frequency  
Channel  
Frequency  
Channel  
VHF (low)  
VHF (high)  
47 MHz to 89 MHz  
E2 to E4  
X to Z  
44 MHz to 89 MHz  
A to C  
X to Z  
104 MHz to 300 MHz E5 to E12  
S1 to S20  
104 MHz to 300 MHz  
D to J  
11, 13  
S1 to S20  
M1 to M10  
U1 to U10  
Hyper  
UHF  
302 MHz to 470 MHz S21 to S41 302 MHz to 470 MHz S21 to S41  
470 MHz to 862 MHz E21 to E69 470 MHz to 862 MHz E21 to E69  
Video recording format  
Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13.5 MHz  
Compression format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MPEG  
SECAM D/K  
SECAM L  
Frequency  
PAL D/K  
Channel  
Frequency  
49 MHz to 94 MHz  
Channel  
FB, FC1, FC  
VHF (low)  
VHF (high)  
49 MHz to 65 MHz  
R1 to R5  
Audio recording format  
F1 to F6  
B to Q  
104 MHz to 300 MHz  
104 MHz to 300 MHz R6 to R12  
S1 to S20  
STEREO  
B/G - A2  
I - NICAM  
L - NICAM  
B/G - NICAM  
Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 kHz  
Compression format . . . . . . . . Dolby Digital or Linear PCM  
(uncompressed)  
Hyper  
UHF  
300 MHz to 470 MHz  
470 MHz to 862 MHz  
302 MHz to 470 MHz S21 to S41  
470 MHz to 862 MHz E21 to E69  
S21 to S41  
21 to 69  
Recording time  
HDD (250 GB)  
Tuner (digital)  
Receiving system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .DVB-T (2 K/8 K COFDM)  
Tuner VHF/UHF . . . . . . VHF band III (174 MHz to 230 MHz)  
UHF band IV, V (470 MHz to 862 MHz)  
Auto Channel Preset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 999 ch, Auto Preset,  
Auto Label, Auto Sort  
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stereo MPEG layer I/II  
Audio Decoder  
XP+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 36 h  
Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 53 h  
Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 106 h  
Long Play (LP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 212 h  
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 319 h  
Super Long Play (SLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 425 h  
Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 532 h  
Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 36 h to 711 h  
. . . . . . . . .Sampling frequencies: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz  
DVD-R/-RW, DVD+R/+RW, DVD-RAM  
This product’s digital tuner has been confirmed for use in the  
following countries: Belgium, France, Germany, Italy, Spain,  
Denmark, Finland, Netherlands, Sweden, Switzerland, UK.  
Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h  
Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 2 h  
Long Play (LP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 4 h  
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 6 h  
Super Long Play (SLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 8 h  
Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 10 h  
(DVD-R/-RW, DVD-RAM only)  
Manual Mode (MN)  
DVD-R/-RW/-RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 1 h to 13 h  
DVD+R/+RW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 1 h to 8 h  
176  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
16  
Input/Output  
Antenna  
. . . . . . . . .75  
. . . . . . . . . 75  
®
This product includes FontAvenue fonts licenced  
Ω
Ω
IEC 169-2 connector for VHF/UHF in/out (analog)  
IEC 169-2 connector for VHF/UHF in/out (digital)  
by NEC Corporation. FontAvenue is a registered  
trademark of NEC Corporation.  
Video input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV2  
Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)  
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector  
Video output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV1  
Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)  
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector  
RGB input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV2  
Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω)  
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector  
RGB output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV1  
Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω)  
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector (AV1)  
Audio input  
Microsoft product screen shots reprinted with permission  
from Microsoft Corporation.  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV2 L/R  
During audio input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 V rms  
(Input impedance: more than 22 kΩ)  
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector  
Audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV1  
During audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 V rms  
(Output impedance: less than 1.5 kΩ)  
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector (AV1)  
Control input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Mini jack  
Digital audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coaxial  
G-LINK™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Mini jack  
Common Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CA module  
DV input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-pin (front)  
(i.LINK/IEEE 1394 standard)  
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type A (front), Type B (front)  
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-pin  
AV Connectors (21-pin connector assignment)  
AV connector input/output . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-pin connector  
This connector provides the video and audio signals for  
connection to a compatible colour TV or monitor.  
PIN no.  
AV1 (RGB)-TV / AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)  
1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio 2/R out / Audio 2/R out  
2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – / Audio 2/R in  
11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G out / G in  
3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio 1/L out / Audio 1/L out  
6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – / Audio 1/L in  
15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R or C out / R or C in  
4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND  
17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND  
7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B out / B in  
19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Video out or Y out / Video out  
20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – / Video in or Y in  
8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status  
21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND  
Note: The specifications and design of this product are subject  
to change without notice, due to improvement.  
177  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
16  
sufficient. No warranty is made that the Gracenote Software or  
Gracenote Servers are error-free or that functioning of Gracenote  
Software or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted. Gracenote  
is not obligated to provide you with new enhanced or additional  
data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the future  
and is free to discontinue its services at any time.  
Music recognition technology and related data are provided by  
Gracenote®. Gracenote is the industry standard in music  
recognition technology and related content delivery. For more  
information, please visit www.gracenote.com.  
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR  
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT.  
GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL  
BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE  
OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE  
BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL  
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES.  
CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright ©  
2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright © 2000-  
2007 Gracenote. This product and service may practice one or  
more of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525; #6,061,680;  
#6,154,773, #6,161,132, #6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459,  
#6,330,593, and other patents issued or pending. Some services  
supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent:  
#6,304,523.  
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote.  
The Gracenote logo and logotype, and the “Powered by  
Gracenote” logo are trademarks of Gracenote.  
This application or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc.  
of Emeryville, California (”Gracenote”). The software from  
Gracenote (the “Gracenote Software”) enables this application to  
perform disc and/or file identification and obtain music-related  
information, including name, artist, track, and title information  
(“Gracenote Data”) from online servers or embedded databases  
(collectively, “Gracenote Servers”) and to perform other  
functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the  
intended End-User functions of this application or device.  
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the Gracenote  
Software, and Gracenote Servers for your own personal non-  
commercial use only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or  
transmit the Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to any  
third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE  
DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE  
SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.  
You agree that your non-exclusive license to use the Gracenote  
Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will  
terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your license  
terminates, you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote  
Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote  
reserves all rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,  
and the Gracenote Servers, including all ownership rights. Under  
no circumstances will Gracenote become liable for any payment  
to you for any information that you provide. You agree that  
Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights under this Agreement  
against you directly in its own name.  
The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track queries  
for statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned  
numeric identifier is to allow the Gracenote service to count  
queries without knowing anything about who you are. For more  
information, see the web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy  
for the Gracenote service.  
The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are  
licensed to you “AS IS.” Gracenote makes no representations or  
warranties, express or implied, regarding the accuracy of any  
Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote Servers. Gracenote  
reserves the right to delete data from the Gracenote Servers or to  
change data categories for any cause that Gracenote deems  
178  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Discover the benefits of registering your product online at  
http://www.pioneer.co.uk (or http://www.pioneer.eu)  
PIONEER CORPORATION  
4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.  
P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.  
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411  
PIONEER EUROPE NV  
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.  
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.  
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.  
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270  
K002_B_En  
Published by Pioneer Corporation.  
Copyright © 2007 Pioneer Corporation.  
All rights reserved.  
<ARB7384-A>  
Printed in  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Philips Carrying Case SJM3202 User Manual
Philips Clock Radio AJ 3240 00 User Manual
Philips Flat Panel Television PF9925 User Manual
Philips Headphones SHP 2000 User Manual
Philips Portable DVD Player PET7402A User Manual
Philips Universal Remote 9800i User Manual
Philips Video Gaming Accessories SWA2092W User Manual
Polycom Telephone SIP 31 User Manual
Proficient Audio Systems Speaker C605 User Manual
ProForm Treadmill PFTL78580 User Manual